Specifications

Bilaspur Municipal Corporation,
Chhattisgarh State
TENDER NO. 23/BMC/PC/2008-09 BILASPUR, DATED 25/07/2008
Tender Document
For
1. Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Sewerage
Pipelines including manholes and appurtenances.
2. Construction of Sewage Pumping Stations (Submersible

pump type), P/L DI rising main, including electrical,
mechanical and O&M for 3 years (extendable by 2 years, if
agreed mutually).
3. Road restoration works where sewers are laid in Bilaspur

Municipal Corporation Area.
4. The estimated cost of work is Rs.118.47 Crores
Volume – II: Special Specifications Forms &

Standard Specifications
Date of issue of Blank Tender Documents : From 25-07-2008 on BMC’s website

Date of Pre-bid meeting : On 04-08-2008 at 11.00 a.m..
Last date of Tender Submission : 19-08-2008 Upto 03.00 p.m.
Commissioner
Meinhardt Singapore Pte. Ltd.
A-8, Sector-16, Bilaspur Municipal Corporation ,
NOIDA – 201301 Town Hall, Bilaspur– 495001
Uttar Pradesh (INDIA) Chhattisgarh (INDIA)
Phone: (0120) – 2516165 Phone: (07752) – 413888
Fax: (0120) – 2515745 Fax: (07752) – 413888
Email: info@meinhardtindia.com
Email: commissionerbilaspur@yahoo.com
July - 2008
Page 1 of 238
TENDER DOCUMENT FOR
1. Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Sewerage Pipelines including

manholes and appurtenances.
2. Construction of Sewage Pumping Stations (Submersible pump type), P/L DI rising main,
including electrical, mechanical and O&M for 3 years (extendable by 2 years, if agreed
mutually).
3. Road restoration works where sewers are laid in Bilaspur Municipal Corporation Area.
CONTENTS
Sr. Item Details Page No.
No.
1.0 VOLUME - 1 : Invitation for Bids, Instructions to Bidder &

Conditions of Contract
Section-I : Invitation for Bids & Instructions to Bidders
Section-I (Part-A) : Invitation for Bids
Section-I (Part-B) : Abstract of Bid
Chapter – 1 : Instructions to Bidders
Chapter – 2 : General Conditions of Contract
Chapter – 3 : Special Conditions of Contract
2.0 VOLUME - II : SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS, FORMS

AND STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter – 4 : Special Specifications
Chapter – 5 : Appendix to Bid
Chapter – 6 : Sample Form of Acceptance and Agreement
Chapter – 7 : Sample Form of Security
Chapter – 8 : Standard Specifications
3.0 VOLUME - III : Drawings

Chapter - 9 : Standard Drawings and Sewer L-Section
Drawings
4.0 VOLUME - IV : Financial Bid
Chapter – 10 : Form of Bid, Schedules and Bill of Quantities
Page 2 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
VOLUME – II: Specifications, Forms of Bid and Schedules
CHAPTER-4: SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER-4
SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 3 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
CHAPTER -4
SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS (CIVIL WORKS) - Part 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
1. Special Conditions……………………………….. 6 - 22
2. Site Preparation…………………………………… 23 - 25
3. Earth Work………………………………………… 26 – 35
4. Blasting Operations………………………………. 36 – 42
5. Filling Operations…………………………………. 43 – 45
6. Form Work…………………………………………. 46 – 51
7. Reinforcement…………………………………….. 52 – 55
8. Concrete Works…………………………………… 56 – 68
9. Structural Steel……………………………………. 69 – 74
10. Pipe work………………………………………….. 75 – 90
11. Brick Masonry……...………………………………. 91 – 93
12. Paving, Flooring & Skirting………………………. 94 – 97
13. Cement Plastering and Pointing………………… 98 – 101
14. Wood Work………………………………………… 102 – 106
15. Roof, Doors and Windows, Rolling Shutter…...…… 107 – 112
16. Painting and Protective Coating………………… 113 – 118
17. Miscellaneous Works…………………………….. 119 – 122
18. Mechanical Works……………………………….. 123 – 155
19. Electrical Works………………………………….. 156 – 212
Specifications for Operation and Maintenance of

20. 213 - 222
Works ………………………………………………
Page 4 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
CHAPTER -4 : SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
The following IS codes shall be applicable for the works:
1. Earthwork excavation - IS 3764 (1992)

2. Concrete - IS 1791 (1985)
3. RCC works - IS 456 (2000)
IS 516 (1959, 2000)
4. Steel - IS 800 (1984)
5. Water retaining structures - IS 3370 (Part I to IV, 1965-1967)
6. Cement - IS 8112 (1989), IS 12330 (1988)
7. Aggregates - IS 383 (1970)
8. Pre-cast concrete pipes (with & without Reinforcement) - IS 458 (2003)
9. Specification for Pre-cast concrete manhole covers and Frames - IS 12592 (2002)
10. Laying of concrete pipes - IS 783 (1985, reaffirmed in 2007)
11. Code of practice for Ancillary structures in sewerage system - IS 4111 (Part1 – Manholes,
1986 & Part 4 – Pumping station and pumping mains, 1968)
12. Pre stressed concrete pipes - IS 784 (2001)
13. Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for pre-stressed concrete Part 1 Cold drawn
stress – relieved wire -IS 1785 (Part I, 1983)
14. Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for pre-stressed concrete Part 2 As drawn wire -
IS 1785 (Part II, 1983)
15. Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement Part I mild steel & medium tensile steel bars - IS 432 (Part I), 1982
16. Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement Part II Hard drawn steel wire - IS 432 – Part II, 1982
17. Specification for hard – drawn steel wire fabric for concrete R/F - IS 1566 (1982)
18. Code of practice for bending and fixing bars for concrete R/F - IS 2502 (1963)
19. Specification for rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains & sewers - IS 5382 (1985)
20. Code of practice for pre-stressed concrete - IS 1343 (1980)
21. Specification for Common Burnt Clay Building Bricks - IS 1077 (1992)
22. Code of practice for Brickwork - IS 2212 (1991)
23. Specifications – common burnt clay bricks – IS 1077 (1992)
24. Specifications for sewer bricks - IS 4885 (1988)
25. Dimensional requirements for rubber gaskets for mechanical joints and push on Joints for use
with cast iron pipes water, gas and sewage - IS 12820 (2004)
26. Methods of test for concrete pipes - IS 3597 (1998)
27. Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipe for water, gas & sewage - IS 1536 (2001)
28. Salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings - IS 651 (1992)
29. Code of practice for laying glazed stoneware pipes - IS 4127 (1983)
Note: 1. IS numbers shall refer to the latest edition and/or re-affirmation, as the case may be.
2. Applicable Indian Standards are mentioned elsewhere in the bid document.
Page 5 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-1
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents
Clause Description
1.1 General
1.2 Standards
1.3 Drawings
1.4 Data for setting out the works
1.5 Geological Data
1.6 Access to the site
1.7 Claims for Damage to Persons or property
1.8 Right-of-Way
1.9 Protection of Property and Utilities
1.10 Superintendence and Labour Competency
1.11 Engineer to Approve
1.12 Manufacturer' s Supervision & Instruction
1.13 Work Site Maintenance
1.14 Protection from Rain and Winds
1.15 Use of Explosives
1.16 Amenities to be provided
1.17 Works to be Kept Clear of Water
1.18 Discharge of Water Into Existing Streams, etc.
1.19 Temporary Fencing
1.20 Temporary works
1.21 Construction facilities
1.22 Materials
1.23 Equipment Performance
1.24 Equipment
1.25 Testing and Rejecting
1.26 Drawings and Data to be furnished by the Contractor
1.27 Measurements
1.28 Compliance with laws and Regulations
1.29 Works on Roads and Railways
1.30 Fire hazard (Naked Lights)
1.31 Site to be kept Tidy
1.32 Final Conditions of works
1.33 Daily record and weekly report
1.34 Labour
Page 6 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-1 : SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1.1 General
As detailed in the bill of quantities, specifications and special specifications given

elsewhere, the bid price shall include all labour and machinery and all materials necessary
for the proper and safe execution of the works, for tests at site and at the manufacturer's
works, for insurance and for delivery of goods to the site within the Project Area, for the
proper maintenance and for discharging every obligation and requirement of the Contract
Documents as stated in the Chapter -2 General Conditions of Contract.
Contractors shall completely acquaint themselves with the requirements of the

specifications. They shall ensure that their bids are complete and are prepared as required.
Incomplete bids shall be rejected.
For pumping stations, before commencing the works, the Contractor shall check the
Bearing Capacity of soil and study structural drawings of various structures proposed in
the pumping station and obtain approval of the Engineer before proceeding to
construction.
Works under Contracts
a. The Employer gives no warranty to the due conduct of the other contracts. Nothing
herein contained shall be interpreted as granting to the Contractor exclusive occupancy
of the site of the project.
b. The Contractor shall ensure that the completion time of his construction shall be
strictly according to the programme so as not to hinder the progress of other contracts.
Period of Completion
A mutually agreed Primavera / MS Project work schedule shall be made before

commencement of the work. The bidder shall submit his proposed work schedule as a part
of his bid. The entire project shall be completed and handed over in all respects within 24
months including trial run period. The defect liability period shall start only after the
entire project is completed including any additional work to be carried out.
1.2 Standards
Where reference is made to ‘Standard’, it shall be the latest revision / edition / re-
affirmation of the Indian Standard issued by the Bureau of Indian Standards.
All materials and equipment supplied and workmanship performed in regard to which
specifications of standards or code of practice have been issued by the Bureau of Indian
Standards shall be in accordance with such specifications and Standards even though
other Standards may be quoted in those Specifications.
Wherever reference is made within these documents to certain standard specifications, the
reference shall be construed to mean the Standards with all subsequent amendments,
changes or additions as thereafter adopted and published that are in effect on the date of
the Work Order and during the currency of Contract. Where the relevant Standard
provides for the furnishing of a certificate of compliance in all respects of the particular
Page 7 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
material or of the finished goods, the Contractor shall obtain such a Certificate and
forward it to the Engineer, when so required. The work shall be carried out as per sound
engineering practice.
1.3 Drawings
A list of drawings as part of bid document is given in Volume-III, Chapter-9.
Any additional drawings which the Contractor requires to interpret the drawings for the
use of his employees shall be prepared by the Contractor and four copies of each such
drawing shall be supplied to the Engineer'
s Representative, if required by him.
The Contractor shall progressively amend the Drawings from the Record Drawings of the
contract, adding such additional Drawings of his own at the same or other approved scales
and in the same style and notation as are necessary to form a complete record of the
Works as constructed.
As each section of the Works is completed and Engineer' s approval obtained, the
contractor shall prepare the corresponding Record / As-built Drawings as above and
deliver one set of prints to the Engineer within 2 weeks for approval.
On receipt of the Engineer's approval for each Record / As-built Drawing, which will be
given only after necessary corrections have been made, the Contractor shall deliver the
Drawings in CD and two prints thereof to the Engineer, within one month of completion
of the section of the Works concerned.
1.4 Data for Setting out the Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the Works and
for the correctness of the positions, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts of the
Works. Elevations shown for various parts of the work refer to the Mean Sea Level.
Details of the restrictions if any will be provided by the Engineer at the commencement of
the Works and the final alignment shall then be set out by the contractor with the
Engineer. The Contractor shall give 2 working days notice in writing to avail the services
for laying out any portion of the work.
The contractor shall check TBMs from GTS Bench Mark of the Survey of India, located
inside the District Court Building in Bilaspur, which is to be verified by the Engineer.
Full facilities to attend and check any survey shall be provided by the Contractor.
Wherever applicable, the Contractor shall ascertain and locate and peg out on the ground
the boundaries of the various works as shown on the Drawings or otherwise specified
then set out peg within that corridor in consultation with the Engineer the centre line of
the pipeline.
After clearing and before any excavation of any part of the Site is carried out or the
Works thereon begun, the Contractor shall take and record levels of any such part in the
manner specified or as agreed with the Engineer and such levels when agreed with him
shall form the basis of measurement and payment. The Contractor shall carry out to the
Engineer's instructions, all extra survey required to resolve any doubts which may arise as
to the correctness of any survey or record and the Engineer' s decision shall be final
regarding what shall be recorded as the correct dimensions and levels.
Page 8 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
The level and dimensions which have been agreed by the Engineer shall form the Basis of
Measurement of the Works.
1.5 Geological Data
Bidders shall be deemed to have satisfied themselves as to the form and nature of the site
before submitting their bids.
1.6 Access to the Site
The Contractor shall arrange to construct, maintain and afterwards remove and reinstate
any access required for and in connection with the execution of the Works at his cost.
Reinstatement shall include restoring the area of any access route to at least the degree of
safety, stability and drainage that obtained before the Contractor entered the site.
1.7 Claims for Damage to Persons or Property
Any claim received by the Engineer in respect of matters in which the Contractor is
required under the Contract to indemnify the Employer will be passed on to the
Contractor who shall likewise inform the Engineer of any such claim which may be
submitted directly to him by a claimant. The Contractor shall do everything necessary
including notifying the insurers of claims received, to ensure that all claims are settled
properly and expeditiously and shall keep the Engineer informed as to the progress made
towards settlement, failing which the Engineer shall be entitled to make direct payment to
claimants of all outstanding amount due to them in the Engineer' s opinion and without
prejudice to any other method of recovery to deduct by way of to offset the amounts so
paid from any sum due or which become due to the Contractor.
1.8 Right-of-Way
The right-of-way and permission to enter upon the land for the Works will be provided by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall, however, make his own arrangements and pay all
expenses for any additional area that may be required by him outside the right-of-way to
be provided by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and negotiating the use of any land
outside the designated area, which he requires for stockpiling pipes, erection of temporary
structures, maintenance of plant and other activities related to the Contract. The
Contractor shall produce to the Engineer as required a copy of the agreements he has
negotiated with each owner or occupier for the use of such land.
All working areas and other areas used shall be completely reinstated in a proper
workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Before entering upon the Site with any plant or in any way interfering with the existing
ground surface, vegetation and structures, the Contractor shall prepare an agreed
photographic record indicating clearly the condition of the Site prior to commencement of
the works. This record shall be related to fixed features and chainages in such a way that
it can later be used to verify the adequacy of reinstatement.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage which he may do to land and
property outside his necessary working space which shall be as agreed with the owner.
Compensation for damage to such land or property shall be assessed by the Engineer for
settlement by the Contractor.
Page 9 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
1.9 Protection of Property and Utilities
a. Protection of Property
The contractor shall conduct his operation in such a manner as to avoid injury or damage
to adjacent property, improvements, or facilities.
Buildings, trees and shrubbery that are not designated for removal, pole lines, fences,
guard rail, culverts conduits, pipelines, electric and telephone cables, etc, and other
improvements within or adjacent to the street or right-of-way shall be protected from
damage. The Contractor shall provide and install suitable safeguards to protect such
utilities from injury or damage which, if injured or damaged by reason of the Contractor'
s
operations, shall be replaced in such good condition as when entered upon the work, or as
required by the Specifications or shall be liable to pay compensation.
The Contractor shall reinstate all damages to street, roads, highways, ditches,
embankments, bridges, culverts or other public or private property, which may be caused
during transporting equipment' s materials or construction activities. The Contractor shall
make satisfactory and acceptable reinstatement to the damaged utilities as specified in the
contract and to the satisfaction of Engineer.
b. Protection of Utilities and Sub-structures
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, before commencing any excavation, to

contact all possible owners of utilities within the work area and to ascertain from records
or otherwise the existence, position and ownership of all utilities, utility structures and
service connections. No error or omission regarding locating such utilities shall relieve
the Contractor from his responsibility in protecting all such utilities.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or in these specifications, all water lines, light
poles, telephone poles, telephone cables, conduits and other subsurface structure of any
nature along the work shall be protected by the Contractor at his own expense and shall
not be disturbed, disconnected or damaged by him during the progress of the work. The
Contractor shall make good at his own expense any damage whatsoever to existing
services resulting from his operations to the approval of and in accordance with the
instructions of the authority or owner concerned and shall keep the Employer indemnified
at all times from all claims which may be brought to the Employer for damage to the said
services.
Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense any temporary works necessary
to support or protect the services affected by his excavations to the satisfaction of the
Authorities or owners concerned. All costs involved in complying with this Clause shall
be deemed to be covered by the Contractor Rates or Sum quoted.
No valve or other control of the water system shall be operated by the Contractor without
approval of the Engineer. If so approved by the Engineer, all concerned affected by such
operation shall be notified by the Contractor at least one day before the operation and
intimated of the probable time when service will be restored.
The Contractor shall not draw any water from any fire hydrant or water supply line for
use on the work unless he has sought written permission to do so from the Engineer.
Page 10 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
The Contractor shall exercise due caution when working below overhead cables,
particularly as regards the operation of cranes and excavating plant and shall comply with
all safety requirements of the CSEB and Telecom authorities.
1.10 Superintendence and Labour Competency
Whenever the Contractor is not present on any part of the work where it may be desired to
give direction, orders given by the Engineer or his representative shall be received and
obeyed by the Superintendent or Foreman as the Contractor' s authorized representative
who may be in charge of the work. Any order given by the Engineer or his representative
not otherwise required to be in writing by the Specifications, shall, on request of the
Contractor, be given or confirmed in writing. An authorized representative of the
Contractor shall be there at the site of the work during working hours.
Any Superintendent, Foreman, Labour, or other person employed on the work by the
Contractor, who fails or refuses to perform the work in the manner specified herein, shall
be discharged immediately and such person shall not again be employed on the work.
When required in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall discharge any person who
is, in the opinion of the Engineer, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise
unsatisfactory. Such discharge shall not be the basis of any claim for compensation
against the Employer.
1.11 Engineer to Approve
The whole of the works and parts thereof shall be at the general direction of the Engineer
or his Representative, whose decision shall be final conclusive and binding on the
Contractor on all questions relating to materials, lines and level, construction, curing
procedure and time, and the meaning of plans, drawings and these Documents. The
Engineer or his representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage
may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. He shall have authority
to reject any work or materials which do not conform to the Contract Specifications, to
direct the application of forces to such portions of the work as in his judgement is
requested, to order the labour force increased or diminished, to direct the sequence of the
work, and to decide questions which arise in the execution of the work.
a. All materials and work shall be performed only in the presence of the Engineer or his
authorized representative and any work done in the absence of the Engineer or his
authorized representative shall be subject to rejection. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer at least two working days in advance of any work to be done, in order that
inspection services may not be interrupted.
b. Contractor shall give at least one week notice to the Engineer of his intention to
receive materials or to carry out further parts of the works. The Contractor shall not
proceed to mix materials, build or pour concrete, or strike shuttering or scaffolding in
any part of the Works, before the Engineer or his representative has physically seen
and checked:
i. The quality of the constituent materials and the accuracy of the mix proportioning
methods and the cleanliness of the reinforcement.
ii. The accuracy of the line and levels as set by the Contractor.
iii. The control being exercised by the Contractor and his staffs in ensuring the
specified proportions and in particular the water/cement ratio, the sufficiency of
Page 11 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
mixing, the time and method of placing, and the adequacy of compaction, of
concrete.
iv. The quality of materials.
v. The sufficiency of curing upon which the Engineer or his representative shall
approve the said stages of work, or he shall reject the materials or methods, or he
shall defer the said stages of work until the Contractor shows the materials,
methods and controls which meet with the Engineer' s approval.
c. Engineer or his representative will continuously inspect the work being carried out
and will always be available on site throughout the Contractor' s working hours. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the strength and sufficiency of the form work,
strutting, etc, and shall provide the necessary on-site supervision of labour and for
the control of quality and progress of the Works.
d. The Contractor shall provide Engineer and his representative at Contractor’s cost all
equipments, instruments, skilled labour, etc. to check the setting up of the work.
1.12 Manufacturer's Supervision & Instruction
The Contractor shall arrange for the services of competent factory-trained personnel from
the manufacturers of major items if so required by the Engineer to supervise the
installation and commissioning of their equipment. All costs for providing these services
shall be borne by the Contractor and shall have been included in the price for
commissioning the equipment.
1.13 Work Site Maintenance
a. Access to Property Adjacent to the Works
The convenience of abutting owners along the street and pedestrians and traffic in the
street shall be provided by implementing approved ‘Traffic Management Plan’.
Convenient access to driveways, house and building adjoining the work shall be
maintained and temporary approaches to intersecting streets and alleys shall be provided
and kept in good condition. When a section of surfacing, pavement or a structure has been
completed, it shall be opened for use by traffic on the directions of the Engineer. In order
that unnecessary delay to the travelling public may be avoided, the Contractor shall
provide competent flagmen whose sole duty shall consist of directing traffic either
through or around the work.
b. Debris
Where any plant or earth is likely to cause a nuisance or a danger to users of the street or
access, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have such plant, debris, earth or
mud removed as often as is necessary in order to maintain the street or access in a clean
and safe manner.
c. Water Hydrants and Utility Valves
The Contractor shall not prevent the free access to water valves, water hydrant, or utility
valves.
d. Rights of Access
Page 12 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
The Contractor shall at all times provide proper facilities for access and inspection of the
work by the Engineer or his representatives.
1.14 Protection from Rain and Winds
The Contractor shall make all precautions to prevent damage to the Temporary Works
and the partially completed structure from the effects of weather including winds and rain
which prevail in the Project Area during the monsoon. Any remedial work ordered by the
Engineer shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the cost shall be borne
by the Contractor.
Deleted
1.16 Amenities to be provided
Deleted
1.17 Works to be kept Clear of Water
The Contractor shall keep the Works well drained until the Engineer certifies that the
whole of the Works is substantially complete and shall ensure as far as practicable all
work is carried out in the dry. Excavated areas shall be kept well drained and free from
standing water.
The Contractor shall provide pumping that may be necessary to exclude water from the
works while construction is in progress. Such temporary works shall not be removed
without the approval of the Engineer or his representative. The Contractor is to take all
necessary precautions against any possibility of flotation of or damage to any partially
completed structure.
Notwithstanding any approval by the Engineer of the Contractor' s arrangements for the
exclusion of water, the Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency thereof and for
keeping the works safe at all times, particularly during any floods, and for making good at
his own expense any damage to the Works including any that may be attributable to
floods. Any loss of production or additional costs of any kind that may result from floods
shall be at the Contractor'
s own risk and shall not constitute an "expected risk" under the
Conditions of Contract.
Costs incurred by the Contractor in complying with the requirements of these shall be
deemed to be included in the Contract Rates for excavation, foundation concrete,
masonry, concrete, etc., if not separately provided for in the bid.
1.18 Discharge of Water into Existing Streams, etc.
The Contractor shall make provision for the proper discharge and disposal from the
Works and any temporary works of all water and waste water howsoever arising, and the
methods for disposal shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Waste products other
than excess excavated material shall be carted away as provided elsewhere. The
requirements of this Clause shall not limit any of the Contractor'
s obligations or liabilities,
as in the Chapter-2: General Conditions of Contract.
Page 13 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
1.19 Temporary Fencing
The Contractor shall erect, maintain and remove suitable and approved temporary fencing
to enclose such areas of the Works and all areas of land occupied by the Contractor within
the site as may be necessary to implement his obligations under the contract to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Where any temporary fencing has to be erected alongside a
public road, footpath, etc., it shall be of the type required by and shall be erected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.20 Temporary Works
The Contractor shall at has own expense provide and maintain in good condition such
temporary works / buildings, stores, sanitary conveniences, access roads and other
facilities as may be necessary for the execution and completion of the Works. The
positioning of all such facilities shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No
temporary work and structures shall be erected within the Site without the prior approval
of the Engineer. All such facilities shall comply with the requirements of the Local
Authorities.
Where Temporary Works and structures are to be erected on private property the
Contractor shall at his own expense make his own arrangements with the owner
concerned and pay all necessary fees or charges in connection therewith.
1.21 Construction Facilities
a. Water Supply: The Contractor shall provide to his staff, suitable supply of water for
drinking, washing, sanitation and general cleaning down in addition to that required for
construction of the Works.
b. Electrical Supplies: The Contractor shall make all arrangements for the supply,
installation, operation, maintenance, and subsequent removal of any temporary supplies
of electricity for lighting and ventilation of all offices, stores, laboratories and other
temporary structures by him in addition to any supplies that may be required in
connection with the construction of the Works.
c. Telephone: Any telephone facilities which the Contractor may install in connection
with the work shall be made available for use of the Engineer or his representative
without charge.
Contractor shall provide for all facilities required as indicated by the Factory Inspector or
other Government agencies and as per labour act.
d. Temporary Storage Structures: The temporary structures provided by the Contractor

shall be sufficient for the storage of all materials. The temporary storage structures need
not all be at one location, but shall be erected at points appropriate to different parts of the
works. Each temporary storage structure shall be weatherproof and lockable with a firm,
level, dry floor, small loose items shall be stacked on shelves.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and insurance of the contents of the
temporary storage structure. Materials of flammable, toxic or corrosive nature shall be
stored separately under safe conditions to the approval of the Engineer meeting such
conditions as laid down by the concerned authorities in this regard.
e. Transportation Facilities: The Contractor shall investigate the availability of

transportation facilities and shall make all arrangements necessary for the delivery of
Page 14 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
materials to be used for the work. The Contractor shall make his own investigation on the
condition of available public roads access, rights-of-way, and of restrictions, bridge load
limits and other limitations affecting transportation and ingress and egress at the site of
work.
f. Dust Control: The Contractor shall conduct his operations and activities in such a
manner that no operation shall be conducted which emits excessively into the atmosphere
any flying dust or dirt, which might constitute a nuisance and air pollution.
g. Sanitation: The Contractor shall maintain the site and all working areas in a good
sanitary condition and in all matters of health and sanitation shall comply with the
requirements of Local Medical Officer of Health or other competent authority. The
Contractor shall provide and maintain for his staff and workmen enclosed sanitary
facilities which shall be free from flies and odour. Such facilities shall be kept clean with
suitable insecticide.
h. Safety Measures: The Contractor shall conduct his operations in a manner so as to

ensure the safety of his employees and all persons entering the Site.
i) The Contractor shall train his staff in safe working practices and shall issue to them
necessary safety wear including reinforced footwear, safety jackets & helmets,
goggles, hand gloves, etc, which shall be worn at all times. The Engineer shall have
the power of immediate removal from the site of any employee who persistently
scorns safety procedures or any supervisor who condemns safe working.
ii) The safety of personnel in pipe trenches shall be constantly monitored and the
Contractor shall provide proper trench support like struttings, sheet piles, etc, as
suitable and access arrangements and shall be deemed to have included in his rate
and prices for the provision of the same.
iii) The Engineer may order additional trench support as he considers necessary but this
shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his safety obligations and shall not entitle
the Contractor to additional payment.
iv) All electrical and mechanical plant operated by the Contractor shall be maintained in
a safe and reliable condition. The Engineer shall have the power regarding unsafe
plant to be stopped pending repair, or, at his option, removed from the Site.
Operations on or near high-voltage cables whether buried or overhead, shall be
carried out only with the specific knowledge and approval of the CSEB.
v) The Contractor shall at his own expense provide and maintain to the approval of the
Engineer all notices, fencing, watching and lighting necessary to ensure the security
of the Works and the safe-keeping of materials and tools stored on site.
vi) The Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation of spaces where foul air or toxic
gases from solvents or other sources could accumulate while work is being carried
out. Deep enclosed spaces shall be checked for toxic gases before personnel enter.
The Contractor shall provide for gas masks, safety and protective clothing, foot wear,
hand gloves and unearthing wear to his personnel at all such places.
vii) Barricading and lighting (during nights) shall be provided for all trenches with
warning signals like ‘Deep Excavation-Men at work’ etc, both in Hindi and English.
No material shall be dumped in the storm water drains which will obstruct flow of
water.
Page 15 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
viii) The Contractor shall be required to provide at each principal working location at his
own, complete ‘First Aid Kit’ and shall keep them in metal boxes in his site offices.
The kits shall be in the charge of either the Contractor' s site representative or some
other responsible person who will be on the location during all working hours to
ensure that the ‘First Aid Kit’ is available without delay at all times when the work is
in progress. One senior member of the Contractor' s staff at each principal working
location shall be trained in simple first aid duties.
ix) The Contractor shall so conduct his operations as to offer the least possible
obstruction and inconvenience to traffic or pedestrians, and he shall have under
construction no greater amount of work then he can handle properly with due regard
for the rights of the public. Where existing streets are not available as debtors, all
traffic shall be permitted to pass through the work with as little delay and
inconvenience as possible, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
x) The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury which may be caused on
any property by trespassing by the Contractor or his employees in the course of their
employment, whether the said trespass was committed with or without the consent or
knowledge of the Contractor.
j. Representative for Emergencies: The Contractor shall file with the Engineer, the
names, addresses and telephone numbers of representatives who can be contacted in the
place where Headquarters of the Engineer is situated and project area, at any time in case
of an emergency. These representatives must be fully authorized and equipped to deal
with conditions arising at short notice.
k. Contractor's Offices, etc.
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary office, sanitary conveniences,
stores, workshops, etc, and the like necessary for the completion of the Works and the
location of these shall be to the general approval of the Engineer'
s representative.
2. The Contractor shall also provide, maintain and subsequently remove any temporary
accommodation and living facilities including all necessary services for water supply,
drainage, lighting and heating, roads, paths, parking places and refuse disposal for his
staff / employees.
1.22 Materials
The term "materials" shall mean all materials, goods and articles of every kind whether as
processed or manufactured and equipment and plant of every kind to be supplied by the
Contractor for incorporation in the Works.
a. All materials shall be new and of the kinds and qualities described in the relevant
specifications and shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the material offered
is equal or superior to the materials specified for the use to which it is to be put and
has obtained the Engineer’s approval in writing to its use.
b. Where materials to be used for any component have not been laid down in the
Specifications, the Contractor shall use only those materials in such compositions as
have been proved in actual services to be the most suitable for the particular purpose,
and approved by the Engineer.
Page 16 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
c. Specified make or equivalent make conforming to BIS specification shall be supplied

by the Contractor. Brand names used herein are merely to describe the nature of the
desired equipment and not used to endorse or indicate a preference for a particular
product or manufacture. Goods, which have similar characteristics and provide
performance and quality equal or higher than those specified, shall be acceptable as
per Engineer’s approval.
d. As soon as practicable, after receiving the order to ‘Commence the Works’, the
Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the names of the suppliers from whom he
proposes to obtain any materials, but he shall not place any order without the approval
of the Engineer which will be withheld until samples have been submitted and
satisfactorily tested. The Contractor shall thereafter keep the Engineer informed of
orders for all items and delivery dates shall be intimated one week before arrival at
site.
e. Materials shall be transported, handled and stored in such a manner as to prevent

deterioration, damage or contamination.
1.23 Equipment Performance
Where performance of equipment is specified or accepted at the time of bid, failure of the
equipment to perform at the specified level will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Engineer reserve the right not to accept such equipment and to withhold any moneys
due and to make claims on the performance bond in the event of failure of equipment to
meet the specified performance and duty.
1.24 Equipment
All mechanical and electrical plant used by the Contractor in the execution of the Works
shall be such type, size and method of working as the Engineer shall approve.
The Engineer' s approval to use mechanical and electrical plant will not be unreasonably
withheld, but if in the Engineer'
s opinion circumstances arise which make it desirable that
the use of plant should be suspended either temporarily or permanently, the Contractor
shall change the method of performing the works affected at his own cost and he shall
have no cause for claim on account of having to carry on the work by another method nor
shall he have cause for claim if any order issued by the Engineer, results in the
mechanical or electrical plant having to stand idle for a period of any duration whatsoever
or having to be removed from the Site.
a. The Contractor shall furnish a price list of recommended spare parts required for
satisfactory working and maintenance of the equipment for a period of two years. The
Engineer however reserves the right to purchase the recommended parts either
partially or in excess.
b. While quoting the prices of equipment in the schedule of prices, Contractor shall
indicate the make and type of the equipment against the price quoted for the particular
equipment, in case the make and type of the equipment offered is not matching with
the list of approved makes enclosed with the specification.
1.25 Testing and Rejecting
a. Operation and Testing: After all construction is complete and before acceptance,
the Contractor shall perform tests as called for in the Specifications. The Contractor
Page 17 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
shall demonstrate to the Engineer the operating facilities for proper sequence of
operation and satisfactory performance of the individual components. The Contractor
shall also demonstrate the satisfactory performance of the entire system after
assembly/erection. Any improper operation of the system or any improper, negligent
or faulty construction shall be repaired or corrected to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall make such changes, adjustments or replacement of
equipment as may be required to make the same comply with the Specifications, or
replace any defective parts or material.
b. Tests and Samples: Pursuant to Clauses of the General Conditions of Contract, the
Contractor shall submit samples of such materials as may be required by the Engineer
including building aggregates, bricks, cement, concrete cubes cast in situ, pipes and
fittings, etc, and shall carry out the tests required and directed and witnessed by the
Engineer or his representative at the site, at the supplier' s premises or a laboratory
approved by the Engineer.
1. Samples shall be submitted and tests shall be carried out sufficiently early to
enable further samples to be submitted and tested if required by the Engineer.
Samples for testing will generally be selected and tested by the Engineer for
material to be utilised in the project and all tests will be under the supervision of,
as directed by, and at such points as may be convenient to the Engineer.
2. Material requiring testing shall be furnished in sufficient time before intended use
so as to allow for testing. No materials represented by tests may be used prior to
receipt of written approval of said materials. Samples that are of value after
testing shall remain the property of the Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 10 days notice in writing of the
date on which any of the materials will be ready for testing or inspection at the
supplier's premises or at a laboratory approved by the Engineer and unless the
Engineer shall attend at the appointed place within the said ten days the test may
proceed in his absence, provided that the Contractor shall in any case submit to
the Engineer within seven days of every test such number of certified copies of
the readings as the Engineer may require.
4. Approval by the Engineer as to the placing of orders for materials or as to

samples or tests not prejudice any of the Engineer' s powers under the Contract,
particulars as to the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract. Any delay
in the progress of the Works resulting from the non-approval of samples shall be
the Contractor' s responsibility.
5. Tests necessary to satisfy statutory authorities like pollution control board,

electrical inspector, etc, shall be conducted and necessary additions/modifications
required shall be carried out as may be necessary without extra cost.
c. Defective Work or Material: The inspection of the work shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of his obligations to fulfill his contract, and defective works shall
be made good, and unsuitable materials may be rejected, notwithstanding that such
work and materials have been previously overlooked by the Engineer and accepted.
If the work or any part thereof shall be found defective at any time before the final
acceptance of the whole work, the Contractor shall forthwith make good such defect,
without additional compensation, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
Page 18 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
1. Should it be considered necessary or advisable for the Engineer at any time

before final acceptance of the work, to make an examination of work already
completed by removing or exposing the work, the Contractors shall on request,
promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labour and materials. If such work is
found to be defective in any respect due to fault of the Contractor, he shall defray
all the expenses of such examinations and of satisfactory reconstruction.
2. All costs for retesting and re-inspection which are necessitated by defective
materials and/or workman ship shall be at the sole expense of the Contractor.
1.26 Drawings and Data to be Furnished by the Contractor
Shop drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer as called for in the
Specifications, including, but not restricted to, reinforcing steel placement and bending
diagrams, shop drawings for structural steel, for miscellaneous iron work, working
drawings for mechanical and electrical equipment, electrical / instrumentation and control
work and drawings for other work for which the Engineer' s approval is required.
a. Attested performance curves are to be furnished for all pumps showing the
characteristics head vs discharge in metric units and including efficiency and
horsepower curves with the required operating point as guaranteed so marked.
b. A minimum of three copies of the drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval, two of which shall be retained by the Engineer. The remaining drawing,
approved or corrected will be returned to the Contractor.
c. Approval of shop and working drawings shall indicate only that such drawings
generally express the intent of the Contract documents and shall both be construed as
a complex check. Approval of drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility of furnishing all materials and work required by and conforming to the
plans and specifications. Approval of shop drawings shall, in addition, not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility of accuracy of dimensions, provisions of adequate
connections and the proper fittings of the work in the completed construction.
d. Prior to submittal, the Contractor shall check the shop drawings for accuracy and
completeness especially that the relation to adjoining works is accurately shown.
Approval of shop drawings does not authorize any substitution of material or other
departure from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Requests for such
changes shall be made the subject of separate correspondence. Shop drawings shall
be submitted at such time as will permit the Engineer not less than seven days for
checking.
e. Upon completion of the work and prior to final approval, the Contractor shall file
with the Engineer three complete sets of drawings and instructions required for
operation and maintenance of all items of equipment and any instrumentation
furnished. These shall include instructions for lubrication, repair and servicing,
illustrated parts lists and all other pertinent information available from the equipment
manufacturers.
f. All the guarantee certificates, performance curves, literature, etc, issued by the
suppliers of equipment like pumps, motors, etc. shall be handed over to the Engineer.
Page 19 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
1.27 Measurements
As per the General Conditions of Contract.
1.28 Compliance with Laws and Regulations
The Contractor shall keep himself informed of all laws, ordinances, and regulations in any
manner affecting those employed on the work, or the materials used in the work, or in any
way affecting the conduct of the work, and of all orders and decrees of bodies or tribunals
having jurisdictions or authority over the same. He shall at all times himself observe and
comply with, and shall require all his agents, employees to observe and comply with all
such applicable laws, ordinances, regulations, orders and decrees in effect or which may
become effective before completion of this contract, and shall protect and indemnify the
Employer against any claim of liability arising from or based upon the violation of any
such law, ordinance, regulation, order, or decree, whether by himself or his employees.
Unless otherwise explicitly provided in these specifications all permits, and licenses
necessary to the execution of the work shall be secured by the Contractor at his own
expense.
1.29 Works on Roads and Railways
1.29.1 Work on Roads
All operations necessary for the execution of the Works and for the construction of any
Temporary Works shall so far as compliance with the contract be carried out so as not to
interfere unnecessarily or improperly with the access to and use of public or private roads
and footpaths whether in possession of the Government or of any other person and the
Contractor shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims, demands, proceedings,
damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising out on in relation to any such
matter.
No private road and footpath shall be blocked or obstructed by the Contractor without the
prior consent and approval of the Engineer. No public road shall be blocked or obstructed
by the Contractor without the prior approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall at his own expense provide, operate and maintain to the satisfaction
of the Engineer and the Police Authorities, all temporary diversions, bridges, barriers,
traffic signals, lights and watchmen, as may be required to ensure the safety and the
convenience of users of public and private roads affected by the Works or disturbed by
him during the progress of the Works.
1.29.2 Work under Railways Tracks
The sewer main proposed below Railway line shall be laid as per the rules and regulations
of the Railway Authority. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities to the
Railways for doing their job. In case the Railways decides to restrict their job up to
providing necessary duct only for laying the pipe, the contractor shall be required to lay
the pipe line as an item of work.
Page 20 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
1.30 Fire Hazard (Naked Lights)
No naked light shall be used by the Contractor on the site without the permission in
writing of the Engineer. If, in the Engineer' s opinion the use of light may cause a fire
hazard, the Contractor shall, at no extra cost, take such additional precaution and provide
such additional fire fighting equipment as the Engineer considers necessary. The term
"naked light'shall be welding or in cutting metals, or open fires used for cooking.
Compliance in this regard shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities and
obligations under the Contract.
1.31 Site to be kept tidy
Throughout the progress of his work, the Contractor shall keep his site and all working
areas in tidy and workmanlike conditions and free from rubbish and waste materials. Any
temporary works, constructional plant, materials or other things which for the time being
are not required for use by the Contractor may with the consent of the Engineer' s
representative be removed from the site, but otherwise shall be dispersed about the site in
an orderly manner and shall be properly and securely stored thereon. The requirements of
this Clause shall not limit the Contractor'
s obligation under the General Conditions of
Contract.
1.32 Final Conditions of Works
Before application is made for the Engineer to accept the works, all items of work shall be
complete, ready to operate and in a clean condition. All equipment and pipe work shall
have been delivered to the Engineer, and all operating personnel shall have adequately
and satisfactorily trained. All trash, debris, unused building material and temporary
structures shall have been removed from the site of work. Tools and construction
machinery not needed for repair and adjustment consequent to operational tests shall not
be on the site. The walkways, parking areas and roadways shall be completely swept,
broomed or washed as may be necessary.
1.33 Daily Record and Weekly Report
The Contractor shall maintain a daily concise record in a bound foolscap size book with
numbered pages authenticated by the Engineer, of all activities on site, written legibly in
English naming sections and the extent of work carried out, the persons from both
Engineer' s staff and Contractor's staff inspecting, witnessing of supervising the said work,
the weather, materials received. Any difficulties that may have arisen during the progress
of the said work and any decisions arrived at shall also be recorded. The Contractor shall
sign and submit this Daily Record to the Engineer' s representative at the end of the each
day's work, for his perusal comment if any, and signature. The Engineer will be at liberty
to inspect this Daily Record Book at any time, and may take photocopies of it, but the
Daily Record Book shall not be removed from the Contractor' s care. The Contractor shall
remain liable for the safety of his Daily Record Book at all times.
i) A Summary of the week' s activities in the form of a Weekly Report will be submitted
in duplicate by the Engineer' s representative to the Engineer with a copy to
Contractor. The Weekly Report will name sections and the extent of work carried out,
the persons representing the Engineer and the Contractor inspecting, witnessing or
supervising the works and the hours thereof during the week, the weather in general,
materials and quantities of materials received on site. It shall include any advice
requested for or decision made or communicated or instructions received from the
Engineer. The Contractor' s copy shall be dispatched through messenger whose
Page 21 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
delivery of the Report shall be acknowledged. The Contractor shall peruse his copy
and, in the event of dispute between the Contractor and the Engineer or his
representative on the contents of the Weekly Report, the Contractor may send his own
report or comment in duplicate clearly explaining the dispute directly to the Engineer,
whose decision on the dispute shall be final and conclusive, except as provided for in
the relevant Conditions of Contract.
ii) All blank spaces in the Daily Record and the Weekly Report shall be neatly lined
through and all errors countersigned by the concerned party. In the event of no dispute
being lodged with the Engineer or the Engineer representative within two calendar
days of the date of the Report, the Contractor shall be deemed to have wholly agreed
to all statements contained in the said Weekly Report.
iii) The provisions of this Clause do not in any manner relieve the Contractor of his
obligations for the due and satisfactory performance of the Contract as defined in the
General Conditions of Contract.
1.34 Labour
It is appreciated that the Works under this Contract are labour intensive. Whilst the
Engineer entirely approves of it (unless otherwise specified), it is hereby understood that
the Contractor shall provide and maintain all grades of work people with such necessary,
simple but efficiency tools operated manually or otherwise, and properly designed and
constructed equipment together with repair/maintenance facilities, and such utilities as are
to be found in modern engineering practice, so as to make for efficiency, wholesome
workmanship and quality product without misusing the available labour-energy.
The Engineer may order in writing that any additional or substituted work shall be
executed under the contract.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer such receipts of other vouchers as may be
necessary to prove the amounts paid and before ordering materials shall submit to the
Engineer quotations for the same for his approval.
The Contractor shall certify the availability of manpower with same or better
qualification, which he has submitted during the pre-qualification process for short-listing
of Contractors to bid for this work.
*****
Page 22 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-2
SITE PREPARATION
Table of Contents
Clause Description
2.1 Scope
2.2 Related Specifications
2.3 Execution
Page 23 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-2 : SITE PREPARATION
2.1 Scope
This section details specifications for preparation of the site which includes;
i. Removal from the site all growths of vegetation like plants, shrubs and trees, removal,
salvage, demolition in place or other disposition which will interfere with construction
as indicated in the drawings or as required by the Engineer.
ii. Maintenance, support, relocations, reconstruction and adjusting to grade, restoration

and / or abandonment of existing utilities.
iii. Subsurface extraction of items, if found necessary and salvaging of topsoil.
2.2 Related Specifications
Section 3: Earthwork
Section 5: Filling Operations
Section 17: Miscellaneous Works
2.3 Execution
2.3.1 Site Investigation
The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and make all inspections necessary in
order to determine the full extent of the work required for making the completed work
conform to the drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the
nature and location of the work, conditions, the conformation and condition of the
existing ground surface, and the character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and
during the execution of the work. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the quality,
and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles or utilities to be
encountered. Any inaccuracies or discrepancies between the actual field conditions and
the drawings, or between the drawings and specifications shall be brought to the
Engineer' s attention immediately in order to obtain necessary clarifications on the exact
nature of the work to be performed.
2.3.2 Site Clearance
Site clearance shall include removal of all vegetation, organic material and all existing
miscellaneous facilities which will interfere with the maintenance of required grades and
construction activity, Areas under fill shall be cleared to a depth of 300 mm or
sufficiently deep to remove large roots, loose rocks, and other unsuitable material as
determined by the Engineer.
Where ordered by Engineer, top soil may be stripped, to such depths and over such areas
prior to any further excavation.
Salvage all items designated to be salvaged or determined by the Engineer to be suitable

for use in reconstruction. A detailed record of salvaged items shall be maintained and
made available for inspection by the Engineer.
Page 24 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
2.3.3 Site Grading
The levels and measurement of the existing site, as shown on the drawings are believed to
be correct but the Contractor shall verify them and also examine the nature of the ground
as no claim or allowance whatever will be entertained thereafter on account of any errors
or omissions in the levels of the description of the ground turning out different from that
expected or shown on the drawings.
Existing surface, after removal of all unwanted and unsuitable material shall be graded to
the levels and slopes indicated in the contract drawings. Such grades and levels shall
facilitate the intent of design.
2.3.4 Existing utilities
Where existing utilities are encountered and found to interfere with the construction
activity in this contract, they shall be removed if not required to be maintained or
relocated to avoid interference or protected, supported and maintained during the
construction phase, as per the instructions of the Engineer.
2.3.5 Disposal
All rubbish and unwanted materials including unusable soil as they accumulate from time
to time during the progress of the works and at completion shall be cleared and carted
away and all materials condemned by the Engineer are to be removed from the works,
within forty eight hours.
Earthwork, Back filling and compaction undertaken as part of the work under this
specification will neither be measured separately nor paid for.
*****
Page 25 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-3
EARTHWORK
Table of Contents
Clause Description
3.1 Scope
3.2 Classification
3.3 Stripping Surface Materials
3.4 Excavation - General
3.5 Excavation for Shafts, Tunnels and Headings
3.6 Support of excavations
3.7 Maintaining and supporting services and structures
3.8 Slips and falls and excess excavation
3.9 Excavation to be kept free from water
3.10 De-watering in areas of high water table
3.11 Unsound foundations, soft spots
3.12 Refilling excavation in open cut
3.13 Surplus excavated material
3.14 Breaking out and temporary reinstatement
3.15 Permanent reinstatement
3.16 Quality control test during construction
3.17 Safety
3.18 Execution
Page 26 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-3 : EARTHWORK
3.1 Scope
This section provides the specifications for earthwork excavation to be carried out in any
type of soil, murram (soft or hard), soft rock, boulders, old foundations, concrete, asphalt
or stone paved surfaces, old masonry or concrete (plain or reinforced) for pipe trenches,
foundation and footings for wells, sumps, pump pits or any other unit/structure shown in
the contract drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.2 Classification
All materials encountered in excavation shall be classified in the following groups

irrespective of mode of excavating the materials and the decisions of the Engineer in this
regard shall be final and binding to the Contractor.
3.2.1 Soils & Hard Murram
Soil of all sorts, silt, sand, gravel, murram (soft or hard), stiff clay, kankar and other soft
excavation not covered in the items mentioned hereunder and hard murram comprising of
all kinds of disintegrated rock or shale or conglomerate interspersed with boulders,
weathered and decomposed rock which could be removed with pick, bar, shovel, wedges,
hammers, though not without some difficulties.
3.2.2 Soft-Rock and Hard-Rock
This shall include all materials which is rock but which does not need blasting and can be
removed with a pick, bar, wedges, pavement breakers, pneumatic tools, etc. WBM/sub-
base concrete and bituminous pavement portions shall also be considered as soft rock.
Hard rock shall mean all material which is rock but requires chiseling, cutting and
removal. Concrete road surface shall also be considered as hard rock.
3.3 Stripping Surface Materials
Before the surface of any part of the Site is disturbed or the works thereon are begun, the
Contractor shall take and record levels of such part, in the manner specified or as agreed
with the Engineer. Two working days notice is to be given to the Engineer so that the
recording of levels can be performed in the presence of the Engineer. Before any
excavations are commenced the surface materials shall be carefully stripped and set aside
for re-use as directed by the Engineer.
3.4 Excavation - General
The extent of the excavations in open cut shall be the minimum necessary or practicable
for the construction of the Works.
In the event of any trench for pipelines being excavated with battered or stepped sides that
portion of the trench which extends from the formation to a point 300 mm above the
crown of the pipe when laid in its correct position shall be formed with vertical sides the
minimum practicable distance apart unless otherwise specified by the pipe manufacturer
and/or approved by the Engineer.
Page 27 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
Bulk excavations shall be made to such sizes depths and inclinations as the Engineer may
direct or as may be necessary to construct the Works. No extra payment shall be made to
the contractor for working in a confined space.
In the case of concrete roads or concrete foundations to roads the concrete shall be broken
up and disposed of as the Engineer shall direct. Any existing reinforcement shall be cut
and bent to the sides of the excavation in order that the new reinforcement to be provided
in the reinstatement of the surface shall be lapped with the existing reinforcement by at
least 300 mm. The top edge of the trench shall be as straight as practicable.
Any excavation material stored on site for backfilling or other purposes shall be deposited
in such a manner that it will cause no damage and as little inconvenience as possible.
The Engineer reserves the right to direct the Contractor as to the lengths of trench or
portions of bulk excavations which shall remain open at any one time.
No pipes or concrete shall be laid or any permanent works commenced until the Engineer
has inspected and approved the excavations.
3.5 Excavation for Shafts, Tunnels and Headings
Construction of sewers in tunnel or heading and associated working shafts shall be

executed in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Working shafts shall be constructed at each end of heading and tunnels at locations as
agreed with Engineer.
Excavations for working shafts headings and tunnels shall be of minimum practical size
to enable the permanent work to be properly constructed. Excavation shall be carried out
with great care and in such a way as to avoid any ground movement.
The contractor shall employ only specialist labour experienced in shaft sinking and
tunneling on these works.
The contractor shall apply for fix to the satisfaction of the Engineer all supports and other
temporary construction necessary for the security of the work and adjacent structures.
Timber used in the construction of headings shall be hardwood treated with an approved
wood preservative.
Working shafts shall have a separate ladder by complete with ladders in addition to any
other bay or bays required for the construction of the Works. The whole of the working
shaft shall be fenced with close boarded timber barriers at least 1.80m in height and
equipped with red safety warning lights.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, tunnel and heading faces at which work is
discontinued for any reason shall be securely timbered.
All temporary supports or temporary construction of any kind in working shafts tunnels
or headings shall be left in unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
No permanent work shall be constructed until the heading or tunnel has been driven from
working shaft to working shaft and approved by the Engineer.
Page 28 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
3.6 Support of Excavations
The Contractor shall provide the necessary support for excavations and shall submit his
proposals for the supporting of excavations at least seven days prior to the
commencement of any excavation work. Such proposals shall take into account the nature
of the ground to be excavated, the level of the water table at the site and the proximity of
buildings and roads.
Where the depth of excavation exceeds 1.5 meters the contractor shall:
1. Back the sides of the excavation to a gradient compatible with the angle of repose of
the soil or,
2. Support the sides of the excavation with a system of sheeting and strutting, shoring or,
3. Adopt a combination of these.
Prior to commencement of excavation work the Contractor shall submit the measures he
proposes to adopt for excavation support, to the Engineer and shall obtain his written
approval thereof. If in the opinion of the Engineer the support proposed for the
excavations by the Contractor is insufficient then the Engineer will order the provision of
stronger support than that provided by the Contractor and in this event the Contractor
shall adopt the methods so ordered by the Engineer and shall have no claim against the
Employer for any costs incurred in adopting this method.
The Engineer shall have right to stop the works at any site if in his opinion it is
considered that the Contractor is not adopting a safety method of working.
The Contractor shall not remove temporary works supporting the excavations until in the
opinion of the Engineer the permanent work is sufficiently advanced to permit such
removal. Such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of its
responsibilities under the contract.
Any advice permission approval or instruction given by the Engineer related to such
support or the removal thereof shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibilities
under the contract.
All temporary works supporting the excavation should be removed during backfilling
unless previous approval has been obtained from the Engineer. Where temporary supports
have been used in the excavations any such supports left in because it is impracticable to
remove them shall be left in at the expense of the Contractor.
Temporary supports shall be left in any excavation carried out in open cut owing to the
Engineer deciding that their permanent installation is necessary for the stability of an
adjacent structure.
3.7 Maintaining and Supporting Services and Structures
Before commencing any part of the works the Contractor shall ascertain the actual
locations of all existing services and obstructions. The Contractor shall after obtaining
approvals from all concerned authorities carefully excavate as necessary trial pits by hand
to locate all services and obstructions. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
detailed drawings showing the services and/or obstructions in relation to the permanent
and temporary works. The Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Engineer for
Page 29 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
his method of working before commencing work. Such approval shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of any of its responsibilities under the contract.
3.8 Slips and Falls and Excess Excavation
Every precaution shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent slips and falls of earth and
other material in the excavations. In the event of slips or falls occurring or in the event of
excavation being made in excess of the minimum necessary or practicable for the
construction of the Works or in the event of any over excavation whether or not necessary
beneath the formation of a structure the voids so formed shall be filled. In all cases where
the voids so formed when backfilled would provide support for the permanent works or
adjacent structures and services then such voids shall be filled solid with M-10 concrete at
the Contractor' s expenses. In all other cases the voids shall be filled with selected
excavated material thoroughly compacted.
In the event of any trench for pipelines exceeding the minimum allowable widths as
specified or shown on the Drawings the Engineer will order the restoration of the trench
width or the use of an alternative bedding material or such other remedial action as in his
opinion is necessary. The Contractor shall then carry out the measures so ordered by the
Engineer and shall have no claim against the Employer for any additional costs resulting
from such instructions.
3.9 Excavation to be kept Free from Water
The Contractor shall keep all excavations free from water whether affected by floods,
storm or otherwise so that the Works shall be constructed in dry conditions. No sub-soil
drainage pipes shall be left in unless they are filled with M-10 concrete or other approved
material.
3.10 De-watering in Areas of High Water Table
The Contractor shall perform de-watering as required so that all work of the contract is
installed on dry areas and excavations, including without limitation the construction of all
structures and underground piping. The Contractor shall ensure that de-watering is carried
out only to a depth sufficient for the required excavation. The Contractor shall ensure
that, at all times, during construction no groundwater shall come into contact with any
concrete surface or reinforcement and that any structure shall be capable of withstanding
any hydrostatic pressure to which it may be subjected during construction and until
completed.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Bid Price for maintaining all
works in a dry condition during construction. Any water removed from excavations shall
wherever practicable, be pumped directly to the natural drainage channel or to storm drain
if approved via an efficient system of discharge lines. No water shall be discharged onto
open spaces.
Notwithstanding any previous approval, the contractor shall be fully responsible for the
effects of his works for maintaining dry excavations.
Where deemed necessary by the Engineer, working drawings and data shall be submitted
for review or approval showing the intended plan for de-watering operations. Details of
locations and pumps, water disposal methods shall be included. These shall be submitted
at least two days prior to start of de-watering operations.
Page 30 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
The Contractor shall, where extensive de-watering is required, be fully qualified to

perform the de-watering operations or shall furnish the services of an experienced,
qualified, and equipped de-watering agency to design and operate the de-watering and
system required for the work, all subject to the Engineer' s approval. No de-watering
system shall be removed without the approval of the Engineer. Nothing shall be paid extra
to the Contractor on this account.
3.11 Unsound Foundations, Soft Spots
When the specified levels of trench or structure are reached the Engineer will inspect the
ground exposed and if he considers that any part of the ground is by its nature unsuitable,
he may direct the Contractor to excavate further and the further excavation shall be filled
with M-15 concrete or with such materials as he may direct. Should the bottom of any
trench or structure excavation, while acceptable to the Engineer at the time of his
inspection, subsequently become unacceptable due to exposure to weather conditions or
due to flooding or have become paddled, soft or loose during the progress of the works,
the Contractor shall remove such damaged, softened or loosened material and excavate
further by hand. In this case the cost of the extra excavation and of the additional
foundation materials required will be the Contractor' s responsibility if necessitated by his
negligence.
The omission by the Engineer to give an instruction under this Clause shall not relieve the
Contractor from any responsibility for defects in the Works due to the construction being
placed upon on unsuitable formation if prior to the construction of the work, the
Contractor shall have failed to call the attention of the Engineer thereto in writing.
If in the opinion of Engineer a formation is unsound as a result of the Contractor failing to

keep the excavation free from water the Engineer shall order the removal and disposal of
the unsound material and the filling of the resulting void. The Contractor shall execute the
work as directed and shall have no claim against the Engineer of any costs thus incurred.
3.12 Refilling Excavation in Open Cut
The refilling of excavations shall be commenced as soon as practicable after the

permanent works have been tested inspected and approved by the Engineer.
On completion of all bedding concreting and backfilling to pipelines in trenches the

remaining excavation shall be backfilled as detailed below.
Trenches other than in roads and paved areas shall be backfilled with selected excavated
material and obtain compaction of the dry density of the material as per the compaction
control tests procedure specified under to clause Quality Control Test during construction.
All filling materials which are in the opinion of the Engineer of a non-cohesive nature
shall be well watered to the approval of the Engineer in the layers specified to obtain the
specified compaction.
Any excavated material which is in the opinion of the Engineer unsuitable for backfill
shall be removed from the site by the Contractor and any deficiency of backfill shall be
made good with material as ordered by the Engineer.
Regardless of the means of backfilling adopted it is the Contractor' s responsibility to

ensure that he satisfactorily backfills all excavations and causes no damage to permanent
Page 31 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
works or adjacent structures and he shall at his own expense take all steps necessary to
comply with the obligation.
Where instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for an approved
independent laboratory to carry out tests to determine the density in place of the backfill
material.
3.13 Surplus Excavated Material
The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements for the disposal of
surplus excavated material arising on any part of the Site to the place as directed by the
Engineer at a distance from the place of excavation not exceeding ten km, by the most
direct practicable route.
3.14 Breaking Out and Temporary Reinstatement
Holes made for de-watering pipes shall be filled with bentonite as soon as the de-watering
equipment is withdrawn. The backfill material shall be suitable to refill the holes
completely and the Contractor shall ensure no voids remain.
3.15 Permanent Reinstatement
a. Bituminous Top Road
The bituminous road shall have sub base of thickness of 300 mm with well graded
granular material consisting of sand, gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, brick metal,
laterite, kankar, etc, for crushed material grading III of the specifications and compacting
to the required density with 8-10 tonne in 150 mm thick layers in all seasons, maintaining
the required slope and grade during the operation as approved by the Engineer including
watering to the proper moisture content in accordance with IS 2720 (Part II) and suitably
sprinkling arrangement.
Over the sub base, next layer shall be of wet mix macadam of thickness 200 mm. WMM
shall include premixing the graded stone aggregate with water at OMC in mechanical mix
plant, carriage of mixed material by tipper to site, laying in uniform layers with paver in
sub-base/base course on well prepare surface and compacting with vibratory roller to
achieve the desired density.
A primer coat with bitumen emulsion the rate of 9.0kg/sqm shall be applied over granular
base as per the directions of Engineer.
80/100 mm thick bituminous macadam of thickness 75 mm shall be provided in layers

with 3.2% bitumen by weight of total mix by weight and aggregate grading - I using lime
stone material.
At the top 25 mm thick semi dense bituminous concrete shall be laid as per applicable
clause of MoRTH using 5% bitumen by weight of total mix with grading II material
(hydrated lime 2% by weight shall be used as filler) with top level of the road to be
matched with the existing top level of the existing BT road.
b. Cement Concrete Road
Page 32 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
The cement concrete road shall have sub base of thickness of 300 mm with well graded
granular material consisting of sand, gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, brick metal,
laterite, kankar, etc, for crushed material grading III of the specifications and compacting
to the required density with 8-10 tonne roller in 150 mm thick layers, maintaining the
required slope and grade during the operation as approved by the Engineer including
watering to the proper moisture content in accordance with IS 2720 (Part II) and suitably
sprinkling arrangement.
Over the sub base, next layer shall be of wet mix macadam of thickness 200 mm.
Specifications shall include premixing the graded stone aggregate with water at OMC in
mechanical mix plant, carriage of mixed material by tipper to site, laying in uniform
layers with paver in sub-base/base course on well prepare surface and compacting with
vibratory roller to achieve the desired density.
Over the WBM, reinforced cement concrete of grade M-25 of thickness 150 mm with
graded stone aggregate shall be laid including form work shuttering screed vibration
complete with the top level of the road to be matched with the existing top level of the
existing concrete road.
Reinforcement in concrete shall be provided as per the directions of Engineer or his

representative.
3.16 Quality Control Test during Construction
i. Moisture Contest Test: One test for every 250 cubic meters of soil or part thereof.
ii. Compaction Control Test: A minimum of one field density test (As per IS 2720 - Part
XXVIII) for each 500 sq.m. or part thereof of the compacted area of each layer.
Results shall be based on the mean value of a set of 5 to 10 density determination.
The contractor shall arrange for the tests from an independent and approved test
laboratory at his expense and submit the results to the Engineer for approval.
3.17 Safety
Necessary timbering, shuttering/shoring etc. shall be provided and complete safety of

labour working inside trenches and at other sites shall be ensured by the Contractor. The
price quoted shall include for all such items and nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.
3.18 Execution
The excavation for basements, foundations, footings, trenches, etc, shall be carefully got
out to net width and depth as shown on the drawings.
"Battering" or "Benching" to the sides of excavation shall have the prior approval of the
Engineer. Extra excavation (i.e. excavation beyond the limits required by the drawings),
carried out without prior approval of the Engineer will not be measured and such extra
excavation will be filled in at the Contractor'
s expenses with concrete (mix specified by
the Engineer) well rammed in position and brought up to the required level.
No foundation shall be put in the excavation before the same is measured and sanctioned
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall protect the excavation from the effect of the
Page 33 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
weather or other damage and make good the damages if any to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Pit and trench bottom shall be smoothened and lightly rammed to a uniform surface and
such portion of boulders or rock, as required shall be removed to make the bottom to the
required level.
3.18.1 Excavation in all sorts of soils & murram
The item shall include dry or wet excavation and removal of excavated material and its
stacking and disposal in a manner hereinafter specified. The water met with if any shall
be bailed or pumped out by the Contractor as necessary at his own cost.
The Contractor shall provide all materials and all labour necessary for the excavation and
completion of the works in accordance with the drawings and specifications and the intent
there of.
The Contractor shall provide necessary protection to labour, materials equipment etc. to
ensure safety against risk and accident. The BIS standard in this regard shall be followed
(IS: 3764-1992-Code of Safety for Excavation Works – 1st Revision, reaffirmed in 2007).
The Contractor shall be liable to pay compensation for injury to life, and damage to
property, if any, caused due to any operation connected with this item.
The Contractor shall hand over the site of work in neat and tidy condition after
completion of work and shall remove all rubbish of construction work.
The Contractor shall carry out the work of trial pit of required size and depth and at places
as directed by the Engineer to accurately locate and determine the soil strata and water
table and shall fill back as required and as ordered.
3.18.2 Fencing / lighting
The Contractor shall make all proper provisions for protecting the work by fencing and by
watch-and-ward and lighting at night, or otherwise as may be directed by the Engineer.
In the event of Contractor not fully complying with the provisions of fencing, lighting,
watch-and-ward, etc, the Engineer may with or without notice to the Contractor put up a
fence, improve the lighting and adopt such other measures as he may deem necessary for
the safety and all costs of such works including penalty to the Contractor, upto a
maximum of Rs.1000/ (Rupees one thousand only) per day per site. The Contractor shall
also provide and display special boards painted with fluorescent paints indicating the
progress of the work during the execution of works at particular site/location.
3.18.3 Shoring
Wherever shoring is found necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the
same in the best possible manner with the materials as required and as directed by the
Engineer to his complete satisfaction.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing secured shoring and for taking every
other precaution which may be necessary or proper for protecting any building or any
Page 34 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
other structure from getting damaged by the excavation of any trench or otherwise by the
execution of works in the vicinity of such buildings or structure.
After the work is completed near buildings, the contractor shall remove the shoring if any
and make good any damage that might have been done.
No part of the shoring shall, any time, be removed by the contractor without obtaining
permission of the Engineer. While taking out shoring planks, the hollows, if any, formed
shall simultaneously be filled in with soft earth well rammed with rammers after
watering.
3.18.4 Pumping out water
The Contractor shall provide and work at his own cost all pumping machinery required to
keep the trenches for the sewers, or foundations and other excavations, clear of water,
whether it will be subsoil water, storm water, leakage from tanks, wells, drains, septic
tank, so that there may be no accumulation of such water. The contractor shall see that no
masonry is laid, no concrete is deposited, no joints made and no measurements taken in
water. The pumping shall be continued during and after execution of any portion of the
work like masonry, curing, etc. under this contract, and repeated so long as the Engineer
may consider it necessary. The pumps and power applied must be such as the Engineer
may consider the necessary, and no separate payment shall be made for de-watering
during any stage of execution of this contract.
If proper pumping machinery is not provided, the Engineer may stop the work altogether
until the pumping machinery is provided to his satisfaction and requirement.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in working order standby pumping units to be
available and employed in the event of mechanical failure. The Contractor must also
arrange for night and day manning and operation of the pumps wherever necessary to
ensure that at all times and in all weather, the work could proceed.
3.18.5 Sight Rails
Before a trench excavation is commenced for laying sewer lines, sight rails (two
uprights), one on each side of the trench to be excavated and a cross rail nailed thereto,
shall be erected one each above the manholes and one set in the middle length, or at
distances as fixed by the Engineer, uniform height above the proposed invert level of the
pipes. The depth of excavation and the level of the pipe invert level shall be checked by
boning rods of appropriate length. The sight rails and boning rods shall be provided, fixed
and maintained by the Contractor at his own cost.
*****
Page 35 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-4
BLASTING OPERATIONS
No blasting is expected. In the event of necessity, the contractor shall follow the
specifications mentioned in the subsequent pages of this section.
Table of Contents
Clause Description
4.1 General
4.2 Materials
4.3 Personnel
4.4 Storage of Explosives
4.6 Blasting
4.7 Electrical Firing
4.8 Precautions after Blasting
4.9 Misfires
4.10 Accidents
Page 36 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-4 : BLASTING OPERATIONS
4.1 General
The Contractor shall acquaint himself with all the applicable laws and regulations
concerning storing, handling and the use of explosives. All such laws, regulations and
rules, etc, and as are current from time to time shall be binding upon the Contractor.
The provisions detailed in these rules are supplementary to the above laws, rules and
regulations etc. and are applicable except where they conflict with the aforementioned
laws, etc, from time to time. Further, Engineer may issue modifications, alterations or
new instructions from time to time, the Contractor shall comply with the same without
these being made a cause for any claim.
4.2 Materials
All materials such as explosives, detonators, fuse, tamping materials etc. that are
proposed to be used in the blasting operations shall have the prior approval of the
Engineer.
Black powder and safe explosives (as commonly current in India) shall be used wherever
possible. Explosives with Nitro glycerine shall only be used under exceptional
circumstances, and where the above explosives are not effective.
Before use, the fuse shall be inspected and the moist, damaged or broken one discarded.
The rate of burning of all new types of fuses or when they have been in stock for long
shall be tested before use.
The detonators used shall be capable of giving effective blasting of the explosives, moist
or damaged detonators shall be discarded.
4.3 Personnel
Excavation by blasting will be permitted only under personal supervision of competent

and licensed persons and trained workmen.
All supervisors and workmen in charge of make up, handling, storage and blasting work
shall be adequately insured by the Contractor.
The storage shall be in charge of a very reliable person, approved by the Engineer, who
may, if necessary cause police enquiries being made as to his reliability, antecedents etc.
The Contractor shall have to produce a security for the person in charge of the explosives
if and as required by the Engineer, or the Civil Authorities of the District.
The Contractor shall make sure that his supervisors and workmen are fully conversant
with all the rules to be observed in storing, handling and use of the explosives. It shall be
assured that the Supervisor in charge is thoroughly acquainted with all the details of the
handling and blasting operations.
Page 37 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
4.4 Storage of Explosives
The Contractor shall build a magazine for storing the explosives. The site of the
magazine, its capacity and design shall be subject to approval by the Engineer, and the
Inspector of Explosives before the construction is taken up. As a result, the explosives
should be stored in a clean, dry, well ventilated, bullet proof and fire-proof building, on
an isolated site.
The explosive, detonators and fuses shall each be separately stored.
A careful and day-today account of the use of explosives shall be kept by the Contractor
in an approved register and in an approved manner. The register shall be produced by the
Contractor for the inspection of the Engineer in charge when so required by the latter. The
Engineer may also pay a surprise visit to the storage magazine. In case of unaccountable
storage of the explosive or if the account is not found to have been maintained in the
manner prescribed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be liable to be penalized with
forfeiture of security deposit lodged by him with the Owner or his tender shall be liable to
be cancelled in which case he shall not be entitled to any compensation for the losses etc.
The action taken under this clause shall be in addition to that which might be taken by the
competent civil authorities in a court of law.
The magazine shall at all times be kept scrupulously clean. No unauthorized persons shall
at any time be admitted inside the magazine.
The magazine shall, when not in use of authorized persons, be kept well and securely
locked.
The magazine shall on no account be opened during or on the approach of a thunder

storm and no person shall remain in the vicinity of the magazine during such period. The
magazine shoes, without nails, shall at all times, be kept in the magazine, and a wood tub
or cement trough about 30 cm high and 42 cm in diameters filled with water shall be fixed
near the door of the magazine.
Persons entering the magazine must put on the magazine shoes which shall be provided
by the Contractor for the purpose and be careful.
1. Not to put their feet on the clean floor unless they have the magazine shoes on;
2. Not to be allowed for the magazine shoes to touch the ground outside the clear floor.
3. Not to allow any dirt or grit to fall on the clean floor,
Persons with bare feet shall, before entering the magazine, dip their feet in water and then
step direct from the tub over the barrier (if there be one) on the clean floor.
A brush or broom shall be kept in the lobby of the magazine for clearing out the magazine
on each occasion it is opened, for the receipt, delivery or inspection of explosives.
No match box or inflammable materials shall be allowed in the magazine. Light shall be
obtained from an electric storage battery lantern.
No persons having articles of steel or iron on him shall be allowed to enter the magazine.
Page 38 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
Oily cotton rags, waste and articles liable to spontaneous ignition shall not be allowed
inside the magazine.
Workmen shall be examined before they enter the magazine to see that they have none of
the prohibited articles on their persons.
No tools or implement other than those of copper, brass, gunmetal or wood shall be
allowed inside the magazine. All tools shall be used with extreme gentleness and care.
Boxes of explosives shall not be thrown down or dragged along the floor and shall be
stacked on wooden trestles. Where there are white ants, the leg of the trestles should rest
in shallow copper, lead or brass bowls containing water. Open boxes of dynamite shall be
exposed to the direct rays of the sun.
Empty boxes or lose packing materials shall not be kept inside the magazine.
The magazine shall have a lightning conductor which shall be got tested at least once a
year by an officer authorized by the Engineer, the test fee shall be charged on the
Contractor at actual as will be charged by appropriate authority. The Contractor shall
within 15 days comply with all the recommendations made by the officer testing the
lighting conductor, failing which the Engineer shall be entitled to comply with the same at
the contractor'
s expense, which shall not be open to question or may consider any action
that he may consider fit.
A notice shall be hung near the store prohibiting entrance of unauthorized person. The
following shall be hung in the lobby of the magazine
a. A copy of rules both in English and the languages which the workers concerned are
familiar with;
b. A statement showing the upto date stock in the magazine;
c. A certificate showing the last date of testing of the lightening conductor;
d. A notice that smoking is strictly prohibited.
The magazine will be inspected at least twice a year by an officer representing the
Engineer who will see that all the rules are strictly complied with. He will notify all
omissions etc. to the Contractor, who shall rectify the defects forthwith and not later than
3 days from the date of receipt of the notice, failing which the Engineer may take
whatever action he consider suitable.
For the transport of the explosives and detonators between the store and the site, closed
and strong containers made of soft materials such as timber, zinc, copper, leather and the
like, shall be used. The explosives and detonators shall be carried in separate boxes and
transported separately. For the conveyance of primers, special containers shall be used.
The boxes and containers used shall be kept well closed.
Explosives shall be stored and used chronologically to ensure the ones received earlier,
being used first.
Page 39 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
A make up house shall be provided at each working place in which cartridge will be made
up by experienced men as required. The make up house shall be separated from other
buildings. Only electric storage battery lamps shall be used in this house.
No smoking shall be allowed in make up house.
Disposal of deteriorated explosives: All deteriorated explosives shall be disposed off

in an approved manner. The quantity of the deteriorated explosives to be disposed off
shall be intimated to the Engineer, prior to its disposal.
Preparation of primers: The primers shall not be prepared near open flames or fires. The
work of preparation of primers shall always be entrusted to the same personnel. Primers
shall be used as soon as possible, after they are ready.
Charging of holes: The work of charging shall not commence before all the drilling work
on site is completed and the supervisor has been satisfied to that effect, by actual
inspection.
While charging open lamps shall be kept away. For charging with powdered explosives,
naked flame shall not be allowed.
Only wooden tamping rods without any kind of metal on them shall be allowed to be
used.
Boreholes must be of such size that the cartridges can easily pass down them.
Only one cartridge shall be inserted at a time and gently pressed with the tamping rod.
The sand clay or other tamping materials used for filling the hole completely shall not be
tamped too hard.
4.6 Blasting
Blasting shall be carried out during fixed hours of the day, which shall have the approval
of the Engineer. The hours, once fixed, shall not be altered without prior written approval
of the Engineer.
The site blasting operations shall be prominently demarcated by red danger flags. The
order to fire shall be given only by the Supervisor in-charge of the work and this order
shall be given only after giving the warning signals three times, so as to enable all the
labour, watchmen etc. to reach safe shelter and after having ascertained that no body is
within the danger zone.
A bugle or a whistle with a distinctive note shall be used to give the warning signal. This
bugle shall not be used for other purposes. All labour shall be made acquainted with the
sound of the bugle and shall be strictly warned to leave their work immediately at the first
warning signal and make for safe shelters, and not to leave the shelters until the all clear
signal has been given.
All the roads and foot - paths leading to the blasting area shall be watched.
In special cases, suitable extra precautions shall be taken. The Engineer may however
permit blasting for underground excavation, without restriction of fixed time, provided
that, he is satisfied that proper precautions are taken to give sufficient warning to all
concerned and that the work of other agencies on the site is not unduly hampered.
For lighting the fuses, a lamp with a strong flame such as a carbide lamp shall be used.
Page 40 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
The supervisor shall watch the time required to the fixing of the fuses and shall see that
all the workmen are under safe shelters in good time.
4.7 Electrical Firing
Only the supervisor in-charge shall keep key of the firing apparatus and shall keep it
always with himself.
Special apparatus shall be used as a source of current for the blasting operations. Power
lines shall not be tapped for the purpose. All the detonators should be checked before use.
For blasts in one series only detonators of the same manufacturers and of the same group
of electrical resistance shall be used.
Such of the electrical lines as could constitute danger for work of charging shall be
removed from the site.
The firing cable shall have a proper insulating cover so as to avoid short circuiting due to
contact with water, metallic parts of rock.
The use of the earth as a return line shall not be permitted. The firing cable shall be
connected to the source of current only after ascertaining that nobody is in the area of
blasting. Before firing, the circuit shall be checked by a suitable apparatus.
After firing, whether with or without an actual blast, the contact between the firing cable
and the source of current shall be cut-off before any persons are allowed to leave the
shelters.
During storm, charging with electrical detonators shall be suspended. The charges already
placed into the holes shall be blasted as quickly as possible, after taking all the safety
precautions and giving necessary warning signal. If this is not possible, the site shall be
abandoned till the storm has passed.
4.8 Precautions after Blasting
After the blast, the supervisor shall carefully inspect the work and satisfy himself that all
the charges have exploded.
After the blast takes place in underground works the workmen shall not be allowed to go
to face till all the toxic gases are evacuated from the face.
4.9 Mis-Fires
If it is suspected that part of the blast has failed to fire or is delayed, sufficient time shall
be allowed to elapse before entering the danger zone. When the fuse and blasting caps are
used, a safe time should be allowed and then the Supervisor alone shall leave the shelter
to see that misfire. Drilling near the hole that has misfired shall not be permitted until one
of the following operations has been carried out by the Supervisor.
The Supervisor should very carefully (when the tamping is of damp clay extract the
tamping with a wooden scraper or jet of water or compressed air (using a pipe of soft
material) and withdraw fuse with the primer and detonator attached. A fresh primer and
detonator with fuse shall then be placed in this hole and fired.
The Supervisor shall get one of the tamping cleared off and indicate the direction by
placing stick in the hole. Another hole may then be drilled at least 23 cm. away and
Page 41 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
parallel to it; this hole should then be charged and fired. The balance of the cartridge and
detonators found in the muck shall be removed.
Before leaving his work, the Supervisor should inform the Supervisor of the relieving
shift of any case of misfire and shall point out the position with a red cross denoting the
same and also state what action, if any, he has taken in the matter.
The Supervisor shall at once report to the office, all cases of misfire, the steps taken in
connection there with. The names of the Supervisor in charge of day and night shifts must
be noted daily in the contractor'
s office.
If a misfire has been found to be due to defective detonator, or dynamite, the whole
quantity of box from which the defective article was taken, must be returned to the
authority as may be directed by the Engineer in charge for inspection to ascertain whether
the whole box contains defective materials.
Redrilling the holes that have misfired either wholly or partly shall not be permitted.
4.10 Accidents
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any accident during the entire procedure of
handling explosives and blasting and shall pay necessary compensation to the persons
affected or for damage to lands property etc. without claims.
*****
Page 42 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-5
FILLING OPERATIONS
Table of Contents
Clause Description
5.1 Scope
5.2 Back fill Material
5.3 Execution
Page 43 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 5 : FILLING OPERATIONS
5.1 Scope
This section covers the backfilling of trenches excavated for piping, excavations for
foundations, channels, manholes, valve chambers, pump pits and sumps and other
structures using suitable excavated material or imported backfill material.
5.2 Backfill material
5.2.1 Excavation Material
Excavated material used for backfilling, shall be free from debris or other contamination,
shall be suitably graded to obtain the required compaction and shall not contain stones,
rock or concrete fragments larger than 10 cm in the largest dimension. Two third of the
backfill shall consist of well graded material not exceeding 3 cm in the largest dimension.
5.2.2 Imported Material
Where material from excavation is neither adequate in quantity nor satisfactory in quality,
backfill material may be imported. Borrow pits for this purpose shall be identified by the
Contractor in the vicinity of the site. Approval from the Engineer shall be obtained for the
satisfactory quality of the quarry material.
Borrow material used for backfilling shall be sound, clean, uncontaminated granular
material free from organic and deleterious material and shall not contain more than 10
percent by weight of clay or silt, individually or in combination. The grading shall fall
within the following limits:
Standard Sieve Size % Weight Passing

4" (100 mm) 100
7/8" (21.9 mm) 57 - 100
#4 (4.75 mm) 25 - 100
# 16 (1.18 mm) 10 - 85
# 50 (0.30 mm) 5 - 40
# 200 (0.075 mm) 0- 8
If the grading of the borrow materials fall outside the above noted limits the use of the
material shall be at the Engineer'
s discretion.
5.3 Execution
5.3.1 Deposition of fill
Fill materials shall be deposited in layer of not more than 15 cm in loose thickness for
compaction by heavy equipment and not more than 10 cm loose thickness for hand
compacted fill, so as to meet suitable extent of compaction. The Contractor is responsible
for arrangement and payment for all backfill material and the material selected shall meet
the approval of the Engineer.
Page 44 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
5.3.2 Backfilling of trenches
No backfilling shall be carried out until all debris and other objectionable materials have
been removed from the trench and until the Engineer has inspected and approved the pipe
installations and bedding. Backfilling shall be carried out in layers and in such a way that
it does not disturb alignment, grades or stability of pipes. Backfilling shall only be carried
out with approved materials.
5.3.3 Backfilling around structures and foundations
Backfilling around completed foundation and wall shall be done to the line and level
shown on the drawing. This will be done with selected and approved earth from
excavation material approved by Engineer.
Backfilling around liquid retaining structure shall be done only after testing of structures
against leakage and approval by Engineer. No separate payment will be made for
backfilling. Rate quoted for excavation are inclusive of backfilling also.
5.3.4 Filling in foundations
Sub-grades for concrete slabs shall be sand or gravel which have been tamped such that it
is well compacted.
5.3.5 Deterioration of Materials
If deterioration of material takes place during the progress of work, the Contractor shall at
his own expense remove such material and replace it with fresh approved material.
5.3.6 Compaction Control
a. Backfilling under and adjacent to structures shall be compacted to not less than 95
percent of maximum dry density.
b. Filling materials shall be moistened or dried, to within two (2) percent of optimum
moisture content and compacted so as to conform to the following listed values when
in accordance with these specifications.
c. All other fillings shown on the plans shall be compacted to not less than ninety (90)
percent of maximum dry density.
d. All working areas shall be protected from damage by water and site drainage shall be
maintained at all times. Heavy equipment shall not be operated within 0.6 m of any
existing structure and vibrating roller not within 1.50 m of any structure.
5.3.7 Disposal of surplus material
If the quantity of excavated material to be disposed off in permanent spoil dumps exceed
the quantity which can be disposed off in the permanent spoil disposal areas in the site it
shall be disposed off from site to a location as directed by the Engineer any where in the
radius of 10 km including loading, unloading and spreading, etc. Complete surplus
material or unsuitable material ordered to be disposed off shall be transported off the site
and deposited at such a disposal site. Material so deposited shall be shaped up or spread
and leveled as directed by the Engineer.
*****
Page 45 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION- 6
FORMWORK
Table of Contents
Clause Description
6.1 General
6.2 Quality Assurance
6.3 Shop Drawing
6.4 Materials
6.5 Execution
6.6 Embedded Piping, Conduits and Anchors
6.7 Field Quality Control
Page 46 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 6 : FORMWORK
6.1 General
Requirements specified herein are for providing formwork along with supporting
scaffolding thereof for cast-in situ concrete as indicated, specified, and required.
a. Requirements: All formwork shall be constructed of timber, sheet metal or other

approved material. It shall be firmly supported, adequately strutted, braced and tied to
withstand the placing and vibrating of concrete and the effects of weather. Design of
structures shown on the Engineer's drawings does not include any allowance or consideration
for imposed construction loads. Forms, shoring and false work shall be adequate for imposed
live and dead loads including equipment and men, height of concrete drop, concrete and
foundation pressures and stresses, wind pressures, lateral stability, and other safety factors
during construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for the calculations and designs for
the formwork. The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for any failure and for the
safety of work and workmen. The scaffolding, hoisting arrangements and ladders shall have
easy approach to work spot and afford easy inspection.
b. Standards and Tolerances: All formwork shall be fabricated in compliance with the best
modern practice, so that the finished surface is even, unblemished free of fins and true to
line, level and shape as shown by the drawings. The forms shall comply with the
requirements of IS: 456 (2000).
Faces of formwork in contact with concrete shall be free from adhering foreign matter,
projecting nails and the like, splits or other defects, and all form work shall be clean and
free from standing water, dirt, shavings, chippings or other foreign matter. Joints shall be
water-tight to prevent the escape of mortar and cement slurry or the formation of fins or
other blemishes on the face of the concrete.
Openings for inspection of the inside of the formwork and for the removal of water used
for washing down shall be provided and so formed as to be easily closed before placing
concrete. Before placing concrete all bolts, pipes or any other fixtures which are to be
built in shall be fixed in their correct positions and cores and other devices for forming
holes shall be held fast by fixing to the form work or otherwise. Holes shall not be cut in
any concrete without the approval of the Engineer.
6.3 Shop Drawings
Concrete construction joints and expansion joints shall be of the types and at locations
indicated and shop drawings for approval shall be submitted showing proposed location and
type of construction for any joints not shown on the drawings, and sequences of forming and
concrete placing operations. Shop drawings shall be submitted at least seven working days in
advance of form fabrication.
6.4 Materials
6.4.1 Formwork Coating
Page 47 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
The coating on all formwork shall be of a non-grain and non-staining resin or polymer type
or mould oil that will not leave residual matter on surface of concrete or adversely affect
bonding to concrete of any subsequent paint, plaster, mortar or other applied materials.
Coatings containing mineral oils, paraffin, waxes, or other non-drying ingredients are not
permitted. For concrete surfaces contacting potable stored water, the coatings and form-
release agents shall be completely non-toxic. Care shall be taken to prevent the coating from
coming into contact with reinforcement or with concrete at construction joints.
6.4.2 Timber
Timber shuttering shall be fabricated from well seasoned timber which shall not warp under
the effects of the ambient temperature and humidity. Boards shall be strong enough to
support the stresses imposed on the shuttering without flexing.
6.4.3 Joints
Timber board joints shall be torqued and grooved. All joints shall be bonded to prevent loss
of grout during concreting.
6.4.4 Plywood
Deleted
6.4.5 Metal form ties
Ties for climbing shuttering shall be of the prefabricated steel threaded with internal
disconnecting type of tensile strength to resist all imposed loads. Ties shall leave no metal
within 40 mm of concrete surfaces after removal. The Engineer' s approval shall be sought
before ties are used on any concrete work.
6.4.6 Metal Forms
Metal Forms shall be true to detail, in good condition, clean, free from dents, bents, rust and
mineral oils.
6.4.7 Round Column Forms
Round Forms shall be of structural quality fibre-board, metal tubes as specified for metal
forms, or fibre glass reinforced plastic, or formed to shape in plywood and braced as
necessary.
6.4.8 Form Joint Sealers
Sealers for joints between form panels shall be of resilient foam rubber strips, or non-
hardening plastic type caulking compound free of oil, or waterproof pressure-sensitive
plastic tape or a suitable adhesive. Form tie holes shall be sealed with rubber plugs, plastic
caulking compound or equal. All joints shall be watertight to totally prevent the loss or
leaching of grout during concreting.
6.4.9 Moulds
For grooves, drips, rebates, profiles, chamfers, and similar items, smooth finished timber
coated with specified form coating shall be used. Standard products such as extruded
polymer plastic units of the indicated or required shapes may also be used.
Page 48 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
6.5 Execution
6.5.1 Form types and finishes
Finishes to formed surface of concrete shall be classified as Class A, Class B and Class C or
such other special finish as may be particularly specified. Where the class of finish is not
specified the concrete shall be finished to Class C.
6.5.2 Various Classes of finishes
a. Class A - High Quality Finish
Formwork for Class A finish shall be lined with as large panels as possible of non-
staining material with a smooth unblemished surface true to required form such as
sanded plywood or hard compressed fibre board, arranged in a uniform approved pattern
and fixed back formwork by oval nails. Unfaced wrought boarding or standard steel
panels shall not be permitted.
b. Class B - General Finish
Formwork for Class B finish shall be faced with wrought tongued and grooved boards or
plywood or metal panels true to required form arranged in a uniform approved pattern
free from defects likely to detract from the appearance of the surface.
c. Class C - Unexposed Finish
Formwork for Class C finish shall be constructed of timber, sheet metal or any suitable
materials which will prevent loss of cement slurry.
The loads shall be properly distributed over base area on which shoring is erected, either
concrete slabs or ground ; if on ground, it shall be protected against undermining or
settlement, particularly against wetting of soils, and near excavations. The forms shall be
constructed to produce in finished structure all lines, grades and camber as required.
Jacks, wedges, or similar means shall be used and firmly anchored to take any settlement
in formwork which may occur before placing of concrete. Camber for beams and slabs
shall be as indicated.
6.5.3 Form construction
Forms shall be build to exact shapes, sizes, lines, and dimensions as required to obtain
accurate alignment, location and grades. Provision shall be made for openings, offsets,
keyways, recesses, mouldings, reglets, chamfers, blocking, joint screens, bulkheads,
anchorages, and other required features. Forms shall be made for easy removal without
hammering or prying against concrete. Metal spreaders may be used to provide accurate
spreading of forms. Construction of forms shall be such that there will be no sagging,
leakage or displacement occurring during and after pouring of concrete. Forms shall be
coated with specified coating material; and coating material shall not come into contact
with reinforcing bars.
a. Slopes
Formwork shall be provided for the top surfaces of sloping work where the slope exceeds
fifteen degrees from the horizontal (except where such top surface is specified as spaded
finish) and shall be anchored to enable the concrete to be properly compacted and care
being taken to prevent flotation.
Page 49 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
b. Chamfers
All exterior horizontal angles on the finished concrete of 90 degrees or less along the tops
of walls shall be given 20 mm chamfers ; columns are required to have chamfers on
vertical angles, which run out 125 mm from the bottom and top of the column; other
exterior angles shall be left sharp unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer.
c. Ties
No ties or bolts or other device shall be built into the concrete for the purpose of supporting
formwork without the prior approval of the Engineer. The whole or part of any such
supports shall be capable of removal so that no part remaining embedded in the concrete
shall be nearer than 50 mm from the surface in the case of reinforced concrete and 150 mm
in the case of unreinforced concrete. Holes left after removal of such supports shall be neatly
filled with 1:3 drypack mortar which shall contain just sufficient water to make it plastic. It
shall be well rammed into the hole and finished flush.
d. Cleanouts and Cleaning
Temporary openings shall be provided in wall, column and slab formwork for cleaning and
inspection. Prior to pouring, all forms and surfaces shall be cleaned and coated to receive
concrete.
e. Re-use
Form material shall be cleaned and reconditioned before re-use.
6.6 Embedded piping, conduits and anchors
Structures which require openings for the passage of pipes, electrical conduits, and other
inserts shall be consulted and the necessary pipe sleeves, anchors, or other required inserts
shall be properly and accurately installed. Openings required by other trades shall be
reinforced as indicated and required. Conduits or pipes shall be located so as not to reduce
the strength of the construction, and in no case shall pipes other than conduits be placed in
a slab 4½" (11.4 cm) or less in thickness. Conduit buried in a concrete slab shall not have
an outside diameter greater than 1/3 of the thickness of the slab not be placed below
bottom reinforcing steel or over top reinforcing steel. Conduits may be embedded in walls
provided they are not larger in outside diameter than the thickness of the wall, are not
spaced closer than three diameters on the centre, and do not impair the strength of the
structure. Electrical conduits shall be placed with due regard to allowable bend radii
continuity in its length from outlet to outlet, and shall be equipped with a pull cord. The
outlets shall be temporarily plugged to totally avoid ingress of concrete or grout.
6.7 Field Quality Control
A. Control during concrete placement
Devices of the tell-tale type shall be installed on supported forms and elsewhere as required
to detect formwork movements and deflection during concrete placement. Required slab and
beam cambers shall be checked and correctly maintained as concrete loads are applied on
forms. Workmen shall be assigned to check forms during concrete placement and to
promptly seal any mortar leaks.
Page 50 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
B. Defects in formed surfaces
Workmanship in formwork and concreting shall be such that concrete shall normally require
no making good, surfaces being perfectly compacted and smooth. If any blemishes are
revealed after removal of formwork, the Engineer'
s decisions concerning remedial measures
shall be obtained immediately. These measures may include but shall be limited to the
following:
1. Fins, pinhole bubbles, surface discolouration and minor defects may be rubbed down
with hacking immediately after the formwork is removed.
2. Abrupt and gradual irregularities may be rubbed down with carborundum and water
after the concrete has been fully cured. These and any other defects shall be remedied by
methods approved by the Engineer which may include using a suitable epoxy resin or,
where necessary cutting out to a regular dovetailed shape at least 75mm deep and
refilling with concrete over steel mesh reinforcement sprung into the dovetail.
C. Removal of Forms and Shoring

Formwork shall be so designed as to permit easy removal without resorting to hammering or
levering against the surface of the concrete. The periods of time elapsing between the
placing of the concrete and the striking of the formwork shall be as approved by the
Engineer after consideration of the loads likely to be imposed on the concrete and shall in
any case but not less than the periods shown below, depending on the ambient temperature.
Location of Form Time for striking using OPC (days)

Seem sides, walls and columns 3
Slab Soffits 7 to 14
Beam Soffits 14 to 21
Not withstanding the foregoing the Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage
arising from removal of formwork before the structure is capable of carrying its own weight
and any incidental loading. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for repairing or
reconstruction as directed by the Engineer the section of the Works so affected.
1. Shoring and False work Removal
In retaining wall construction Shoring and false work shall not be removed until 21 days
after concrete placement or until concrete has attained at least 90 percent of the 28 day
design compressive strength as demonstrated by control test cylinders, whichever is
earlier.
2. Restriction
Construction equipment or permanent loads shall not be imposed on columns, supported

slabs, or supported beams until concrete has attained the 28 day design compressive strength
as demonstrated by control test Cylinders.
3. Concrete curing during removals
Concrete shall be thoroughly wetted as soon as forms are first loosened and shall be kept
wet during the removal operations and until curing media or sacking is applied. Potable
water supply with hoses or buckets shall be ready at each removal location before removal
operations are commenced.
*****
Page 51 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION- 7
REINFORCEMENT
Table of Contents
Clause Description
7.1 General
7.3 Submittals of Drawings and Samples
7.4 Materials
7.5 Execution
Page 52 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-7 : REINFORCEMENT
7.1 General
Requirement specified herein provide for reinforcing work, complete as indicated,

specified and required and including supply and delivery of reinforcing bars and mesh,
bending, wire brushing and cleaning, steel fixing and the attendance of the fitter during
concreting, to inspect fixed reinforcing bars and maintain bars in correct position at each
locations. Whenever mention of Indian Standards (IS) Codes is made, the latest editions
thereof shall be applicable.
A. Code Requirements: Unless otherwise stated herein all work specified herein and as
shown on the drawings shall conform to the applicable, requirement of IS: 456 (2000).
In case of water retaining structure IS: 3370 Parts I to IV (1965 and 1967, reaffirmed in
2004) shall be applicable.
I. Standards: Steel for reinforcing shall be the following kinds as may be specified in
the drawings.
a. Mild steel and medium steel bars and hard drawn steel wire conforming to IS: 432 -
Part - 1 & 2 (1982, reaffirmed in 2000).
b. Plain hard drawn steel wires for prestressed concrete conforming to IS: 1785 Part 1
& 2 (1983 reaffirmed in 2003).
c. Specification for fusion boned epoxy coated reinforcing bars confirming to IS:
13620 (1993 reaffirmed in 2000).
B. Field Quality Control: All continuous inspections shall be performed by the

Engineer's representative or his authorized assistant or a specialist called by the
Engineer. Reports as required by code concerned shall be prepared and submitted to
the Engineer.
1. Cleanliness of Reinforcement: The Contractor shall ensure that all reinforcing bars
are thoroughly wire brushed and cleaned free of loose mill scale loose rust, coats of
paints oil mud or other coating.
2. Concreting Operations: During concrete placing, a fitter shall be in attendance to

inspect fixed reinforcing bars and maintain bars in correct positions at each pour
locations.
7.3 Submittals of Drawings and Samples
A. Drawings: The Engineer will supply detailed drawings of reinforced concrete works.
Working drawings and bar bending schedules shall be prepared by the Contractor from
drawings supplied to him by the Engineer.
B. Samples: At least one month in advance of placing an order by him the Contractor shall
submit four samples of reinforcing bars which he intends for ordering. The samples
Page 53 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
shall confirm to IS: 10790 Part 2 (1984 reaffirmed 2005). The Engineer may carry out
any test he may require, to satisfy that the steel to be brought by the Contractor complies
with the test specifications. The Engineer reserves the right to shortlist the vendors and
the Contractor shall procure only from such sources.
7.4 Materials
7.4.1 Reinforcing Bars
Reinforcing bars shall be brought by the Contractor as laid down in the bid conditions.
7.4.2 Welded Wire Mesh
Mesh reinforcement, where specified shall conform to IS: 1566 (1982 reaffirmed 2000).
7.4.3 Binding Wire
Binding wire shall be 0-90 mm (20 SWG) diameter annealed wire confirming to IS: 280
(2006).
7.4.4 Supports and Accessories
Spacers for reinforcement shall be provided as per IS: 2502 (1963 reaffirmed 2004). The
cover blocks shall be made so as to provide the exact specified cover to reinforcement.
Stays, blocks, ties spacers or other supports as approved by Engineer shall be provided at
appropriate intervals to avoid sagging of bars between supports. Broken stones, brick
pieces, wooden blocks shall not be allowed for the purpose under any circumstances.
7.4.5 Dowels
Where and as designated on the drawings, steel bar dowels shall be provided for
anchorage to previously cast concrete. For anchorage where shown or required to existing
construction, an approved non-shrink epoxy type grout or approved deferred bolting
devices shall be used.
7.5 Execution
A. Bending: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, bars shall be bent and fixed in
accordance with the provisions of IS: 2502 (1963 reaffirmed 2004). All bending shall be
done cold with the use of an approved bending machine. Incorrectly bent bars shall not be
permitted to be used by re-bending.
B. Cleaning: Before placing reinforcement and again before concrete is placed,

reinforcement shall be wire brushed and cleaned of loose mill scale, oil, or other coating that
might destroy or reduce bond.
C. Concrete Cover: Cover over reinforcing bars shall be as indicated. Correct concrete
cover to reinforcement shall be maintained with the aid of approved cover blocks. Top
reinforcement in slabs shall be maintained in position by means of chairs made out of mild
steel, the diameter and quantity being sufficient to ensure security of the reinforcement in
shape and position.
D. Securing Place: All reinforcement shall be securely and accurately fixed in positions
shown on the drawings, care being taken to prevent contact with coated shuttering and
forms, by using approved support or spacer blocks, or chairs where necessary. All
Page 54 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
intersections of bars shall be secured with approved clips or with wire, the ends being turned
into the body of the concrete. The Contractor shall ensure that all reinforcement is
maintained in position at all times, particular care being taken during placing of the concrete.
E. Splices: Splices shall be wired contact lap splices unless otherwise indicated or
approved. Splices at points of maximum tensile stress shall be avoided and shall be
staggered elsewhere. The lap length and other provisions shall conform to IS: 456 (2000).
1. Vertical Bars: Splicing of vertical bars in concrete shall be at approved positions.
2. Horizontal Bars: Unless otherwise shown, lap splices shall be made with at least one
continuous bar between adjacent splices. Where double mats of bars occur in walls, lap
splices in opposite mats shall be offset at least 1.5 m.
F. Welding: Welding of reinforcing bars is not permitted unless indicated or approved by

the Engineer in writing in each case. Where permitted in writing, reinforcement which is
specified to be welded shall be welded by any process after which the Contractor can
demonstrate by bend and tensile tests that the strength of the parent metal is not reduced
and that the weld possesses strength not less than that of the parent metal. The welding
procedure established by successful test welds shall be maintained and no departure from
this procedure shall be permitted. Welds in positions other than those shown on the
drawings shall not be permitted. Welding shall be carried out only by qualified welders
with experience of similar works. The standard for welding will be those required by IS:
2751 (1979 reaffirmed 1998) and IS: 9417 (1989 reaffirmed 1994).
G. Misuse: No part of the reinforcement shall be used to support access ways, working
platforms, or placing equipment or for the conducting of an electric current.
H. Additional Reinforcement: Additional reinforcing bars shall be provided at sleeves and

openings as indicated or required. Where additional bars are not shown for such locations,
Engineer'
s instructions shall be obtained and additional bars provided as directed.
I. Welded Wire Mesh: All necessary supports and chairs shall be provided to hold in place
during concrete pours. Care shall be taken to prevent contact between the mesh and coated
shutters. Mesh shall be straightened to lay in flat plane before placing it and mesh shall be
bent as shown or required to fit the work. Laps shall be as per IS: 456 (2000).
J. Access: Where reinforcing mats have been fixed, access for concreting purposes shall,
where necessary, be provided by timber benches or similar approved devices supported by
the false work. Under no circumstances shall such access ways be supported by
reinforcement bars or mats.
K. Substitution: In case sizes of bars other than specified ones are permitted to be used, the
cross section area of steel shall have an area not less than designed area provided further
that bond stress is not exceeded and criteria for minimum and maximum spacing of bars as
per IS : 456 (2000) is not violated.
*****
Page 55 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION- 8
CONCRETE WORKS
Table of Contents
Clause Description
8.1 General
8.3 Testing of Materials
8.4 Mix Design
8.5 Batching
8.6 Concreting
8.7 Inspection
8.8 Compaction
8.9 Under water concreting
8.10 Curing
8.11 Finishing
8.12 Joints
8.13 Caulking grooves
8.14 Building – In
8.15 Hydraulic Test
8.16 Protection of concrete
8.17 Testing facilities
Page 56 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 8 : CONCRETE WORKS
8.1 General
8.1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for concrete works and placing procedures, finishing
and curing procedures for both cast-in-site and pre-cast cement concrete and including
reinforced concrete.
8.1.2 Application Standards
IS 456 (2000) Plain and Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practice

IS 383 (1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural
reaffirmed 2007) sources for concrete
IS 460 (1985) Specification for test sieves: Part II Perforated plate test sieves
IS 516 (1959 Method of test for strength of concrete
reaffirmed 2004)
IS 3370 (1965, 1967) Concrete Structures for the Storage of liquids, code of practice
IS 269 (1989) Specification for 33 grade ordinary Portland cement
IS 455 (1989) Specification for Portland slag cement
IS 1489 : Part 1 Specification for Portland pozzolana cement Part 1 Fly ash
(1991) based
IS 1489 : Part 2 Specification for Portland-pozzolana cement Part 2 calcined
(1991) clay based
IS 6909 (1990) Specification for super sulphated cement
IS 8041 (1990) Specification for rapid hardening Portland cement
IS 8043 (1991) Specification for hydrophobic Portland cement
8.1.3 Related Specifications
Section – 7: Reinforcement
Section – 9: Structural Steel
Section – 10: Pipe work
Section – 6: Form work
General Practice
A. General: In order to achieve the required strength and associated properties of concrete,
proper control of the water/cement ratio by weight shall be enforced. The strength shall be
prime consideration and water/cement ratio as prescribed by Engineer shall have to be
adhered to.
Page 57 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
B. Operators: The Engineer strictly requires that at no time whatsoever will the mixer
operator or those supervising or inspecting the works be permitted to alter the quantity of
water specified by the Engineer for mixing the concrete. Batching shall be accurate and as
specified by the Engineer.
C. Water/Cement Ratio: The water/cement ratio will be determined after mix trials by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engineer or his representative. If batching is by volume, the
Contractor shall be required to fabricate such volumetric batchers and water containers as the
Engineer may determine and require so as to simulate the ideals of the trial mix without
recourse to assessments by site staff and workmen.
D. Weighing: The Contractor shall make available always a weighing machine if so required
in the contract, guaranteed by the Contractor for its accuracy, for weighing cement and
batches of aggregate as and when the Engineer or his representative or his assistant may
require. The machine shall be capable of weighting up to 75 Kilograms and shall be accurate
to ± ¼ (0.250) Kilogram.
E. Compaction: All concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and fully worked around the
reinforcement by vibration just sufficiently so that the appearance of laitance is kept to a
minimum and in such manner as directed by the Engineer or his Representative. Under no
circumstances shall concrete be compacted by trowels or the like.
F. Transport and Placing: Fresh concrete from the mixer shall be transported to formwork
where required by the quickest and most efficient means so as to prevent pre-set or
segregation or any loss of ingredients and maintaining the required workability. Any laitance
from previous mixes shall be removed.
8.3 Testing of Materials
Materials shall be tested as hereinafter specified and unless specified otherwise all sampling
and testing shall be performed at Engineer approved Testing Laboratory, at the Contractor' s
expense.
A. Cement: Cement shall comply with the requirements of IS:269, IS:8041, IS:455,
IS:8112, IS:8043, IS:6909 IS: 1489, IS:12269. The testing laboratory at the discretion of the
Engineer shall perform such tests as are deemed necessary. Cement bags or bulk silos shall
be tagged for identification at location of sampling. Tests shall include weighing the cement
supply to check for net weight received at site of the works.
1. On arrival at the site, cement shall be stored in weather proof silos designed for the
purpose or in dry weather - tight and property ventilated structures with floors raised
15 to 20 cm above ground level, 30 cm away from walls and with adequate provision
to prevent absorption of moisture or flooding. All storage facilities shall be subject to
approval by the Engineer and shall be such as to permit easy access for inspection
and identification. Each consignment of cement shall be kept separately and the
Contractor shall use the consignments in the order in which they are received. Any
cement in drums or bags which have been opened shall be used immediately.
Different types of cement shall be kept in clearly marked separate storage facilities.
Not more than 15 bags shall be stacked vertically in one pile. Cement shall be stored
in double locking arrangement, so that cement transactions can be with the
knowledge of supervisory staff. Daily account of cement shall be maintained by
Contractor in the prescribed register and shall be made available to inspecting
authorities for store verification.
Page 58 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
2. The Contractor shall provide from each consignment of cement delivered to the site
such samples as the Engineer may require for testing. Any cement which is, in the
opinion of the Engineer, lumpy or partially set shall be rejected and the contractor
shall promptly remove such cement from the site.
3. Cement which has been stored on the site for more than ninety (90) days and cement
which in the opinion of the Engineer is of doubtful quality shall not be used in the works
until it has been retested and test sheets showing that it complies in all respects with the
relevant standard have been delivered to the Engineer.
B. Water for Concrete Mixing and Curing: Water for mixing cement mortar or concrete
shall not be salty or brackish and shall be clean, reasonably clear and free from objectionable
quantities of silt and traces of oil, acid and injurious alkali, salts, organic matter and other
deleterious material which will either weaken the mortar or concrete or cause efflorescence.
Water fit for drinking shall generally be suitable for mixing cement mortar. Water used for
curing of mortar or concrete shall not be too acidic or alkaline. It shall have pH value near 7.
Water shall meet the requirement of IS: 456 (2000). Generally potable water is fit for mixing
and curing.
C. Aggregates for Concrete: Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of IS: 383
(1970).
1. Fine Aggregate: All fine aggregate shall conform to IS: 383 (1970). Sand shall be clean,
well graded, hard, strong, durable and gritty particles free from injurious amounts of
dust, clay, kankar nodules, sofit or flaky particles, shale, alkali, salts, organic matter,
loam, mica or other deleterious substances and shall be approved by the Engineer. The
maximum size of particles shall be limited to 5 mm (about 3/16"). If the fine aggregate
contains more than 4 percent of clay, dust or silt, it shall be washed.
2. Coarse Aggregates: The coarse aggregate shall generally be cubical in shape broken
generally from best trap granite / quartzite / gneiss stones as available and generally
used in the region. It shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and of proper
gradation, veins, free from skin and coatings and weathered aggregates shall not be
permitted for use.
In plain cement concrete, the maximum size may be 80mm subject to above limitations
in absence of any special provisions.
For heavily reinforced structures the maximum size shall be restricted to 5 mm less than
minimum lateral distance between the bars. Generally for RCC works 20 mm nominal
size of aggregate shall be satisfactory.
Aggregates will be tested before and after concrete mix is established and whenever
character or source of material is changed. Tests shall include a sieve analysis to
determine conformity with limits of gradation.
1. Samples of aggregates 500 gm in weight will be taken by the Contractor at source of

supply and submitted to the Engineer before placing orders. These samples if approved
shall remain preserved in the Engineer'
s care for reference and the type of aggregate used
in the works may not be altered without the Engineer' s prior approval.
2. Aggregates shall be obtained from an approved source and shall conform to the
requirements of IS: 383 (1970).
Page 59 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
For fine aggregate grading in table of IS: 383 (1970) shall be applicable. Aggregates shall
not be flaky scoraceous or elongated particles, defined as particles having a maximum
dimension greater than five times the minimum dimension. Aggregate shall have a water
absorption not exceeding two percent when tested in accordance with IS.
3. The Contractor shall sample and carry out analysis in the presence of the Engineer' s
representative, of the fine aggregate and nominal size of coarse aggregate in use
employing the methods described in IS: 383 (1970) and 2386 (1963) at least once in
each week when concreting is in progress and at such more frequent intervals as the
Engineer may require. The grading of all aggregates shall be within the respective
limits specified in the codes. In case of variance of fineness modulus, the Engineer
may instruct the Contractor to alter the relative proportions of the aggregates in the
mix to allow for such difference, or may require further trial mixes.
4. Storage of aggregates shall be provided at each point where concrete is made such that
each nominal size of coarse aggregate and the fine aggregate shall be kept separated at all
times. Contamination of the aggregates by the ground or other foreign matter shall be
effectively prevented at all times, and each heap of aggregate shall be capable of draining
freely. The Contractor shall ensure that graded coarse aggregates are dumped, stored and
removed from store in a manner that does not cause segregation.
5. Wet fine aggregate shall not be used until, in the opinion of the Engineer, it has drained to
a constant and uniform moisture content, unless the Contractor with the knowledge of the
Engineer measure the moisture content of fine aggregate and adds water in each batch of
concrete mixed to allow for the water contained in the fine aggregate.
D. Classes of concrete: All cement concrete whether used in RCC work or plain cement
concrete work shall be designed in grades (by strength at the age of 28 days).
M10, M15, M20, M25 and M30, where ‘M’ refers to the mix and the number 10, 15, 20, 25
and 30 represent the specified 28 days works cube compressive strength of the mix under
reference, expressed in N/mm2.
The proportions of cement, aggregate water for ordinary cement concrete shall be as per
relevant standard.
The cement concrete shall be tested for compressive strength at the age of 28 days of 15 cm.
cubes in accordance with the latest IS: 516 (1959, reaffirmed in 2004).
Strength requirement of Concrete: Grade of concrete in all water retaining RCC works shall
be M30 with minimum cement content of 350 Kg/cum and with a maximum water cement
ratio of 0.45.
For quick result the Contractor shall carry out compression tests on representative 15 cm
cubes cast in accordance with relevant IS: 516 (1959, reaffirmed in 2004) at 7 days in
addition to the normal 28 days compressive strength. However, the 28 days compressive
strength alone shall be the criteria for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.
Suitable water cement ratio for the different mixes in use shall be determined in consultation
with the Engineer and shall generally be in the range of 0.45 to 0.55. The exact value being
fixed after taking into account all relevant factors such as strength required, weather
condition, water absorbed material, workability and slump required, consistency with the
work requirements, methods of compaction, etc.
Page 60 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
E. Admixtures: Admixtures shall mean material added to concrete materials during mixing
for the purpose of altering properties of normal concrete mixes. If the Contractor wishes to
use admixtures, otherwise than as expressly ordered by Engineer, he shall first obtain the
Engineer' s written permission. The methods of use and the quantities of admixture used shall
be subject to the Engineer' s approval, which approval or other shall in no way limit the
Contractor' s obligations under the contract to produce concrete with the specified strength
and workability. Concrete of any class containing an admixture shall be separately designed
and have separate preliminary tests and trial mixes and tested for approval by the Engineer
as if it were a separate class of concrete.
F. Water stop: Water stop if specified shall be PVC 200 mm wide conforming to CWPD
specifications to make construction joints and expansion joint watertight.
Water stop installation along the joints shall be done by embedding one half of the water
stop in each side of the joint between the adjacent sections of the concrete as per
manufacturer' s specifications and direction of the Engineer. Water stops shall be properly
aligned and placed in position during embedding. To achieve continuity of water stop
along the joint, a crossing and at change of alignment the water stops shall be joined as
per manufacturer' s specification and direction of Engineer.
8.4 Mix Design
Mix design is normally a prerequisite to any concreting job and will be required on all
major works. If required by the Documents, an approved testing laboratory shall, at the
Contractor' s expense, design a mix for each class of concrete and shall submit full details
of the mix designs to the Engineer for his approval. The Engineer' s representative and the
Contractor shall clearly code each approved mix with a number and date, and file all
details for identifying and reproducing exactly the same mix.
A. General: Each mix design shall be such that the aggregate shall comprise fine aggregate
and coarse aggregate of the size specified and the combined aggregate grading shall be
continuous. Aggregate shall be calculated by weight, and batching procedures shall be
established. The cement content by weight shall not be outside the minimum and maximum
limits calculated from the minimum and maximum dry aggregate to cement ratios specified.
The mixes shall be designed to produce an average concrete strength at 28 days after
manufacture not less than trail mix test strength specified. The water/cement ratio shall be in
the range of 0.45 to 0.55.
B. Preliminary Mix: The proportions of cement, aggregate water determined by the

Contractor in his mix design shall be preliminary mix of concrete made and tested for
strength work-ability under laboratory conditions observing the appropriate requirements.
These preliminary mixes shall be repeatedly adjusted in proportions as necessary until
concrete mixes meeting requirements of the preliminary and trial mix tests specified with
the workability defined herein have been produced. If at time during construction of the
works, the source of cement aggregates is changed, or the grading of the aggregate alters,
further preliminary mixes shall be undertaken.
C. Trial: After the Engineer' s approval the preliminary concrete design for each class of
concrete and during or following carrying out of the preliminary tests the Contractor shall
prepare a trial mix of each class in the presence of the Engineer. The mixes shall be mixed
for the same time and handled by means of same plant that the Contractor proposes to use in
the works. Proportion of cement, aggregates and water shall be carefully determined by
weight in accordance with the approved mix (or modified mix design after preliminary tests)
Page 61 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
and sieve analysis shall be made, by approved methods of the fine aggregate and nominal
size of coarse aggregate used.
D. Water: Water for mixing cement mortar or concrete shall not be salty or brackish and
shall be clean, reasonably clear and free from objectionable quantities of silt and traces of
oil, acid and injurious alkali, salts, organic matter and other deleterious material which will
either weaken the mortar or concrete or cause efflorescence. Water fit for drinking shall
generally be suitable for mixing cement mortar. Water used for curing of mortar or concrete
shall not be too acidic or alkaline. It shall have pH value near 7.
Water shall meet the requirement of IS: 456 (2000). Generally potable water is fit for mixing
and curing.
E. Admixtures: Admixtures shall mean material added to concrete materials during mixing
for the purpose of altering properties of normal concrete mixes. If the Contractor wishes to
use admixtures, otherwise than as expressly ordered by Engineer, he shall first obtain the
Engineer' s written permission. The methods of use and the quantities of admixture used
shall be subject to the Engineer' s approval, which approval or other shall in no way limit the
Contractor' s obligations under the contract to produce concrete with the specified strength
and workability. Concrete of any class containing an admixture shall be separately designed
and have separate preliminary tests and trial mixes and tested for approval by the Engineer
as if it were a separate class of concrete.
F. Waiver of Mix Design and Weigh Batching: On certain works the Engineer may
waive the requirement of designing mixes and may allow the use of established
nominal mix proportion, provided always that preliminary trials are made to establish
the volumetric batching procedure and mix strengths. The Contractor shall ensure that
any established procedure approved by the Engineer is strictly adhered to, so as to
achieve consistent strength, durability and economy of the concrete while ensuring
approved workability of the mix. Any waiver of mix design or weight batching will not
relieve the Contractor of his obligations to consistently produce concrete of the specified
and approved strength and durability as determined by works tests defined hereafter.
However in any particular work/part of work the Engineer may decide to adopt mix design
concrete.
G. Workability: The workability of each class of concrete shall be such that satisfactory
compaction can be obtained when the concrete is placed and vibrated in the works. There
shall be no tendency to segregate when it is handled, transported and compacted by the
methods which the Contractor proposes to use when handling, transporting and compacting
that class of concrete in the works.
H. Concrete Mix Design: Procedure for designing concrete mixes shall be as per IS: 10262
(1982) - Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design.
8.5 Batching
8.5.1 Cement
All cement used in making concrete shall be measured by weight either with an approved
weighing machine or by making the size of each batch of concrete such as to require an
integral number of complete bags of cement of weight consistent with the requirements of
relevant IS code. In case of ordinary mixes the cement bag shall be taken to be 50 Kg (35
litres).
Page 62 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
8.5.2 Aggregate
The fine and coarse aggregates shall be measured separately either by volume in gauge
boxes made as hereinafter specified or by weight using machines with weigh batching
attachments. For high grade concrete the fine aggregate shall be measured singly or
cumulatively by weight. The Engineer shall decide up on this requirement.
8.5.3 Gauge Boxes
Gauge boxes shall be soundly constructed by the Contractor, with the approval of the
Engineer and shall be of timber or of steel to contain exactly the volume of the various
aggregates required for one batch of each mix. Each gauge shall be clearly marked with the
mix code and the aggregate for which it is intended. When calculating the size of the gauge
box for fine aggregate an allowance shall be made for the bulking of the fine aggregate due
to the average amount of moisture contained in the stockpiles on the site. Before the
Contractor shall put any gauge box into use on the site he shall obtain the approval of the
Engineer of the size and construction of such gauge box.
8.5.4 Water Containers
Containers for measuring water shall be soundly constructed of metal to contain the exact
quantity of water required for a batch of mix, due allowance having been made for the
moisture content of the aggregates, as hereinafter specified, or such fractions of the
quantity as are approved by the Engineer. Before any container is put into use, the
approval of the Engineer shall be obtained.
8.5.5 Weigh-Batching
Weigh-batching machines shall provide facilities for the accurate control and measurement
of the materials either singly or cumulatively and shall be capable of immediate adjustment
of operators in order to permit variations if ordered by the Engineer. All weight dials shall be
easily visible from the place at which filling and emptying of the hoppers is controlled.
8.5.6 Addition of Water and Mixing
A. Water: The addition of water to a mixer shall be controlled such that between five to ten
percent of the water enters the mixer before cement and aggregate are added, a further five to
ten percent of water enters the mixer after the said materials have been batched. The
remainder of the water shall be added at a uniform rate with the said materials. The water
measuring device shall also be readily adjustable so that the quantity of water added to the
mixer can, if necessary in the opinion of the witnessing Engineer's representative be varied.
The natural moisture contents of the aggregates shall be determined before the
commencement of concreting or at such intervals as may be necessary or as requested by the
Engineer.
B. Admixtures: Any admixtures approved by the Engineer, which may be used shall be
measured separately in calibrated dispensers and shall be added to the mixture together with
the water.
C. Uniformity of Mix: Concrete shall be mixed in batches in plant capable of mixing the
aggregates, cement and water (including admixtures, if any) into a mixture uniform in
colour and consistency and of discharging the mixture without segregation.
Page 63 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
D. Contractor's Returns: The Contractor shall render to the Engineer, not more than
twenty-four hours in arrears, a daily return for each class of concrete of the number of
batches mixed, and total volume of concrete placed, the number of batches wasted or
rejected and the weight of cement used. In case of ordinary mixes, where permitted the
cement bags consumed for quantities of various classes of concrete shall be furnished. In
addition daily details of time of starting concrete, closure, Number of batches through mixer,
WC ratio, slump, date of striking form works, etc. shall be maintained. These day-to-day
records shall be authenticated by responsible supervisory staff.
8.5.7 Plant and Equipment Generally
All mixing and batching plants boxes, containers and other equipment shall be
maintained free of defects or offset concrete or cement and shall be cleaned before
commencing mixing. At such intervals as may be directed by the Engineer the Contractor
shall provide weights, containers and equipment necessary for testing the accuracy of the
weighing plant, water measuring plant and admixture dispenser.
8.6 Concreting
The Contractor shall clear from the surface of the foundations or previously placed
concrete all oil, loose fragments of rock, earth, mud, timber and any other foreign matter
and shall clear standing water and wash the surface of a previous lift of concrete to the
A. Laitance: Where laitance on a life of concrete is evident or if a substantial bond between

this lift or bay of concrete and the next is required, in the opinion of the Engineer'or his
representative, the Contractor shall have the surface wire brushed after initial (one day) set of
the concrete or have it bush-hammered at no extra cost to the Employer. Any reinforcing
bars covered in laitance shall be wire brushed to clean the surface of the metal.
B. Binding: As ordered by the Engineer, or as shown on the drawings the formation surfaces
on which concrete is to be placed shall be covered with either blinding concrete not less than
75 mm thick, or waterproof building paper, or polythene sheeting immediately after
completion of the final trimming of the excavation.
8.7 Inspection
Concrete shall not be placed until the Engineer has inspected the formwork and the
reinforcing steel, and taken necessary measurements of the latter, and has approved the
surfaces upon which the concrete is to be placed.
A. Transporting: Fresh concrete shall be transported from the mixer to its place in the
works as quickly and as efficiently as possible by methods which will prevent pre-set or
segregation. If segregation has nevertheless occurred in any instance the materials shall be
remixed or discarded at the option of the Engineer.
B. Placing: Fresh concrete shall be placed and compacted before initial set has occurred
and, in any event, not later than thirty minutes from the time of mixing. Concrete shall be
carefully placed in horizontal layers which shall not be allowed to slide or flow down
sloping surfaces but shall be placed in its final position from skips, or similar devices. If this
is impracticable, it shall be shovelled into position care being taken to avoid segregation. No
concrete shall be dropped more than 1.5 m. If greater drops are necessary approved chutes
may be used. If the concrete abuts against earth or any other material liable to become loose
or to slip, care shall be taken to avoid falls of materials on to the surface of the wet concrete.
Page 64 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
Concrete for any particular portion shall be done in one continuous operation leaving
construction joints, if specified by drawing.
Before commencing subsequent concrete on the one left incomplete, all the loose particles,
laitance etc. shall be removed and surface shall be covered with thick cement slurry. The
concrete compacted manually shall be laid in layers not more than 15 to 20 cm. The
successive layer shall follow within 30 minutes or earlier.
8.8 Compaction
All concrete placed in-situ shall be compacted with power drive or pneumatic internal type
vibrators unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in writing, and shall be supplemented
by hand spading and tamping where required. Vibrating screen type vibrators may be used
for thin slabs. There shall be sufficient and spare vibrators of adequate capacity to compact
the work in hand.
A. Vibration: Vibrators shall be inserted into the uncompacted concrete vertically and at
regular intervals. Where the uncompacted concrete is in a layer above freshly compacted
concrete the vibrator shall be allowed to penetrate vertically for about 75 mm into the
previous freshly compacted layer. The vibrators shall not be allowed to come into contact
with the reinforcement or formwork nor shall they be withdrawn weakly from the mass of
concrete but shall be drawn back slowly while in motion so as to leave no voids. Internal
type vibrators shall not be placed in the concrete in any arbitrary manner nor shall concrete
be moved from one part of the work to another by means of the vibrators. The vibrators shall
have minimum 3600 (and preferably 5000) impulses per minute.
B. Duration: The duration of vibration shall be limited to that required to produce

satisfactory compaction of the concrete without causing segregation. Vibration shall on no
account be continued after the appearance of water or grout on the surface.
C. Hand Compaction: This shall be permitted exceptionally for small jobs by the Engineer.
In such cases, compaction shall be attained by means of rodding, tamping, ramming and
slicing with suitable tools. The thickness of concrete layers will also be suitably reduced
when hand compaction is resorted to.
8.9 Underwater concreting
No concrete shall be placed in water without the Engineer' s written permission, which
may only be granted if in his opinion it is not practicable to place the concrete in the dry.
Concrete shall not be placed in running water nor shall concrete be allowed to fall through
water. Any water entering the area where concrete is being placed shall, at the
Contractor' s expenses, be kept clear of the concreting works. If under water concreting is
permitted, the specified mix of concrete shall be strengthened by increasing the cement
content by atleast 10% and reducing the water/cement ratio to not more than 0.45, and the
placing shall be only through a method approved by the Engineer. The volume or mass of
the coarse aggregate shall not be less than 1 times nor more than twice that of the fine
aggregate. The materials shall be so proportioned as to produce a concrete having a slump
of not less than 100 mm and not more than 180 mm.
8.10 Curing
All concrete shall be protected from the effects of sunshine, rain, running water or
mechanical damage and cured by covering with jute, hessian or similar absorbent material
kept constantly wet or a layer of sand kept covered with water is also permissible for a
continuous period of fourteen days at least from the date of placement. Should the Contractor
Page 65 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
fail to water concrete continuously, the Engineer may provide labour, materials required for
watering and recover the cost from the Contractor.
8.11 Finishing
Immediately after removal of forms any undulations, depressions, cavities, honey

combing, broken edges or corners high spots and defects shall be made good and finished
with cement mortar (1:2 proportion) but the necessity of such finishing must be
exceptional and total surface requiring finishing shall not exceed 1%. Where concrete
surface is to receive plaster, the surface shall be roughened immediately after removal of
forms and within a day thereof to secure a hold for the plaster. The rate of concrete is
inclusive of this roughening and finishing. Concrete after finishing shall be cured for the
full period. The concrete surfaces, where plastering is not required shall be finished to
smooth surface with a carborundum stone rubbing as required by the Engineer.
8.12 Joints
Construction Joints
Construction joints are defined as joints in the concrete introduced for convenience in
construction at which special measures are taken to achieve subsequent continuity without
provision for further relative movement.
A. Submittal: No concreting shall be started until the Engineer has approved the method of
placing, the positions and form of the construction joints and the size of lifts.
B. Jointing: The face of a construction joint shall have all laitance removed and the
aggregate exposed prior to the placing of fresh concrete. The laitance shall wherever
practicable be removed by spraying the concrete surface with water under pressure and
brushing whilst the concrete is still green. Where the laitance cannot be removed whilst the
concrete is green, the concrete surface forming part of the joint shall be hacked to expose the
aggregate. Where aggregate is damaged during hacking, it shall be removed from the
concrete face by further hacking. All loose matter shall be removed and the exposed surface
thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing, and washing down, and the surface to which fresh
concrete is applied shall be lean and damp.
Expansion Joints
Expansion joints are defined as joints intended to accommodate relative movement between
adjoining parts of a structure, special provision being made where necessary for maintaining
the water tightness of the joint.
A. The joint location and type will be as indicated in the drawing.
1. The Contractor shall comply with the instructions of manufacturers of proprietary

jointing materials and shall, if required by the Engineer, demonstrate that the jointing
materials can be applied satisfactorily and will last the life of the structure.
2. Flexible water stops shall be fully supported in the formwork, free of nails and clear of
reinforcement and other fixtures. Damaged water stops shall be replaced and during
concreting care shall be taken to place the concrete so that water stops do not bend or
distort.
B. Jointing: The surface of set concrete shall not be disturbed and concrete shall be placed
against the dry finished surface.
Page 66 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
1. If ingress of water or corrosive agents in the joint is possible, the steel, where such steel is
continued, shall be cleaned and coated with two coats of an approved bituminous paint.
2. Where specified, the surface of the set concrete shall be painted with two coats of an
approved bituminous paint which shall be allowed to dry before placing new concrete
against it. Care shall be taken to prevent paint getting on the water stop, if any.
3. Expansion joints shall be formed by a separating strip of pre-formed compressible

unperishable joint filler, to be approved by the Engineer.
8.13 Caulking Grooves
Grooves shall be provided and sealed where specified. Before the application of any
surface sealer the contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the
men to be employed on the work have sufficient experience in this type of work.
(i). The grooves shall be formed neatly by tapered battens covered in mould oil, so as to
enable easy removal.
(ii). After the concrete has cured, the groove shall be wire brushed and cleaned out
thoroughly and dried to provide a firm bond with the sealant.
(iii).Sealing material shall be supplied by approved manufacturers and incorporated in

movement joints in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The types of rubber / bitumen / polysulphide
surface sealers are as follows:
a. Type 1 - Rubber / Bitumen sealer hot poured into grooves formed at joints in floors.
b. Type 2 - Rubber / Bitumen sealer for trowelling or gunning into grooves formed at
joints in walls.
c. Type 3 - Two pack polysulphide sealer for cold pouring into grooves formed in
floors.
d. Type 4 - Two pack polysulphide for application by gun, trowelled to required
profile into grooves formed in walls.
(iv).The joint grooves shall be primed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer' s
recommendations, and the filler strip if any, shall be placed. The sealer shall be heated
if recommended and applied to the prepared grooves by hot-pouring, trowelling or
gunning as appropriate. No overheating of the material shall be permitted.
(v). The two pack polysulphide sealer shall be mixed with an approved tool in accordance
with the manufacturer' s instructions. The sealers shall be applied in accordance with
the manufacturer' s recommendations and shall be surface worked by means of a
specially shaped trowel to ensure adequate bond to the sides of the groove and the
correct surface profile.
(vi). At all caulked joints, the face of the caulking strip and 50 mm width of concrete on
either side shall be painted with the coats of paint having the same base as the caulking
compound.
(vii). Any surface sealers which are defective after curing period has elapsed, or which
are subsequently damaged, shall be cut out and made good to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Page 67 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
8.14 Building-in
The Contractor shall build in pipes fittings and other items including any plant as per the
approved drawings. The Contractor shall erect all formwork, struts, ties and other temporary
works to enable the pipes, fittings or plant to be built in, and such formwork shall be
designed to allow placing of the concrete or grout so as to fill the voids completely, and to
enable air to escape from any cavities during the filling. The spaces around pipes and
machinery shall be filled with concrete, cement/sand mortar or cement grout as directed by
the Engineer.
8.14.1 Concrete
Concrete shall be of the same class mix as the concrete of the member into which the plant is
being built, except that the maximum aggregate size shall be as agreed with the Engineer for
each particular situation. Where required by the Engineer the mix shall also incorporate an
approved expanding grout additive used in accordance with the manufacturer' s instructions.
In specific situations, the Engineer will require the filling in to be done with cement/sand
mortar or with cement grout.
8.15 Hydraulic Test
Structures designed as water retaining shall be hydraulically tested. Hydraulic test shall be as
per relevant standards or as directed by the Engineer. Water required for such tests shall be
arranged by the Contractor at his own cost.
8.16 Protection of Concrete

Concrete placed below ground level shall be protected from falling earth during and after
placing. Concrete placed in ground containing deleterious substances, shall be kept free from
contact with such ground and with water draining there during placing for a period of three
days or as otherwise instructed thereafter by the Engineer.
No load of any kind, however light, shall be allowed on concrete which has not adequately
set, and unless it has been pronounced fit by the Engineer.
Immediately after the compaction of the concrete has been completed Contractor shall
ensure that it is adequately protected from the weather. Protective materials shall be kept
continuously damp and in position for a minimum period of fourteen days or such other time
as the Engineer may direct.
Where large sections of concrete are poured special precautions as approved by the Engineer
shall be taken to reduce and dissipate the heat generated by the setting and hardening of the
concrete.
8.17 Testing Facilities
The Contractor shall set up a laboratory for conducting cube strength, etc. The Contractor
shall provide further details on setting of laboratory along with the bid. However, random
samples may be got tested from an Engineer’s approved laboratory at the Contractor’s
expense.
*****
Page 68 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-9
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Table of Contents
Clause Description
9.1 General
9.3 Material
9.4 Execution
Page 69 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-9 : STRUCTURAL STEEL
9.1 General
9.1.1 Scope
This specification are for the supplying, fabricating and erecting in position mild steel
structures such as beams, monorail, platform, MS ladders, stairs and MS grating etc. from
angles channels, flats, plates, etc. including cost of steel, cutting to required size, riveting,
bolting or welding, fixing in the line and level, painting with two coats, of red oxide primer
and two coats of approved enamel paint. Requirements specified in this section shall form a
part of detailed specifications for item of works falling under this category. Relevant Indian
standards shall apply.
9.1.2 Principal item area
Structural steel members, steel joists, plates and connections, pipe supports for piping in all
locations, ladders and stairs and miscellaneous metal work for sewerage and sewage
pumping station installations.
Unless otherwise specified all work specified herein and shown on the drawing shall
conform to the applicable requirements of the following specifications and applicable IS
codes.
9.2.1 Related Specifications
Section – 8: Concrete works

Section – 10: Pipe Work
Section – 18: Mechanical Equipment
Section – 19: Electrical Equipment
9.3 Materials
a. General
This work shall include the furnishing and installation of all structural steel and
miscellaneous metal work and related supports, tanks, manhole steps, equipment guards,
anchors and other appurtenances and any other work shown on the drawings or herein
specified. All materials shall be new, sound and of the best quality available.
b. Material
Steel rolled sections, plates and bars shall conform to the latest editions of IS: 808, 1730,
1732 and 3954. Pipes used for columns or other structural purposes shall conform to
IS:1161-1998. Iron castings shall conform to IS:210.
c. Steel Chequered Plate
Plates shall be of regular quality carbon steel of the thickness shown on the drawings. The
raised legs shall be diamond shaped and have an angle and opposed pattern.
Page 70 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
d. Common Bolts
Bolts and nuts shall conform to IS: 1363 - Part 1 to 3 (2002). The bolts exposed to liquid
surfaces shall be of Stainless Steel or Brass.
e. Welding Electrodes
The electrodes shall conform to the requirements of IS: 814 (2004) as amended.
f. Shop Painting
Structural steel not designated to be galvanized shall be shop-coated using priming coat of
red lead as specified in painting section of these specifications. The portion of steel to be
embedded in concrete shall not be painted.
g. Miscellaneous Structural Works
Steel fabricated components, unit and assemblies for various equipment for sewage pumping
station to be installed shall be fabricated as per drawings and conforming to various
standards codes of manufacture as specified and applicable.
9.4 Execution
Erection shall include the installation and erection of all structural steel as called for the
section. The Contractor shall verify correctness before starting erection. As erection
progresses, the work shall be securely bolted up to take care of all dead-load, wind and
erection stresses.
No final bolting or welding shall be done until each portion of the structure has been
properly aligned and plumbed.
Bolts shall be drawn up tight and threads set so that nuts cannot become loose.
(i) Damaged Members: During erection, members which are bent, twisted or damaged
shall be straightened or replaced as directed by Engineer. If heating is required in
straightening, a heat method shall be used which will ensure uniform temperature
throughout the entire member. Members, which in the opinion of the Engineer are
damaged to an extent impairing their appearance, strength or serviceability, shall be
removed and replaced with new members.
(ii) Bearing Plates: Bearing plates shall be provided under beams and columns resting on
walls or footings. Bearing plates may be attached or loose and aligned on steel wedges or
shims. After the supported members have been plumbed and properly positioned and the
anchor nuts tightened, the entire bearing area under the plate shall be dry packed solidly with
bedding mortar. Wedges and shims shall be cut off flush with edge of bearing plate, and shall
be left in place.
(iii) Substitutions: Unless otherwise directed, the exact sections, shapes, thickness, sizes,
weights and the details of construction shown for the structural steel work shall be furnished.
However, the Contractor, because of his stock or shop practices, may suggest changes if the
net area of section is not thereby reduced, if the section properties are at least equivalent and
if the overall dimensions are not exceeded. All substitutions or other deviations from
drawings and/or specifications shall be specifically noted or "clouded" on the shop drawing
submittals.
Page 71 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
(iv) Flame Cutting: Flame cutting by the use of a gas cutting torch in the field for correcting
fabrication errors will not be permitted on any major member in the structural framing. The
use of flame-cutting torch will be permitted only on minor members, when the member is
not under stress, and only after the approval of the Engineer has been obtained.
(v) Storage of Materials: Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored
above ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports. Material shall be kept free from dirt,
grease and other foreign matter and shall be protected from corrosion.
(vi) Steel Stairs: To be fabricated true to size and details and provided complete with all
attachments, steel pipe rails and handrails, checker plate-nosed grating type treads and
landings. Shop and setting drawings shall be submitted beforehand for approval of the
Engineer.
(vii) Anchor Bolts and Anchors: Anchor bolts and anchors shall be properly located and
built into concrete to work. Bolts and anchors shall be present by the use of templates or such
other methods as may be required to locate the anchors and anchor bolts accurately.
Embedded anchor bolts that are submerged in process water or pump room floors, or are in
enclosed tanks or spaces exposed to process gas or moisture, shall be of stainless steel, a non-
oxidising lubricant grease shall be applied before bolting.
(viii) Ladders
Contingent upon designated requirements for different locations, galvanized steel unit
will be fabricated conforming to requirements. Rails where indicated shall be provided.
MS Ladders with strings as specified and the steps of MS bars of specified diameter shall be
provided. The handholds shall be curved. The size and dimensions shall be as specified or as
shown in the drawings.
(ix) Steel Chequered Plate: The chequered plate (size, location and type) shall be as shown
in the drawing. Steel chequered plate and frame shall be galvanized after fabrication unless
noted otherwise. All assemblies shall be reinforced on concealed faces as necessary to
support the service loads required. Aluminium shall be isolated from dissimilar metals,
concrete, masonry and plaster to prevent electrolytic deterioration.
(x) Stair Abrasive Safety Nosings: Extend nosings to within 150 mm of wall or stringer
and equip each with embedded anchorage of secure attachment. Finishes flush with concrete
at all cast in place concrete stairs, except or otherwise designated.
(xi) GI Piping Railing: Hand railing shall be with 40 mm of GI pipe in double row with
40mm of GI pipe uprights at spacing not more than 1.5 m and of one metre clear height.
Hand railing shall be painted with two coats of enamel paints over a coat of red oxide primer.
Hand railing shall be provided all around sumps/tanks, platforms, ladders and walkways.
The railing shall be mounted so as to produce a finished appearance that is Plumb,

straight and true to dimension, free of kinks, twists and abrasions. Curves, where
indicated or necessary, shall be bent to a radius to avoid sharp corners. Safety chains shall
be 1.25 cm links with a harness type snap.
(xii) C.I. Steps: C.I. steps for wet well / manholes shall be as per IS: 5455 (1969, reaffirmed
2003). The steps shall be clean, well cast and shall be free from oil and sand holes,
wrappings, etc. The C.I. steps shall be PVC encapsulated, heavy duty type having size 300 x
150 x 25 mm. The portion of the step which projects from the wall of the wet well / manhole
Page 72 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
shall have a raised chequered design to provide an adequate non-slip grip. Minimum weight
of each step shall be as per IS. The embedded portion of the step shall be coated with
approved bituminous paint.
(xiii) Welding Electrodes: The electrodes shall conform to the requirements of IS: 814
(2004) as amended.
(xiv) Shop painting: Structural steel not designated to be galvanized shall be shop-coated
using priming coat of red lead as specified in painting section of these specifications. The
portion of steel to be embedded in concrete shall not be painted.
Before leaving the shop all steel not shown or specified to be galvanized shall be given one
coat of primer red lead. Final painting shall be in specified coats of approved brand oil paint.
(xv) Galvanizing: All metal work shown or specified to be galvanized shall be zinc coated
as per IS: 2629 (1985). The zinc coating should be free from defects and shall have uniform
thickness of coating. Galvanized coatings marred or damaged during erection or fabrication
shall be repaired by any approved process as directed by the Engineer.
(xvi) Test Reports: Certified physical and chemical mill test reports shall be furnished by
the Contractor for material used for major structural members.
(xvii) Shop Drawings: Five sets of shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before fabrication of any of the work. In approving shop drawings, the Engineer
does not assume responsibility for accuracy of the work or work relative to other plant
components as constructed.
(xviii) Anchor Bolts: Shall be galvanized and shall be fabricated as shown, or specified by
the equipment manufacturer. Suitable expansion bolts may be used in lieu of anchor bolts at
certain locations. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to request the substitution
and obtain the Engineer' s approval regarding type and location of expansion bolts proposed
to be used prior to pouring concrete.
(xix) Steel Grating: Seat angles and anchors shall be of steel. Grating and support shall be
galvanized. Gratings to be supplied and installed as detailed in the drawings.
(xx) Mechanical Equipment Guards: All rotating belts, pulleys and shafting shall be
covered and guarded in conformity with applicable safety requirements or as directed by the
Engineer.
(xxi) Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: The Contractor shall furnish and install all hollow
metal door and window frames as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the detailed
specifications.
Frames and doors shall be installed in accordance with plans and approved shop drawings in
a rigid, substantial manner and shall be square, plumb and level.
Metal doors shall be thoroughly cleaned and all rough or uneven spots dressed down and all
pits, depressions or scratches in exposed surfaces shall be filled with metal putty. Exposed
surfaces shall be primed with one shop coat metal primer, which shall form a satisfactory
base for final finish. Back of frames shall be protected with a coat of rust-inhibitive metal
primer.
Page 73 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
All metal doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned and any spots where shop coat is
damaged shall be touched up with same paint used for shop coat.
(xxii) Miscellaneous Structural Works: Steel fabricated components, units and assemblies
for various equipment for sewage pumping and sewage treatment installation shall be
fabricated as per drawings and conforming to various standard codes of manufacture as
specified and applicable.
*****
Page 74 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 10
PIPEWORK
Table of Contents
Clause Description
10.1 General
10.2 Handling and Storage of Pipes
10.3 Quality Standards of Pipes
10.5 Laying of Pipes – General
10.6 Laying of Pipes
10.7 Jointing Pipes
10.8 Pipes Through Structures
10.9 Thrust Blocks
10.10 Pressure Pipelines
10.11 Manholes and Chambers
10.12 Testing
Page 75 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 10 : PIPE WORK
10.1 General
This section specifies the laying, jointing, testing, repairing and retesting wherever necessary
and commissioning of pipelines for gravity sewers, pressure mains and property connections.
Excavation specifications are covered in Section – 3: Earthwork.
In areas of high ground water table, dewatering arrangements shall be made to ensure the
excavations are kept free of water. The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent
infiltration into permanent works.
Pipe ends shall always be plugged or capped immediately after the pipe has been laid. The
plug shall only be removed for the purposes of making a connection at the pipe end or testing
the pipeline. The plug or cap shall be replaced immediately on completion of the test.
Regular inspections shall be undertaken on all completed works for signs of infiltration. If
infiltration is discovered the Contractor shall carry out rectification in the presence of the
Engineer or his representative.
Where trenches are excavated in or across existing pavements, the trenching shall be
performed carefully so that no more than the minimum width required is excavated. The
Contractor shall ensure leaving the remaining paving with as nearly a vertical face as
possible and at original grade.
Road crossing installations shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the
Authorities concerned. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements with the concerned
authorities for road crossings and shall schedule his operations so as to minimize interference
with traffic. Contractor shall make all provisions as necessary like barricades, lighting,
caution boards, etc, to avoid inconvenience to the maintenance of traffic.
10.2 Handling and Storage of Pipes
Pipes and fittings shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer' s
recommendations subject to the approval of the Engineer. Handling operations shall be
carried out with care.
During transportation loading and unloading of pipes and fittings they shall not be allowed to
come into contact with any sharp projections which may cause damage. During transit pipes
and fittings shall be well secured and adequately supported along their length. No pipe shall
overhang the end of a vehicle during transportation.
Pipes shall be stacked to the approval of the Engineer. Spigot and Socket pipes shall be
stacked so that successive pipe layers have sockets protruding at opposite ends of the stack.
Pipes of different sizes and thickness shall be stacked separately. The maximum height of
stacked pipes shall not exceed 2 m, or that recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is
less.
Pipes and fittings shall be protected in storage to the approval of the Engineer by means of an
impermeable membrane which shall cover the pipes and fittings and separate them from the
ground on which they are supported. The membrane shall be strong durable in the prevailing
climatic conditions.
Page 76 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
Each pipe and fitting shall be subject to a visual inspection after off-loading at site and prior
to installation.
Pipes and fittings damaged during transportation handling and storage shall be set aside and
the damage brought to the attention of the Engineer. Proposals for repair shall be submitted
in writing for the Engineer' s approval. No attempt shall be made to repair damage without
the Engineer’s approval. If in the Engineer's opinion the nature of any damage is such that
the condition of a pipe has been impaired and cannot be repaired the pipe concerned shall not
be incorporated in the Works and removed from site.
10.3 Quality Standards of Pipes

10.3.1 Concrete Pipes
Concrete pipes shall be reinforced and comply with IS: 458 (2003). RCC pipes for sewerage
system shall be of NP2 and NP3 class, S&S type of joints, manufactured using sulphate
resisting cement. All mix design and test data and results shall be maintained as part of
the record for the Contract and shall be signed by the Engineer and the Contractor.
This specification covers the manufacture, supply, testing and delivery of RCC pipes. The
design and manufacture of RCC pipes shall comply with the provision of IS: 458 (2003)
or as amended. If any modification is made in the design calculation warranting change
as per BIS, the same shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own cost.
The materials (i.e. cement, sand, aggregate, water, admixtures, steel reinforcement, etc.)
used in the manufacture of the pipes shall comply with the requirements as mentioned in
IS: 458 (2003).
Pipes and fittings unless otherwise ordered by Engineer, shall have flexible spigot and
socket joints. Joints shall be so designed that pipes and fittings can be laid and jointed to
form a continuous water tight conduit with a smooth and uniform bore. Pipes with spigot
and socket joints shall remain water tight when the deflection angle is equal to the
maximum guaranteed joint deflection angle at each joint, and it shall not be more than (½)
half degree. Unless otherwise specified, the gap between the ends of the pipes and fittings
with spigot and socket joints when laid and jointed shall not be more than 6m.
Pipes and fittings with spigot and socket joints shall be jointed and sealed using rubber
jointing rings of circular section. Rubber jointing rings shall be moulded into continuous
rings having sufficient cross sectional area and circumferential length to provide a water
tight seal under the specified conditions of usage and shall conform to Type 2 of IS: 5382
(1985). The drawings are only indicative. The site conditions will only be the governing
factor for manufacture, laying and payment.
a). The contractor may use any established method of manufacture (i.e. centrifugally
spun or vibrated casting). Pipes less than 600 mm diameter shall be manufactured
with a minimum length of 2 to 2.5 m and pipes 600 mm diameter and above shall be
manufactured with a minimum length of 2.5 m.
b). The manufacture of concrete pipes shall be supervised by a person who is having
experience in the various phases of work applicable to the particular processes being
used.
c). Pipes and fittings shall be circular in cross section unless otherwise ordered or
approved, and the inner and outer surfaces of the barrel shall be concentric. Spigot
Page 77 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
and socket ring seats shall be concentric with the pipe bore.
d). Moulds shall have sufficient strength to withstand safely all of the forces to which
they will be subjected to during placing, compaction and setting of the concrete,
during subsequent handling before stripping and during stripping. When assembled,
the moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to ensure that the pipes will be cast to the
specified dimension, and the joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage of
mortar, if necessary the joints shall be sealed with suitable gaskets. The moulds shall
be constructed in a manner which will permit stripping without damage to the
concrete.
e). All surfaces against which concrete is to be placed shall be smooth and true. Before
each use, the moulds shall be cleaned properly and all steel surfaces which will come
in contract with the concrete shall be oiled.
f). Reinforcement used in RCC pipe manufacturing shall be as per Clause 6.2 of IS: 458
(2003).
g). Tolerances shall be permissible as per Clause 8.2 of IS: 458 (2003). Negative
tolerances shall not be permitted. If pipe fittings or special fittings are manufactured
of concrete, the permissible variation from the required angle shall be as specified for
steel fittings. Notwithstanding these tolerances, any dimensional variation or surface
irregularity which prevents proper entry of the spigot into the socket, or which
permits leakage past the rubber jointing ring shall be a cause for rejection.
h). Tests, sampling and Inspection shall be as per Clause 10 and 11 of IS: 458 (2003).
The pipes shall be subjected to hydrostatic tests, three-edge bearing tests and
permeability test as per the directions of Engineer. Tests shall be got done in an
approved laboratory at the cost of the Contactor. All expenses on the tests shall be
borne by the Contractor. Nothing extra shall be paid to the contactor for carrying out
the tests. All samples or tests shall be taken in the presence of the Engineer or his
representative.
10.3.2 Stone Ware Pipes
Stone ware pipe shall conform to IS: 651 (1992). Laying of stone ware pipes shall comply
with the requirements as per IS 4127 (1983).
10.3.3 Ductile Iron Pipes
The following codes shall be applied in case of Ductile Iron pipe use and installation.
IS: 8329 (2000) - Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes for Water, Gas and
Sewage – Specifications.
IS: 9523 (2000) - Ductile Iron Fittings for Pressure Pipes for Water, Gas and Sewage –
Specifications.
IS: 11906 (1986) - Recommendations for cement mortar lining for cast iron mild steel and
ductile-iron pipes and fittings for transportation of water.
IS: 12288 (1987) - Code of Practice for Use and Laying of Ductile Iron Pipes.
The DI pipes and fittings shall have external coating of metallic zinc spray with a finishing
layer of red / brown bitumen paint on the body and red / brown epoxy paint on the end
Page 78 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
surface of spigot and inside the socket. Where the external coating of the pipes is damaged,
the Contractor shall prepare the surface and paint the damaged area with a minimum of three
coats of red / brown bituminous paint and to the full thickness of original coating. DI pipes
shall have centrifugally applied internal cement mortar lining with high alumina cement.
Spigot and Socket joints shall be flexible and of an approved `Push on'type unless otherwise
specified. Laying of ductile iron pipes shall meet the requirements as per IS: 12288 (1987).
Specifications for Rubber sealing rings shall be as per IS: 5382 (1985).
(i) For the purpose of clearness and legibility, the drawings are essentially diagrammatic,
and although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale wherever possible, the
Contractor shall make use of all the Contract Documents and shall verify this
information prior to and during construction.
(ii) Scale and figured dimensions are for estimating purposes only. Before proceeding with
the work, the Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the fitting of his materials
and equipment to other parts of the equipment and structure.
(iii) Where apparatus and equipment have been indicated on drawings, dimensions have
been taken from typical equipment of the class indicated. The Contractor shall check the
drawings to see that the equipment he contemplates installing will fit the spaces
provided and allow ample room for maintenance and / or repair.
(iv) All work shall be installed in conformity with accepted standard practice and
manufacturer'
s recommendations.
(v) Changes in location of all piping, apparatus and equipment as indicated on the drawings,
shall be made to meet the architectural and structural conditions as required and as
approved by the Engineer. Any change in work which has not been installed shall be
made by the Contractor without additional compensation except changes which are
caused by architectural and structural changes which increase the number of fixtures and
lengths of pipe runs.
(vi) All apparatus and equipment shall be installed in a manner and in locations avoiding all
obstructions, preserving headroom and keeping openings and passage-ways clear.
Changes shall be made in locations of equipment and materials which may be necessary
in order to accomplish this. The drawings are essentially diagrammatic to the extent that
many offsets, bends, traps, special fittings and exact locations are not indicated.
Contractor shall carefully study the drawings and premises in order to determine the
best methods, exact locations, route, obstructions, etc, and shall install all apparatus and
equipment in the available locations.
(vii) The Contractor shall repair or replace without charge, all materials and equipment
which fails to perform in a normal, proper or specified manner for a period of one year
after final acceptance of the work and shall repair or replace all such material and
equipment to the satisfaction of Engineer.
The Engineer reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to keep the
equipment in operating condition at the expense of the contractor without voiding the
Contractor's guarantee, nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities during the
guarantee period.
Page 79 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
(viii) Substitution
1. The Contractor shall submit adequate information and engineering data for
complete evaluation of any proposals for substitution of product. He shall
specifically call to the attention of the Engineer by letter or by note, (underscored
in red) all deviations from plans and specifications or specified equipment. Failure
to comply with this clause of the specification shall void the approval for any given
item.
2. Where approval of substituted material or equipment is obtained but without

detailed installation procedure, the following shall apply:
(a) The Engineer may dictate installation criteria while the job is in progress.
(b) In the absence of other instruction, the Contractor shall follow the
recommendations of the manufacturer, except that in no case shall he deviate from
the minimum requirements of all applicable codes.
(c) All work must be equal to the standard set forth in the specifications.
10. 5 Laying of Pipes - General
Pipes shall be laid from downstream end to upstream end.
Pipes and fittings shall be examined for damage and carefully brushed out immediately
before laying.
The formation of excavations for pipelines shall be firm, dry, even, true to grade, free of
stones and other protrusions and compacted to a minimum of 90% density before placing of
pipe bedding.
Each pipe shall be laid accurately to line gradient so that except where otherwise specified or
ordered by the Engineer the finished pipeline shall be in a straight line both in horizontal and
vertical planes. The maximum length of pipeline permitted in any individual line shall be
limited to the section between two adjacent manholes or chambers as specified by the
Engineer.
Where instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for an approved independent
laboratory to carry out tests to determine the insitu density of the pipe bedding material.
Cut-off walls or barriers shall be formed in granular bedding and/or surround to pipes to
prevent the bedding acting as a sub-soil drain. The barriers shall be provided at suitable
locations along the length of a pipeline and at manholes or chambers.
The Contractor shall provide, fix and maintain at such points as may be directed by the
Engineer properly painted sight rails and boning rods of predetermined measurement for the
boning in, of individual pipes to correct alignment. The sight rails shall be situated vertically
above the line of pipes or immediately adjacent thereto and there shall at no time be less than
three sight rails in position on each length of pipeline under construction to any one gradient.
Consideration will be given by the Engineer to any alternative method for controlling
alignment such as laser beam instrument.
Where pipelines are to be constructed in the tunnel heading or duct provided by the
Contractor the minimum clearance between the inside face of the tunnel heading or duct and
the pipe shall be 150 mm unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Page 80 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
The Contractor shall adopt a suitable method of controlling the alignment of pipeline
installed in a tunnel heading or duct to the approval of the Engineer.
Where the cover is less than specified the pipe shall be encased in concrete as shown in the
drawings. When the excavation has been completed to the necessary level, the pipe shall be
laid in the trench true to line and grade and held firmly in position. Muroom / concrete shall
be carefully placed in the trench and thoroughly worked under the pipe to provide solid
uniform bedding. For SGSW pipes, as soon as joint has been completed, the balance of the
concrete shall be placed and worked into place on both sides of the pipe simultaneously and
then over the pipe to the height shown in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
10.6 Laying of Pipes
10.6.1 Laying of Stoneware Pipe
A. Sight Rails and Boning Rods
The Works will be set out by the Engineer who will give proper lines, positions, level, depths
and particulars on the ground, the Contractor providing poles, rails, boning rods straight
edges, struts, pegs, etc, and all labour for fixing the same. The Contractor must check and
satisfy himself of the accuracy of such setting out and shall be responsible for the same and
for the finished accuracy of the work in accordance with the contract. The Contractor shall
take every care that the pegs, or pillars for levels or lines are carefully preserved, from
disturbances. Should he neglect this precaution the cost of re-setting shall be borne by him.
The Contractor shall be required to fix over the centre of each manhole or where a change in
direction or gradient occurs a strong timber sight rail, 150 mm x 25 mm with top edge planed
straight and true. These shall be supported and fixed to stout wooden posts at each side of the
excavation. The centre line of the sewer shall be marked on each sight rail both back and
front by a single vertical line drawn thereon and on other side white. All lengths of sewer
shall have three sight rails fixed one at each end and one in the middle and worked one with
the other. The boning rods shall have a movable cross head at right angles to the rod, so
arranged that it can slide up and down the rod and capable of being fixed at any required
position on the rod by screws. The foot of the boning rod shall be provided with a shoe made
truly at right angles to the rod so that when placed on the pipe being laid it shall rest properly
on the crown of pipe when the rod is truly vertical.
B. Laying Stoneware Pipes on Soil
Before laying the pipes, the Contractor shall carefully brush them to remove any soil, stones
or other materials which may be therein, even and regular bed having been prepared, and
joint pit excavated to form a recess under the socket of each pipe of no greater width and
depth than to enable the pipe joining to be properly done, each pipe shall then be carefully
lowered and placed singly in the trench and shall rest on the solid ground for a distance of
not less than two thirds of its entire length.
Each pipe shall be brought into a true line from manhole to manhole. For this purpose, a
strong twine line (rat thread) sufficiently long to reach the full length between manholes shall
be used. Each shall be set correctly to level, by means of the boning rod and sight rails.
The spigot of each pipe shall be carefully wrapped with a ring of spun yarn dipped in cement
grout or tarred gasket sufficient thick to properly fit the socket of the adjoining pipe and to
Page 81 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
allow true alignment. The pipe shall then be driven fully home into the socket of the adjacent
previously laid pipe and yarn to tarred gasket carefully driven home with a caulking tool.
The remaining space in the socket shall than be tightly and completely filled with cement
mortar composed of 1:1½ cement sand mortar (1 part of portland cement and 1½ parts
sand) and shall be neatly beveled off all-round the circumference and finished at an angle of
45 degrees outside the socket of the pipes. A wooden caulking tool shall be used for forcing
the mortar into the sockets.
A tightly fitting bag of shavings or straw having a rope attached shall be drawn through the
pipes as the work proposed to ensure that there is no cement or yarn or other obstruction
projecting into the interior.
All joints shall be kept moist either by means of wet bags, wet clay or wet earth, as directed
by the Engineer to protect them from the sun. Such covering shall be removed when the
length is tested for water tightness.
C. Laying Stoneware Pipes on Concrete
In trenches where ordinary socket and spigot stone ware pipes are to be laid on concrete, the
method to be adopted is as follows:
When the earth is taken out to the proper depth and gradient, a concrete bed of suitable
thickness and width is to be laid as directed by the Engineer. The top of this concrete bed
shall also be to the required gradient.
When the concrete has set sufficiently, a series of special concrete invert blocks are to be laid
about 60 cm apart and levelled so that their top surface may be exactly the level of the sewer
invert less that thickness of the pipes. The correctness of level of the pipes is to be
ascertained by working a straight edge from the invert of each pipe to block ahead. The pipe
must also be checked at intervals for the proper line and level and the first pipe of any length
must be very carefully bedded and levelled into position.
The object to be obtained by the method above described is to ensure that the outside of the
sockets shall be raised approximately 25mm above the concrete bed in order to allow the
joints to be made properly in the under side.
In his prices for laying concrete, the Contractor must allow for doing the work in the manner
as above described including cost of blocks.
10.6.2 Laying of Concrete Pipes
a. Reasonable care should be exercised in loading, transporting and unloading of concrete

pipes. Gradual unloading of pipes by inclined plane or by chain pulley block is
recommended.
b. Broken or defective pipes or connections shall not be used. After laying of any pipe or
fitting is found faulty, the Contractor shall have to replace the same to the satisfaction of
Engineer.
c. If the sides of the trench are not vertical, the toes of the side slopes shall end at the level
of top of the pipe, and practically vertical trench shall be dug from there down to the
sub-grade / level.
Page 82 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
d. Pipes shall be laid true to line and grade, as specified and the lowering shall be done by
a tripod and chain pulley block.
e. Laying of pipes shall always proceed upgrade of a slope. If the pipes have spigot and
socket joints, the socket ends shall face upstream.
f. In places where the natural foundation is inadequate, the pipes shall be laid either in a
concrete cradle supported on proper foundations or on any other suitably designed
structure as per details given by the Engineer. If concrete cradle bedding is used, the
depth of concrete below the bottom of the pipe shall be at least one fourth of the internal
dia, of the pipe subject to a minimum of 15 cm and a maximum of 30 cm. The concrete
shall extend upto the sides of the pipe at least to a distance of one-fourth of the outside
diameter for pipes 300 mm and over in diameter. The pipe shall be laid in this concrete
bedding before the concrete has set. The exact details of cradle shall be as directed by
the Engineer.
g. When the pipe is laid in a trench in rock, shale or other hard material, the space below
the pipes shall be excavated and replaced with an equalizing bed of concrete, sand or
compacted murrum. In no place shall the pipe be laid directly on such hard material.
h. The bedding of murrum, sand or concrete shall be done to the required grade and the
alignment is to be checked by sight rails and boning rods as directed by the Engineer.
i. For bedding of pipes the method employed shall conform to IS: 783 (1985) and as
directed by the Engineer.
j. Trenches shall be kept free from water until the material in the joints has set.
k. Walking or working on the completed pipe shall not be permitted until the trench has
been backfilled to a height of atleast 30 cm over the pipe.
10.6.3 Laying of Ductile Iron Pipes
a. Reasonable care should be exercised in loading, transporting and unloading of DI pipes.

Gradual unloading of pipes by inclined plane or by chain pulley block is recommended.
b. Broken or defective pipes or connections shall not be used. After laying of any pipe or
fitting is found faulty, the Contractor shall have to replace the same to the satisfaction of
Engineer.
c. If the sides of the trench are not vertical, the toes of the side slopes shall end at the level
of top of the pipe, and practically vertical trench shall be dug from there down to the
sub-grade / level.
d. Pipes shall be laid true to line and grade, as specified and the lowering shall be done by
a tripod and chain pulley block.
e. Laying of pipes shall always proceed upgrade of a slope. If the pipes have spigot and
socket joints, the socket ends shall face upstream.
f. In places where the natural foundation is inadequate, the pipes shall be laid either in a
concrete cradle supported on proper foundations or on any other suitably designed
structure as per details given by the Engineer. If concrete cradle bedding is used, the
depth of concrete below the bottom of the pipe shall be at least one fourth of the internal
Page 83 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
dia, of the pipe subject to a minimum of 15 cm and a maximum of 30 cm. The concrete
shall extend upto the sides of the pipe at least to a distance of one-fourth of the outside
diameter for pipes 300 mm and over in diameter. The pipe shall be laid in this concrete
bedding before the concrete has set. The exact details of cradle shall be as directed by
the Engineer.
g. When the pipe is laid in a trench in rock, shale or other hard material, the space below
the pipes shall be excavated and replaced with an equalizing bed of concrete, sand or
compacted murrum. In no place shall the pipe be laid directly on such hard material.
h. The bedding of murrum, sand or concrete shall be done to the required grade and the
alignment is to be checked by sight rails and boning rods as directed by the Engineer.
i. For bedding of pipes the method employed shall conform to IS: 783 (1985) and as
directed by the Engineer.
j. Trenches shall be kept free from water until the material in the joints has set.
k. Walking or working on the completed pipe shall not be permitted until the trench has
been backfilled to a height of atleast 30 cm over the pipe.
10.7 Jointing Pipes
i. Ductile Iron and Concrete Pipes
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer joints on spigot and socket ductile iron and
concrete pipes shall be flexible and sealed with a rubber ring or flexible gasket which shall
be approved by the Engineer and shall withstand the various tests specified for pressure and
non-pressure pipelines.
The physical characteristics of the rubber ring shall be appropriate to the type of pipe and
joint supplied and in accordance with IS: 5382 (1985) and IS: 12820 (2004).
Rubber joint rings shall be stored until needed in a cool place free from direct sunlight.
Spigot and socket, flexible joints shall have the annular space between the pipe and socket
sealed with an approved joint sealant to prevent the ingress of loose material or concrete.
The annular space shall be sealed immediately on completion of a satisfactory initial

hydraulic test prior to concreting or backfilling but not prior to the test.
ii. Stoneware Pipes
Stoneware pipes shall be cement jointed. In each joint, first sufficiently thick spun yarn
soaked in neat cement slurry or tarred gasket shall be passed around the joint and inserted in
it by means of a caulking tool and well rammed to fit the socket of the adjoining pipe. Yarn
or gasket so rammed shall not occupy more than one fourth of the depth of the socket.
The mortar shall then be caulked into the joint with a caulking tool. More cement mortar
shall be added until the space of the joint has been completely filled with tightly caulked
mortar. The joint shall then be finished off neatly at an angle of 45o outside the socket of the
pipe. The cement mortar joints shall be cured at least for a period of seven days before
testing for water tightness.
10.8 Pipes through Structures
Page 84 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
Pipes and pipe specials through concrete walls and floors shall as far as possible be
positioned and built in during construction. They shall be located exactly in the positions
shown in the Drawings and shall be true to line and level. The Contractor shall take
particular care to ensure that fully compacted concrete is in contact with the pipe at all points.
Where it is impracticable to cast pipes and specials in the concrete, box holes shall be formed
in the shuttering. The box shall have six or eight sides, depending on the pipe diameter, and
shall be no larger in size that will give adequate clearance for the subsequent positioning and
grouting in of the pipe. The sides of the box hole shall be provided with a tapered central
annular recess to provide a positive key. The box hole shall be provided with a grout hole
and at the top of the central annular recess a vent hole. The box holes shall be stripped with
the main shuttering and the concrete surface thoroughly cleaned and roughened.
When the pipe is fixed later, the remaining hole shall be re-shutted and filled with non-
shrink grout.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings where pipes pass through a concrete wall or
structure, they shall be protected with a surround of concrete integral with the external
face(s) of the structure. For pipes of less than 500 mm diameter the surround shall extend
from the wall or structure by 300 mm and the width and depth of the surround beyond the
outside face of the pipe at otherwise indicated on the Drawings. For pipes of 500 mm
diameter or greater the surround shall extent from the wall or structure by 500 mm and the
width and depth of the surround beyond the outside face of the pipe at its horizontal and
vertical diameters shall be 500 mm or as otherwise indicated on the drawings.
On spigot and socket pipelines the socket end of the pipe passing through the wall shall be
flush with the outside face of the concrete surround. On all other flexible jointed pipes the
plain end of the pipe shall protrude from the concrete surround by a maximum of 300 mm or
that distance required to properly making the joint.
Any over excavation adjacent to a structure and beneath the formation level of pipe trench to
be constructed by the Contractor or to be constructed by others to make a connection to a
plugged or capped pipe laid by the Contractor shall be backfilled to the formation level of the
pipe trench with concrete class M-10. This concrete shall extend to the limit of the over
excavation along the line of the pipe trench and across the full width of the pipe trench or the
limit of the excavation whichever is least.
10.9 Thrust Blocks
At every bend and junction on pressure pipelines the Contractor shall construct a thrust block
of concrete Class M-15 to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
Engineer.
The additional excavation required to obtain a firm thrust face against undisturbed ground
shall be made after removal of the formwork. Concrete backfill to the excavation shall be
placed the same day as the additional excavation is carried out.
No pressure is to be applied to thrust blocks until the concrete has matured.
10.10 Pressure Pipelines
Pressure pipelines shall be divided into sections not exceeding 1000 m in length and each
section shall be separately tested.
Page 85 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
The test pressure shall be such that the entire pipe line or section being tested is subjected to
1.5 times the working pressure, or surge pressure or pump closed valve pressure, whichever
is the greater. The working pressure will be calculated from the total dynamic head of the
pumps less the static head in the pump station, as specified in the Tender Documents.
Each pipeline or section thereof shall be filled with water and all air removed. The pressure
in the pipeline shall be raised steadily until the site test pressure is reached in the lowest part
of the section. This pressure should be maintained, by pumping if necessary, for a period of
not less than 1 hour. The pump should then be disconnected and no further water permitted
to enter the pipeline for a period of 1 hour. At the end of this period the reduced pressure in
the pipeline should be measured, the original test pressure restored by pumping and the loss
measured by drawing off water from the pipeline until the pressure has fallen to match
reduced pressure previously noted. The loss shall not exceed 0.02 litre per mm diameter per
kilometer per 24 hours for each bar of head applied. If the pipe line fails to pass the test, the
faults shall be located and repaired and the pipe line retested until it passes the pressure test.
All exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be visually inspected during the tests.
It shall be a condition precedent to the issue of a Certificate of Completion that all valves in
the pipeline shall have been satisfactory operated under working pressure and that the
pipelines shall have been successfully pressure tested and finally cleaned out as specified
hereinafter.
Before pressure testing is started the Contractor shall re-check pipes and valves for
cleanliness and shall re-check the operation of all valves. The "open" ends of the pipeline (or
sections thereof) shall normally be stopped off by blank flanges or cap ends additionally
secured where necessary by temporary struts and wedges. All anchor and thrust blocks shall
have been completed and all pipe straps and other devices intended to prevent the movement
of pipes shall have been securely fastened.
10.11 Manholes and Chambers
All manholes in the sewerage system are of Prefabricated RCC material. Manholes shall be
manufactured in accordance with the Drawings in the positions indicated thereon or
wherever else instructed by the Engineer and such manholes and chambers shall be
watertight.
The prefab RCC manhole shall have four components, (i) precast monolithic base section,
(ii) modular riser section, (iii) top cone section and (iv) adjusting rings.
(i). Manholes prefabricated from reinforced concrete shall be manufactured at work sites
in accordance with the specifications and drawings.
(ii). Manhole diameters shall range from 0.91 m to 1.80 m at the base.
(iii). Concrete used in the construction of the manholes shall be of grade M-30 using
sulphate resistant cement.
(iv). The wall thickness shall be a minimum of 150 mm or as per design.
(v). Manhole units shall consist of standard modular pre-cast riser sections, modular cone
sections, and a monolithic base.
(vi). Manhole modules shall be provided coatings on the interior of the manhole such as
coal-tar epoxy to negate the effect of H2S concentration.
10.11.1 Placement of Manhole Sections
Page 86 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
Pre-cast manhole sections shall be placed and aligned to provide vertical sides. The
completed manhole shall be rigid, true to dimensions, and watertight. The joints between
manhole sections shall be properly sealed utilizing an approved rubber gasket and butyl
rubber rope.
10.11.2 Placement of Adjusting Rings
Where one solid riser or barrel section cannot be used, final adjustments in elevation of the
casting frame and cover shall be accomplished by the use of pre-cast concrete adjusting rings
of a minimum thickness of 100 mm. The total number of adjusting rings shall be varying in
depth from 100 mm to 300 mm. The use of brick or block in lieu of adjustment rings is not
allowed. Maximum number of rings used in adjustment of any single manhole shall not be
more than 3.
10.11.3 Connections to Manholes
Sanitary sewer connections to existing manholes shall be core-drilled and made using a
flexible rubber connector. Saw cutting and hammer taps are prohibited. All connections
shall provide for a watertight seal between the pipe and the manhole. The connector shall
be the sole element relied upon to assure a flexible water tight seal of the pipe to the
manhole.
The “O” ring joint shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C443, Standard
Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber
Gaskets or latest revision. The gasket joint shall conform to ASTM C990, Standard
Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using
Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants (or AASHTO M-199) or latest revision. Rubber boot
and stainless steel clamps, meeting the requirements of ASTM C923, (Standard
Specification for Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures,
Pipes and Laterals) shall be supplied with the manhole bases to tie the pipe to the base
section of the manhole.
Details of pipelines entering and leaving manholes and chambers shall be for pipes through
structure as per Specifications. The Contractor is reminded that all construction joints must
be perfectly watertight.
10.11.4 SFRC Manhole Covers and Frames
SFRC manhole covers and frames shall conform to IS: 12592 (2002) with edge protection in
terms of the material manufacture, tests and marking as per the latest amendment of the
standard.
Only sound manhole covers and frames are to be stacked at section stores as directed.
Broken/Cracked/deformed, rejected pieces shall not be stored in work yard. The SFRC
manhole covers and frames should bear ISI mark. Tolerance limit for dimensions and
weights shall be as per IS: 12592 (2002).
10.11.5 MS Foot Steps
MS foot Steps encapsulated with PVC shall be provided as per the instructions of the
Engineer.
MS foot Steps shall be encapsulated with protective PVC coating (orange colour). The MS
foot Steps shall be embedded in the wall while casting the elements of manhole.
Page 87 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
10.11.6 Channel and Benching
These shall be semi-circular in bottom half and of diameter equal to sewer. Above the
horizontal diameter, sides shall be extended vertically 50 mm above the crown of sewer pipe
and the top edge shall suitably rounded off. The branch channels shall also be similarly
constructed with respect to the benching but at their junction with main channel, an
appropriate, fall, if required suitably rounded off in direction of flow in the main channel
shall be given. The channels and benching shall be done in concrete M15 and rendered
surface shall have a hard impervious finish obtained by using a steel trowel.
10.11.7 Chambers
Chambers shall be built in brickwork as per the type design. Chambers shall be rectangular
in size with (i) 90 x 80 cm and depth from 45 to 60 cm and (ii) 90 x 120 x 90 cm deep.
Chambers shall be excavated true to dimension and levels. Chambers shall be built on a bed
concrete of 1:4:8 of thickness required to carry safely the weight of the wall, cover, wheel
loads and impact of traffic. Bricks for chambers shall conform to the requirements of IS:
4885 (1988).
Brick work shall be laid with specified mortar to be prepared in accordance with IS: 2250
(1981). It shall be of cement and sharp coarse sand and shall be made in small quantities so
as to be used up within 30 minutes. The cement and sand in the required proportion and
specification as laid down for concrete work shall be first mixed dry thoroughly on an
impervious platform and then water added and mixed to a sufficiently thick consistency as
required by the Engineer. No left over mortar shall be used as mentioned in scope of work
and drawings.
Bricks shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water before use for atleast six hours and until air
bubbles cease to come out. The soaked bricks shall be kept on wooden plank on brick
platform to avoid earth being smeared on them.
Brickwork shall be uniformly bedded, bricks being laid from upwards in English bond. Each
brick shall be floated and rubbed in upon such sufficient quantity of mortar that the mortar
squeezes up into the joints, but if such joints are not filled with mortar by this process they
shall be flushed up with the mortar from providing mortar before the next layer is put up.
The courses shall be laid truly and strictly to line and horizontal level. The joints shall be
close and regular and shall not exceed 12 mm thickness.
Brick work shall be done in English bond. Damaged bricks shall not be used. The greatest
care shall be taken to prevent mortar dropping on to or in any other way disfiguring or
discoloring the bricks, and all edges and sides shall be kept strictly plumb and square, in-line
and flush with the required finished face. As the work proceeds it shall be continuously
checked with a 2 m long straight edge and spirit level.
All workmanship shall be strictly in accordance with the foregoing. The Engineer or his
representative reserves the right to reject any of the work on grounds of shabby
workmanship. Such rejected work shall be removed and rebuilt to the Engineer' s
satisfaction.
The walls of chambers shall be plastered to 12 mm thickness on inside with cement mortar
1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) and finished smooth with a coat of neat cement.
Note: Proper construction should be ensured to prevent moisture penetration. All chambers
shall be constructed so as to be water tight under test.
Page 88 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
10.11.8 Frames and Covers for Chambers
The concrete frame on top of chamber shall be firmly embedded on brick work and true to
level in RCC of 1:4:8 mix. After completion of works chamber covers shall be sealed by
means of thick grease.
SFRC covers and frames shall conform to IS: 12592 (2002) with edge protection in terms of
the material manufacture, tests and marking as per the latest amendment of the standard.
Only sound covers and frames are to be stacked at section stores as directed.
Broken/Cracked/deformed, rejected pieces shall not be stored in work yard. The SFRC
chamber covers and frames should bear ISI mark. Tolerance limit for dimensions and
weights shall be as per IS: 12592 (2002).
10.11.9 Drop Manholes
Where an incoming branch into a manhole comes at least 600 mm above the water surface of
the main pipe in the manhole, drop manholes shall be provided as shown in the drawings or
as instructed by the Engineer.
10.12 Testing
a. Alignment and Grade
Uniformity of grade and alignment shall be tested by the Contractor when the backfill has
reach 300 mm above the pipe. Except for pipes laid at curves, the test shall consist of
flashing light through the pipe between manholes. If the alignment is true and no pipes are
misplaced backfilling shall be continued. Such test shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense and any defects of materials and workmanship shall be rectified by the Contractor at
his expense.
b. Hydraulics Test
All pipelines between consecutive manholes and the manholes shall be subjected to a
leakage test under 1.5 times the working pressure rating of the pipe in the case of a force
main and 2.5m hydrostatic head or water column head up to top of the manhole chamber on
downstream side of the test stretch for gravity lines, whichever is lower. Contractor shall
provide all calibrated equipment for measurement of leakage, all bulkheads, pumps and other
equipment and all power and labour necessary for the performance of the tests to the
Allowable leakage in the case of gravity lines tested at 2.5 m hydrostatic pressure for 10
minutes shall not exceed 0.2 lit per mm diameter of pipe per kilometer length per day.
Allowable leakage in the case of force mains shall be computed from the following formula:
q1 = N*D*P / 115
Where,
q1 = Allowable leakage in lpcd
N = Number of joints in the length of the pipe line.
D = Diameter in mm.
P = Average test pressure in kg/cm2
*****
Page 89 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 11
BRICK MASONRY
Table of Contents
Clause Description
11.1 Brick Masonry
11.2 Brick Work
11.3 Quantity of Mortar
Page 90 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 11 : BRICK MASONRY
11.1 Brick Masonry
a. Brick Manufacture
Common burnt clay building bricks shall conform to the requirements of IS: 1077 (1992)
and shall be of quality not less than class 50 with moisture absorption rate not exceeding 15
percent as defined in IS: 1077(1992). The bricks shall be chamber burnt and shall not be
damaged in any manner and sizes shall conform to the works sizes specified with tolerates as
given in Clause 6.2 of IS: 1077 (1992).
b. Brick Samples
The Contractor shall deliver samples of each type of brick to the Engineer, and no orders
shall be placed without the written approval of the Engineer. All the bricks used in the works
shall be of the same standard as the approved samples. The samples shall be preserved on
site, and subsequent deliveries shall be checked for uniformity of shape, colour and texture
against the samples. If in the opinion of the Engineer any deliveries vary from the standard of
the samples, such bricks shall be rejected and removed from the site.
c. Uniformity
The bricks selected for exposed pointed brickwork walls shall be of uniform colour, deep
cherry red or copper colour and uniform texture. Only such bricks as are permitted by the
Engineer shall be used.
d. Testing
Samples of the bricks shall be tested in accordance with IS: 3495 – Part 1 to 4 (1992) by the
Contractor for compliance with the aforesaid, before any order is placed, and soon after
receipt of a consignment. Tests shall be carried out as and when required by the Engineer on
samples selected by the Engineer' s representative.
11.2 Brick Work
All exposed brickwork shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of IS: 2212
(1991).
a. Laying
Brickwork shall be uniformly bedded, bricks being laid from upwards in English bond. Each
brick shall be floated and rubbed in upon such sufficient quantity of mortar that the mortar
squeezes up into the joints, but if such joints are not filled with mortar by this process they
shall be flushed up with the mortar from providing mortar before the next layer is put up.
The courses shall be laid truly and strictly to line and horizontal level. The joints shall be
close and regular and shall not exceed 12 mm thickness.
b. Bond
Brickwork courses shall be alternatively laid in stretcher bond and header bond. Damaged
bricks shall not be used. The greatest care shall be taken to prevent mortar dropping on to or
in any other way disfiguring or discoloring the bricks, and all edges and sides shall be kept
Page 91 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
strictly plumb and square, in-line, and flush with the required finished face. As the work
proceeds, it shall be continuously checked with a 2 m long straight edge and spirit level.
c. Construction
Walls shall be carried up in a uniform manner and no one portion raised more than 1 m
above another at any one time, the open end being racked out. Over-hang work shall in no
case be permitted. Brickwork shall be cleaned down after each day's work and newly laid
brickwork shall be protected by suitable means.
d. Lintels
Where brickwork rests upon lintels or supporting ribs of concrete, the bricks shall be cut as
necessary and carefully bedded so that proper support to the outer leaf of brickwork is
obtained.
e. Pointing
At the time of laying, all joints of exposed brickwork shall normally be raked out neatly and
pointed to 15 mm depth.
f. Approval
All workmanship shall be strictly in accordance with the foregoing. The Engineer or the
Engineer'
s representative reserves the right to reject any of the work on grounds of shabby
workmanship. Such rejected work shall be removed and rebuilt to the Engineer' s satisfaction.
11.3 Quantity of Mortar
Quantity of mortar to be used in one cum of masonry shall vary from 0.30 cum for thin
masonry to 0.32 cum for massive masonry of conventional bricks (second class).
*****
Page 92 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-12
PAVING, FLOORING AND SKIRTING
Table of Contents
Clause Description
Providing and laying I.P.S. flooring 40 mm / 50 mm thick with 1:2:3 /
12.1
1:2:4 cement concrete
12.2 Providing and laying white glazed tiles
12.3 Fixing Tiles
12.4 Cleaning
12.5 Providing and fixing white glazed tiles for skirting plastering
12.6 Providing and laying marble mosaic tiles
Page 93 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 12 : PAVING, FLOORING AND SKIRTING
12.1 Providing and Laying I.P.S. flooring 40 mm / 50 mm thick with 1:2:3 / 1:2:4 Cement
Concrete
Cement Concrete: The cement concrete shall conform to specifications for concrete given
in Section-11: Concrete Works. The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be 12 mm.
The fine aggregate shall consist of properly graded particles.
The proportion mix shall be 1:1:2 (1 cement: 1 fine aggregate: 2 coarse aggregate, by
volume). The least amount of mixing water that will produce a workable mix and will allow
finishing shall be used. Generally a w/c ratio of 0.5 should suffice. For large works,
mechanical mixing may be resorted to at the direction of the Engineer.
Laying
1. The sub-grade for the concrete floor shall be a bedding of type as specified in the drawings
and approved by the Engineer. The sub-grade in all cases shall be formed to proper levels
and slopes, well compacted and cured. The top surface shall be kept slightly rough.
2. The surface of the sub-grade shall be cleaned of all loose materials and moistened
immediately before laying the concrete floor. The concrete flooring shall be laid in
alternate bays not exceeding 6 sqm each. The edges of each panel into which the floor is
divided should be supported by flat bars of steel or wood duly oiled. The bars should be
removed before filling in the adjoining panel. At least 48 hours shall elapse before the
concreting in the adjacent bays in commenced.
3. The concrete shall be laid immediately after mixing. While being placed, the concrete
shall be vigorously sliced and spaded with suitable tools to prevent formation of honey
comb pockets. The concrete shall be brought to the specified levels by means of a heavy
straight edge resting on the side forms and drawn ahead with a sawing motion in
combination with series of lifts and drops alternating with small lateral shifts.
Immediately after laying the concrete the face shall be inspected for high and low spots
and any needed correction made up by adding or removing the concrete. After striking
off the surface of the required grade it shall be compacted with wooden float. If so
directed by the Engineer, approved mineral colour pigment conforming to appendix `B'
of IS: 5491 (1969, reaffirmed 2006) shall be added to the cement mortar to give required
colour and shade to the flooring. When the cement mortar rendering is sufficiently stiff,
lines shall be marked on it with strings or any other device to give the appearance of tiles
30cm x 30 cm or as directed by the Engineer.
4. After the concrete in the bays has set, the joints of the panels shall be filled with cement
cream or with suitable bitumastic compound as shown on the drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
Vertical edge of the bays shall be neatly marked on the surface of the concrete with a pointed
trowel after filling the joints.
Finishing: When the rendering is somewhat stiff, neat cement may be sprinkled on sparingly
through a pepper pot on the surface and rubbed lightly to give smooth polished ordinary
cement coloured surface. If coloured flooring is required by the Engineer, the approved
Page 94 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
coloured cement or cement mixed with the required shade of approved pigment shall be
used. Surface shall be protected from direct sun when it is green.
Curing: Curing shall start on the next day after finishing and shall be continued for 14 days.
12. 2 Providing and Laying White Glazed Tiles of 148.5 mm x 148.5 mm size and 8 to 9.5
mm Thick
Material
Tiles: White - glazed tiles including specials shall be of the approved make and quality and
shall conform to IS 13360 – Part 1 to 13 (1993) in all respects. Samples of the tiles shall be
got approved by the Engineer and the material brought for use should conform to the
approved samples.
Mortar: As per specifications mentioned on relevant drawings.
White Cement: This shall be of approved quality and make.
Mortar Bedding: The amount of water added while preparing mortar shall be minimum
necessary to give sufficient plasticity for laying. Care shall be taken in the preparation of
mortar to ensure that there are no hard lumps. Before spreading the mortar bed, the base shall
be cleaned of all dirt, scum, and then well wetted without forming any pools of the water.
The mortar shall then be evenly and smoothly spread over the base by the use of screed
battens of proper level or slope. The thickness of bedding shall not be less than 12 mm and
more than 20 mm in any one place. The tiles shall be laid on the bedding mortar when it is
still plastic but has become sufficiently stiff to offer a fairly firm cushion for the tiles.
12.3 Fixing Tiles
The tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for at least two hours. The tiles which are
fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall be so arranged that the surface of the round edge
tiles shall correspond to the skirting. Neat cement grout of honey like consistency shall be
spread over the bedding mortar just to cover so much area as can be tiled within half-an-
hour. The edges of tiles shall be smeared with neat white cement slurry and fixed in this
grout; each tile being well pressed and gently tapped with a wooden mallet to achieve proper
levelling with the adjoining tiles. The joints between tiles shall not exceed 1.5 mm wide. The
joints shall be grouted with slurry of white cement. After fixing the tiles in even plane, the
flooring shall be covered with wet and dust and allowed to mature undisturbed for 14 days.
12.4 Cleaning
After the tiles have been laid in a room or the day' s fixing work is completed, the surplus
cement grout that may have come out of the joints shall be cleaned off before it sets. Once
the floor has set floor shall be covered with oil free dry saw-dust which shall be removed
only after completion of construction work and just before the floor is occupied.
12.5 Providing & Fixing White glazed tiles for Skirting Plastering
Cement plaster of 12 mm for brick walls and 20 mm for stone masonry walls shall be applied
to the part of the wall where dado or skirting is to be fixed. The plastering shall be as per
specifications of plastering. The proportion of mortar shall be as mentioned in the item.
Page 95 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
Fixing Tiles: Skirting work shall be done only after fixing tiles on the floor. The white
glazed tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours before use. Tiles shall be fixed when
the cushioning mortar is still plastic. The back of tiles shall be covered with a thin layer of
neat cement paste and tiles shall then be pressed in the mortar and gently tapped against the
wall with wooden mallet. The fixing shall be done from the bottom of wall upward. The tiles
shall be joined with white cement slurry. Any difference in the thickness of tiles shall be
evened out in cushioning mortar so that all tile faces are in vertical plane. Thickness of joints
shall not exceed 1.5 mm. While fixing tiles care shall be taken to break joints vertically.
After fixing the dado, skirting, etc, they shall be kept continuously wet for 12 days.
If doors, windows or other openings are located within the dado area, the sills, jambs, angels
etc. shall be provided with white glazed tiles and appropriate specials and such tiled area
shall be measured net along with the dado.
Cleaning: After the tiles have been fixed, the surplus cement grout that may have come out
of the joints shall be cleaned off before it sets. After the complete curing, the dado or skirting
work shall be washed thoroughly clean.
12.6 Providing and Laying Marble Mosaic Tiles
General: The item refers to provision of marble mosaic tiled flooring white based / grey
based as applicable. The specifications will be similar to those for plain coloured cement
tiled flooring except that terrazzo tiles shall be used with or without borders and / or patterns
with tiles of different colours and designs as show on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer instead of plain coloured cement tiles. Specifications for terrazzo tiles shall be as
under:
Marble Mosaic Tiles: These shall be terrazzo cement tiles of the colour and pattern as
approved by the Engineer with chips of the sizes of tiles mentioned in the wording of the
item and shall conform to IS: 1237 (1980). The sizes of tiles shall be one of the standard
sizes as approved by the Engineer, the thickness as specified in the Drawing. A few
specimen of the tiles to be used, approved by the Engineer, shall be deposited by the
Contractor in the office of the Engineer for reference.
*****
Page 96 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 13
CEMENT PLASTERING AND POINTING
Table of Contents
Clause Description
13.1 Plastering
13.2 Materials
13.3 Preparation
13.4 Scaffolding
13.5 Preparatory Work
13.6 Gauges
13.7 Plastering
13.8 Watering and Curing
13.9 Cement Plaster in Two Coats
13.10 Plaster in Single Coat
13.11 Cement Pointing
13.12 Materials
13.13 Construction Details
13.14 Watering
Page 97 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 13 : CEMENT PLASTERING AND POINTING
13.1 Plastering
Specifications here under shall cover plastering concrete, stone or brick masonry surfaces in
cement mortar of specified proportion and specified thickness including scaffolding, curing
etc. complete as directed.
13.2 Materials
The specifications covered under the Section-8: Concrete Works' shall be applicable.
13.3 Preparation
In hand mixed mortar, cement and sand in the special proportions shall be thoroughly mixed
dry on a clean impervious platform. Fresh and clean water as specified above shall be added
gradually and thoroughly mixed to form a stiff plastic mass of uniform colour so that, each
particle of sand shall be completely covered with a film of wet cement. The water cement
ratio may be as under or as directed by the Engineer.
Cement Sand Water-Cement Quantity of Water per 50

Ratio kg of cement (Liters)
1 1 0.25 12.5
1 1-1/2 0.28 19.0
1 2 0.30 15.0
1 2-1/2 0.35 17.5
1 3 0.40 20.0
1 4 0.53 26.5
1 5 0.60 30.0
1 6 0.70 35.0
1 8 0.90 45.0
Machine mixed mortar shall be prepared in an approved mixer. Water cement ratio shall be
as per hand mixed mortar. The mortar so prepared shall be within 30 minutes of adding
water should be used in the work. The mortar remaining unused after that period or mortar
which has partially hardened or is otherwise damaged shall not be remixed and shall be
discarded from the works.
13.4 Scaffolding
Scaffolding required for facility of construction shall be provided by the Contractor at his
expense. Scaffolding shall be erected with steel sections or pipes, ballies or bamboos of
adequate strength so as to be safe for all construction operations. The Contractor shall take
all measure to ensure the safety of the work and working people. The Contractor shall be
entirely responsible for any damage to property or injury to persons resulting from ill erected
scaffolding, defective ladders and materials or otherwise arising out of his default in this
respect. Put log holes shall be made good by stones / bricks to match the face work when
Page 98 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
scaffolding is being removed after ensuring that all holes behind are solidly filled in with M-
10 cement concrete.
13.5 Preparatory Work
All joints in the face work that is to be plastered shall be raked out to a depth equal to not less
than the width of the joints. In case of new works the raking shall be done when the joint
mortar is still green. Smooth surfaces of concrete, old plaster, etc, must be suitably
roughened to provide necessary bond for the plaster. In case of stone masonry, brushing on
the walls to receive the plaster shall not be more than 12 mm. The surface to be plastered
shall be cleared and scrubbed with fresh water and kept wet for 6 hour prior to plastering.
13.6 Gauges
Patches of plaster 15 cm x 15 cm shall be put on about 3m apart as gauges to ensure even

plastering in one plane.
13.7 Plastering
In all plaster work the mortar shall be firmly applied with somewhat more than the required
thickens and well pressed into the joints and on the surface and rubbed and leveled with a flat
wooden rule to give required thickness. All corners must be finished to their true angles or
rounded as directed by the Engineer to give neat appearance.
The mortar shall adhere to the masonry surface intimately when set, and there should be no
hollow sound when struck. The plastering shall proceed from top downwards.
13.8 Watering and Curing
All plaster work shall be kept damp continuously for a period of 14 days. To prevent
excessive evaporation on the sunny or windward side of the building in hot dry weather,
matting or gunny bags may be hung over on the outside of the plaster in the beginning and
kept moist.
Should the Contractor fail to water the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the latter may
engage requisite labour, materials and equipment to water the work properly at the cost of
the Contractor. If the plastering work is not done as specified above, the plaster shall be
removed and redone at the Contractor' s expense.
13.9 Cement Plaster in Two Coats
The first coat for brick masonry and rubble masonry shall be of 10 mm and 20 mm thickness
respectively. In case more thickness is specified, the work shall be carried out in two coats
necessarily.
The first coat shall be applied as above, but the surface is not floated or polished but
roughened to give a key to the second coat of plaster. For this, before the first coat hardens, it
shall be combed in wavy lines, 12 mm apart and 3 mm deep. This coat shall be kept damp
for 2 days thereafter and then allowed to dry.
Before starting to apply the second coat, the surface of the first coat shall be damped evenly
and 2nd coat applied.
The final surface (either of the 1st or 2nd coat) shall be rubbed smooth after floating it with
thick coat of pure cement slurry while base coat is still fresh. If ‘neeru’ finish is specified,
Page 99 of 238
BID DOCUMENT
floating with neat cement will not be required. The finished surface shall be true and even
and present a uniform texture throughout and all joining marks shall be eliminated.
13.10 Plaster in Single Coat
After coat of plaster is done, the surface shall be rubbed smooth after floating it with thick
coat of cement slurry or the ‘neeru’ finish as the case may be. The finished surface shall be
true and even and present a uniform texture throughout and all jointing marks shall be
eliminated.
13.11 Cement Pointing
Specifications hereunder shall cover, cement pointing with mortar of specified proportion to
stone masonry or brick work including raking out joints, scaffolding, curing, watering, etc,
complete.
13.12 Materials
Cement mortar for pointing shall be of the specified mix.
13.13 Construction Details
Unless other type of pointing are specified in the item or the special provisions, pointing
shall be of the grooved type. The joints in the masonry shall be raked out to a depth not less
than the width of the joint when the mortar is green. The joints are to be brushed clean of
dust and loose particles with a stiff brush. The area shall be washed and the joints thoroughly
wetted before pointing is commenced. The raked out joints shall be filled with mortar of the
specified mix and required consistency and well pressed and rubbed smooth.
A semicircular depression 3 mm dia shall be made in the joint by pressing a clean string with
trowel keeping the string exactly horizontal and on the centre line of the joint.
The vertical joints shall be similarly marked. These depressed lines shall then be
immediately rubbed till they become uniformly 6 mm deep 6 mm wide and assume fairly
blackish colour.
Where joints are not horizontal and vertical as in the case of uncourse rubble masonry, the
pointing shall be made along the centre line of actual joints and the functions of pointing
made neatly.
The pointing mortar shall not spread over the adjoining stones. Mortar pointing shall be
restricted to the width of the joints, and all superfluous mortar shall be removed with a
trowel.
13.14 Watering
The pointed face shall be kept continuously wet for 14 days after initial set. Should the
mortar perish or deteriorate through neglect of watering or any other default and if the work
is not done neatly as specified above, the pointing shall be removed and redone, at the
expense of the Contractor.
*****
Page 100 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 14
WOOD WORK
Table of Contents
Clause Description
14.1 Woodwork
14.2 Precautions against Decaying
14.3 Workmanship
14.4 Framing
14.5 Scaffolding
14.6 Iron Work
14.7 Precautions against Fire
14.8 Inspection
14.9 Defective Work
14.10 Details of Items
Page 101 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-14 : WOOD WORK
14.1 Wood Work
Specifications hereunder shall cover woodwork in general including carpentry and jointing
work involved in roofs, floors staircases, door and window frames and shutters etc.
Material: Timber shall comply with the following specifications.
Quality: Timber to be used in building works shall be from the heart of sound tree of mature
growth, the sap wood being entirely removed. It shall be uniform in substance, straight in
fibre, free from large loose, dead or cluster knots, flaws, shakes, wrap, cup, spring, twist,
bends or defects of any kind. It should be free from spongy brittle, flaky, or brushy condition,
sap wood and borer holes.
All timber shall be seasoned and be free from decay, rot, harmful fungi and insects attacks
and from any other damage which will affect the strength, durability, appearance or its
usefulness for the purpose for which it is required.
Colour: The colour shall be uniform as far as possible.
Kinds: When the kind of wood is not specially mentioned, good Indian teak wood (Tectona
grandis) of the best quality shall be used.
Seasoning: Only properly seasoned timber shall be used.
Inspection: Timber for building work shall be approved by the Engineer. Any effort like
plugging, painting, using any adhesives or resinous materials to hide the defects shall render
the pieces rejectable by the Engineer. Cut off ends for protection can be done after inspection
with raw linseed oil or any other material approved by the Engineer. No timber work shall be
painted, tarred or oiled, without the previous permission of the Engineer.
Rejected Timber: Any timber rejected shall at once be removed from the site of works.
Nails, Screws, etc: Nails, screws, ties, straps, bolts, etc. shall be of the material, make and
pattern specified in the item and approved by the Engineer.
14.2 Precautions against Decaying
The Contractor shall in all cases obtain prior orders from the Engineer regarding time at
which he shall do painting or oiling to woodwork. Only after inspection by the Engineer and
his orders, the painting, oiling shall be undertaken. All parts of woodwork resting on or set in
masonry shall be well painted with two coats of hot boiled tar. Timber buried in the ground
shall be well coated with tar.
14. 3 Workmanship
All woodwork shall be neatly and truly finished to the exact dimensions required.
Unless otherwise specified all joints shall be simple tenon and mortise joints with the end of
the tenon exposed to view.
Page 102 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
All mortise, tenon and other joints shall fit truly and fully without wedging or filling. Only
where specially required, the ends of the tenon shall not show.
All framed joinery, for external work shall be put together with white lead and joints pinned
with hard wood or bamboo pins, for internal work where joints are not likely to be affected
by moisture, the joints may be glued and similarly pinned.
14.4 Framing
Framed woodwork includes all sawing, cutting, planing, jointing framing, supply and use of
all straps, bolts, holdfasts, nails, trenails, spikes, screws, etc. necessary for framing and
fixing. Framing and trussing are to be done in the best possible manner.
Holes of correct size shall be drilled before inserting screws. Driving in or starting the screws
with hammer is prohibited. All screws shall be dipped in oil before being inserted in the
wood. The kind of nails and screws shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
14.5 Scaffolding
The Contractor shall provide all labour, scaffolding ladders and tackle necessary for hoisting
and fixing woodwork in position and afford facilities for its inspection during construction.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the work, workmen and for any action
or compensation that may arise in this connection.
14.6 Iron Work
All iron work connected with woodwork which is going to be embedded in masonry shall
before erection, receive two coats of hot coal tar. If it is to be painted, it shall be given the
first two coats on the ground before being fixed in position and the third coat after erection in
position.
14.7 Precautions against Fire
During the progress of work all shavings, cutting and other rubbish shall be cleared away as
the work progresses and all precautions shall be taken against fire.
14.8 Inspection
All woodwork shall be inspected and passed by Engineer before being put into actual
position. In no case the woodwork shall be painted or otherwise treated before it is inspected
and approved by the Engineer. After approval it shall have the primary coat of paint put on
or otherwise treated before being fitted in position. The subsequent coats of paint or other
finish shall be applied after the woodwork is fixed in position.
14.9 Defective Work
If within three months after the work is completed any undue shrinkage or bad workmanship
is discovered the Contractor shall forthwith replace or refix the same to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, without extra charge.
Page 103 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
14.10 Details of Items
A. Frames for Doors and Windows

General: The door / window sizes shown in the drawings shall be the clear unrebated
opening of the frame. The frame members shall be of the sections as laid down in the
relevant drawings and specifications.
Holdfasts: Three holdfasts shall be fixed to each post of the door frame and two each post of
the window frame. The iron holdfasts shall be of the size 30 cm x 40 mm x 5 mm or of the
form as directed in for fixing screws. Each holdfast shall be fixed with two long screws.
Construction: The item shall be carried out in conformity with IS: 1003 - Part 1 & 2 (2003,
1994). When ventilator is included, it shall be provided by having full length one piece posts
for door or window and ventilator extending the frame on top of the head to the required
extent. Horns in heads and sills shall be 15 cm long. When no sills are provided, the vertical
posts of the frame in the ground floor shall be embedded in the sill masonry for 10 cm. On
upper floors the vertical posts shall be fixed in the floor slab or masonry by forming notches
1 cm deep.
B. Shutters
i. Paneling Fixture for Doors and Windows
General: The item shall be executed in conformity with IS: 1003 part 1 & 2 (2003, 1994).
The dimensions of the shutter components i.e. rails, styles etc, shall be as directed by the
Engineer. In absence of any specific drawing, the sizes as prescribed in standard
specifications under CG-PWD shall be adopted after consulting the Engineer.
Fixtures and Fastening: All fixtures and fastening shall be new, sound, strong and shall
be of brass, oxidized brass or chromium plate as mentioned in the item or of the material
as approved by the Engineer. The scale of fixtures and fastening shall be as directed by the
Engineer. They shall be of the best quality and workmanship. Samples of all fixtures and
fastening shall be approved by the Engineer. Any of the fixtures damaged during fixing
shall be removed and new ones fixed in their place and the surface of joinery made good
where affected at the Contractor' s expense. All bolts, hinges and other items of iron
mongery with moving parts shall be properly oiled before handing over.
Paneling: Wherever possible each panel shall be in a single piece. But where two pieces
have to be used and are permitted by the Engineer, both of them shall be of equal width.
The furnished thickness of panel shall be as specified.
ii. Glazing: The sizes of openings for glazing shall be as per detailed drawings or as directed
by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified the glass shall weight not less than 7.5
Kg/sqm. The styles and rails shall be rebated 10 mm wide on the inside to receive the
glass.
iii. Mild Steel Bars for Windows : When mild steel bars are included they shall be of 16
mm rounds unless other size and shape are specified. When vertical iron bars are provided
for ventilator also, the same window bars shall be taken through transom into the head of
the ventilator. The bars shall go 2.5 cm in the frame. 40 mm x 6 mm size MS flats as
directed by the Engineer shall be provided in case of window more than 75 cm in height.
iv. Flush Doors
Page 104 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
a. Solid Core shutter: It shall conform to the relevant specifications for the type and
grade given in IS: 2202 Part-2 (1983). The finished thickness of the shutter shall be made
as mentioned in the item.
b. Hollow Core shutter: It shall conform to the relevant specifications for the type and grade
given in IS: 2191 Part 2 (1983).
c. Wooden Plank Flooring: The finished thickness of the planked flooring shall be as
specified in the wording of the item. The minimum width of the plank shall not be less
than 20 cm. The length shall be as long as procurable. The corner edges of the planks
shall be rounded or molded as directed by the Engineer. The planks shall be joined by
tongue and groove joint and fixing shall be done by iron screws. The surface of planking
shall be finished smooth before applying oil paint. The oil paint shall be applied in
number of coats as specified and as per specifications of oil painting.
*****
Page 105 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 15
ROOF, DOORS AND WINDOWS, ROLLING SHUTTER
Table of Contents
Clause Description
15.1 General : Roof
15.2 Surface Treatment
15.3 Doors and Windows
15.4 MS Rolling Shutters
Page 106 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION - 15: ROOF, DOORS AND WINDOWS, ROLLING SHUTTER
15.1 General: Roof
Water proofing: Preparation of surface
The surface to be treated shall have minimum slope of 1 in 120. This grading shall be carried
out, with lime-concrete, cement-concrete, light-weight foam concrete or cement plaster with
coarse sand, as shown in drawing, to the average thickness required and finished smooth.
Trucking of the water proofing felt will be required where the parapet exceeds 450 mm in
height from the grade surface. For this a horizontal groove 75x75 mm section with its lower
edge at not less than 150 mm above the graded roof surface shall be left during construction
or cut neatly if it has not been provided during the construction of the parapet wall.
Where the height is 450 mm or less water proofing treatment shall be carried over the top of
parapet or dwarf wall to its full thickness and no horizontal grooving in parapet wall is
needed for trucking.
The graded surface of the roofs shall be thoroughly cleared with wire brush and all loose
scales, etc, removed. Any cracks in roof shall be cut to `V'section and filled up with cement
mortar slurry 1:4.
Priming Coat
Where so specified in the description of item or required by Engineer, a priming coat

consisting of a bituminous solution of suitable viscosity shall be applied on the roof and wall
surface at specified weight per unit area. (Minimum weight of each step shall be 4.5 kg/m2).
Water proofing treatment - Bitumen felt
The water proofing shall consist of a two or four layers self finished bitumen felt treatment as
given in the description of the item. A two layer self finished of the following courses:
Course Kg/m2 (min.) Coating material
- 0.50 Asphalt primer

1st 1.20 Asphalt bonding material
2nd - Self finished bitumen felt of type III Grade - I
3rd 1.20 Asphalt Bonding material
4th - Self finished bitumen felt of type III Grade-I
5th 0.006 m3/m2 Stone grit/pea gravel
The underlay where required to be provided shall not count against the number of layer is
specified.
Asphaltic bonding material
This shall consist of Air Blown Bitumen confirming to IS: 702 (1988).
Page 107 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Self-Finished bitumen felt
The self finished felt, shall be of the brand and manufacture conforming to the type and
grade as described in the item. They are fibre base or Hessian base felts. They shall conform
in all respects to IS: 1322 (1993).
Stone Grit and Pea Gravel
Stone grit shall conform to specifications of stone aggregate and shall be 6 mm down size.
Where pea-gravel is used it shall be hard, round and free from dust, dirt, etc. Stone grit or
pea-gravel shall be spread uniformly at the specified volume per unit area. This will not be
spread over vertical and sloping faces and at drain mouths. At these places the surface shall
be painted with two coats of bituminous solution.
15.2 Surface Treatment
White washing and snowcem decorative cement paint.
Preparation of Surface: Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt, mortar drops
and loose plaster. All holes shall be filled with gypsum and surfaces made even and smooth.
Scaffolding: Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be on double supports tied together

by horizontal pieces, over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No allies, bamboos or
planks shall rest on or touch surface which is being white washed.
Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bag shall be tied on their tips to avoid damage
or scratches to walls. For white washing the ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.
Preparation of Lime Wash: The wash shall be prepared from fresh and pure fat lime. It
shall be thoroughly slaked, mixed and stirred with sufficient water to attain a consistency of
thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand for a period of 24 hours and then shall be screened.
The approximate quantity of water to be added to pure fat lime for making the cream shall be
5 litres per kg of lime, clean gum at the rate of 0.5kg per 100kg of cream dissolved in hot
water and ultramarine blue of approved quality and quantity as directed by Engineer shall be
added and thoroughly mixed.
Application: The wash shall be applied with moon brushes. Three number of coats or as
specified shall be applied. The coats shall be given alternatively vertically and horizontally.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next one is applied. Further each coat shall be
inspected and approved by the Engineer before the subsequent coat is applied.
The finishing dry surface shall be of even shade, without any brush marks and shall not show
any sign of cracking or peeling nor shall it come off readily when rubbed.
Protection measures: Doors, windows, floor, etc, and such other parts of building shall be
protected from being splashed upon. Splashing and dropping, if any, shall be removed by the
Contractor at his own cost and the surface cleaned.
Colour washing preparation: The wash shall be prepared by adding required quantity of
colouring pigment to the lime wash as prepared for white wash. No ultramarine blue shall be
added in this case. Mineral colours not affected by lime only shall be added to white wash
prepared to the required tint or shade as has been approved by Engineer.
Application: The surface to be colour washed shall be first treated with a priming coat of
white wash. Minimum three coats of colour wash shall be applied and the colour shall be of
Page 108 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
even tint or shade over the whole surface. The finished dry surfaces shall not be powdery and
shall not come off on the hand when rubbed.
15.3 Doors and Windows
Steel doors, windows, ventilators and rolling shutter.
Providing and fixing steel door, windows and ventilators as per IS:1038 (1983) including all
fixtures and fastening and glazed with 4 mm thick plain sheet glass with three coats of
enamel paint over a red oxide primer. Providing and fixing in position approved quality 18
SWG steel rolling shutter push and pull operated of approved make inclusive of all
accessories top cover, locking arrangements including 2 coats of approved enamel paint over
a coat of red oxide primer.
General: All steel doors, windows and ventilators shall conform to IS: 1361 (1978) and
IS:1038 (1983) or equivalent as mentioned in specifications and on drawings and as
approved by the Engineer.
Material used in the fabrication of industrial doors, windows, ventilators, etc, shall be the
best procurable and conforming to relevant IS specifications. The forms of sections,
dimensions, and weight shall conform to relevant IS codes for industrial buildings. The
sections shall be cold straightened and finished goods shall be free from dents and other
defects.
The minimum thickness of glass, if required to be provided shall be 4 mm and 5.5 mm if

wired glasses required. It shall be free from flaws, specks, bubbles, etc. All panes shall have
perfectly squared corners and straight edges.
Wood screws, MS bolts, nuts, screws, washers, peg stays and other oxidized brass fittings
shall be treated for corrosion as recommended by relevant Indian Standards. Putty for
glazing shall conform to the requirements as specified by the Engineer.
Workmanship: Doors, windows, ventilators, etc, shall be truly square and flat, free from
twist and warp. They shall be constructed of sections which have been cut to the required
lengths, tennoned and riveted or welded at the corners. The general fabrication shall conform
to IS: 1038 (1983) and 1361 (1978).
The Contractor is required to supply doors, windows, ventilators, etc. He shall obtain them
from an approved manufacturer. The Contractor shall first submit for the approval of the
Engineer, the name and address of the manufacturer whose metal casement he intends to use,
together with typical drawings and specifications, describing the details of construction for
each type of door/window.
The doors, windows and ventilators shall be either galvanized/or painted as indicated in
drawing or schedule of rates. All steel surfaces shall first be thoroughly cleaned free of dust,
scale or dirt and mill scale by pickling or similar process and they shall be painted with one
coat of an approved primer conforming to IS:5666 (1970) before dispatch. Alternatively they
may be galvanized as described in IS:1361 (1978).
Glazing: All glazing shall be as per IS: 1081 (1960). Windows and ventilators shall be
designed for putty glazing fixed from outside. Where doors are to be glazed, they shall be
designed for glazing from inside. All window casements shall have holes drilled in the
frames and shutters respectively at suitable places for inserting spring type glazing clips
which shall be supplied by the contractor.
Page 109 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
All glazing shall be puttied to the shutters or frames with good quality putty in addition to
glazing clips. Glass panes shall not be placed directly against the metal. A thin layer of putty
shall be very evenly spread over the glazing rebate and the glass pressed firmly against it.
The necessary ornamental grill shall be provided in steel window as per the instruction of
Engineer.
Fixing: Doors, windows and ventilators shall not be built in at the time the walls are
constructed but shall be subsequently fixed into proper opening, as laid down in IS:1801
(1960). Holes to accommodate the fixing lugs are to be left or cut, and the casement fixed
after all the rough masonry and plaster work have been finished. The lugs of the casement
shall be jammed in cement concrete (M-15 mix) with stone chips (10 mm down) at holding
the casement in proper position, in line and level.
The width of the clear unfinished opening in the wall should be 25 mm more than the over
all width of the door frame to allow for 12.5 mm plaster on each jam. The height of the
unfinished opening shall depend upon whether a threshold is required or not. While fixing
the door, care shall be taken to see that at least 6 mm space is left between the door and the
finished floor.
Fittings: Hardware shall be fixed as late as possible, preferably just before the final coat of
paint is applied. It shall be fitted in workmanlike manner, so that it may not work loose and
in such a way that screws and pins are not marked and mutilation by hammers and screw
drivers. It shall be tested for correct operation. Where specified, door shall be fitted with a
three way bolting device which can be operated from outside similarly be operated from
either side or as per drawings. Solid steel bolt handles shall be provided, one on the outside
and one on the inside of each shutter. In case of doors provided with service door, the lock
shall be fitted on the service doors. All materials shall be the best procurable and shall
conform to the relevant IS specifications.
Normal Operations Steel Plate Doors: Steel doors may be of the hinged type or sliding,
folding type, single shutter or double shutter and of single walled or double walled
construction, as specified on the drawings or by the Engineer. All doors shall be provided
with the sturdy frame and hold fasts for fixing into the wall. Unless otherwise specified the
frame shall be prepared from solid steel angles of size not less than 65x65x6 mm welded at
the corners. The shutter shall be made from flat steel sheet of 2 mm thickness for normal size
double shutter doors with or without service doors with a frame of mild steel of mild steel
angles not less than 50x50x6 mm all round, suitably braced by means of mild steel flats.
The whole shutter shall be of welded construction and shall be hung at the sides by means of
three or four hinges as specified in drawings. In the case of double walled doors, the shutter
shall consist of two plates each 2.5 mm thick with a hollow slope of 33 mm in between to
give an overall thickness of 38 mm. Where specified, a threshold plate of mild steel flat
40x10 mm shall be provided for the full width of the opening. Suitable spaced mild steel lugs
shall be welded on the threshold plate for fixing into the floor.
Windows and Ventilators: `S'type steel louvers of sheet of thickness specified in

connection to steel frame shall be provided in window and ventilators as per relevant IS
codes and directions of Engineer.
All windows, frame and door shutters, etc, shall be painted with 2 coats of approved paint
over a priming coat of red oxide.
Page 110 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
15.4 MS Rolling Shutters
It shall be of approved make, made out of 18 gauges 75 mm black lath either mechanically
operated from both inside and outside, by reduction gear type mechanism or manually
operated according to sizes as per IS specification. It shall be fitted with two self aligning
ball bearing with locking arrangement (both inside and outside) including GI hosing, hooks,
door suspension shafts and top rolling springs pressed etc, complete. The hood and cowl
portions shall be fixed to obtain full head room up to tinted soffit. They shall be provided
with locking arrangements for padlocks, pulling hooks, handles, top cover, etc. It shall be
painted with two coats of approved paint over a coat of red oxide primer. Rolling shutter
shall be installed properly by skilled person and shall be adjusted to operate smoothly
throughout the full range of operation.
*****
Page 111 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 16
PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATING
Table of Contents
Clause Description
16.1 General
16.2 Materials
16.3 Workmanship
16.4 Oil Painting
16.5 Painting of New Wood Work
16.6 Providing and Applying White Wash
16.7 Providing Washable Distemper
16.8 Providing and Applying Washable Oil bound Distemper
16.9 Cement Painting in Two Coats
Page 112 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 16: PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATING
16.1 General
The work included in this Section consists of the furnishing of all labour, materials,
apparatus, scaffolding, and all appurtenant work in connection with the painting in
accordance with these Specifications.
Surfaces to be painted: In general, the following surface is to be painted.
i All exposed piping and other metal surfaces, interior and exterior.
ii. All submerged metal surfaces.
iii. All structural and miscellaneous steel including tanks.
iv. The interior of tanks and wet wells as specified in the painting schedule.
v. Exterior above ground concrete and brick stone masonry.
vi. The interior of structures as specified in the painting schedule.
vii. Equipment furnished with and without factory finished surfaces, except as specified.
viii. Doors, woodwork, and architectural trim work as specified.
Surfaces not to be painted:
The following surfaces in general shall not be painted.
a. Concrete surfaces subject to pedestrian traffic.
b. Plastic surfaces.
c. Non-ferrous metal unless otherwise noted or indicated (Galvanized metal shall not be
considered a non-ferrous metal).
d. Mechanical equipment with approved factory finished as specified herein.
e. Electrical equipment with approved factory finish as specified herein.
f. Piping which is specified as galvanized.
16.2 Materials
All paint materials to be first quality products manufactured for the exposures involved, as
approved by the Engineer. The materials used for (1) Prime Coat, (2) Intermediate Coat, and
(3) Finished Coat and method of applications shall be as described in the detailed
specifications.
Page 113 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
16.3 Workmanship
Protection of the Work: The Contractor shall take all the necessary steps to protect the
work of others during the time his work is in progress. The Contractor shall be responsible
for any and all damage to the work. Paint shall be applied only during the period of favorable
weather.
Preparation of Paint: All materials specified or selected for use under these specifications
shall be delivered unopened at the job site in their original containers and shall not be opened
until inspected by the Engineer. Paint containers shall be opened only when required for use.
Paint shall be thoroughly stirred or agitated to uniformly smooth consistency suitable for
proper application. In all cases, paint shall be prepared and handled in a manner to prevent
deterioration and inclusion of foreign matter. No paint shall be reduced or applied in any
way except as here in specifically called for or, if not specifically called for, then it shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommendations.
Preparation of Surfaces: The Contractor shall examine carefully all faces to be finished and
before beginning any of his work, he shall see that the work of the other trades has been left
or installed in a workmanlike condition to receive paint. Metals shall be clean, dry and free
from mill scale, rust, grease and oil.
Workmanship: Each coat of paint shall be applied at the proper consistency and brushed
evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, with no evidence of poor workmanship. Care shall be
exercised to avoid lapping paint on glass or hardware. Paint shall be sharply out of lines.
Finished paint surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes.
Protective Coverings: Protective covering or drop clothes shall be used to protect floors,
fixtures and equipment. Care shall be exercised to prevent paint from being spattered onto
surfaces which are not to be painted. Surfaces from which such paint can not be removed
satisfactory shall be painted or repainted, as required to produce a satisfactory finish.
Brushing: All paint shall be applied by brush unless otherwise specifically approved by
Engineer. The brush size and type shall be got approved.
Instructions: All coating shall be performed by personnel experienced in the application of

said coating systems and in accordance with the manufacture' s printed instructions. The final
appearance shall exhibit a uniformly textured and coloured coating free of excessive gloss or
dull spots, blemishes, sags, runs, pinhole and other defects.
Safety Measures: The Contractor shall take adequate safety measures while painting in
enclosed places or when painting is carried out by spray gun.
Right of Rejection: No exterior painting or interior finishing shall be done under conditions
which may jeopardize the appearance or quality of the painting of finishing in any way. The
Engineer shall have the right to reject all material or work that is unsatisfactory, and required
the replacement of either or both at the expense of the Contractor.
16.4 Oil Painting
Paints: The paint shall be of colour, shade and quality as approved by the Engineer. The
paint shall comply with the relevant IS depending on the type of paint (i.e. undercoating
finishing etc., purposes wise) and mode of application (i.e. by brush, by spraying etc) as
specified in the item. The paint shall show no curdling, caking, colour separation and shall be
in a smooth and homogeneous state. The paint shall not show runnings or sagging tendencies
Page 114 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
when applied to smooth steel surfaces. The brand (manufacturer) and shade of the paint shall
be approved by the Engineer before painting proceeds. Ready mixed paints shall only be
used.
Application: The primer coat of the paint shall be applied as soon as the surface has been
cleaned to avoid deterioration of the surface by rust, dirt and dust. The paint shall not be
applied when atmospheric conditions are misty or unsatisfactory in the opinion of the
Engineer. The surfaces not accessible to brushes shall be painted by sprayer or other
approved method. The paint shall be applied to produce uniform even coating over the entire
surface free from streaks and other irregularities. In case of iron and steel works, red lead
shall be used for primer coat unless other coat is specified.
Protection: Painted surfaces shall be protected from sun, rain, contamination and damage till
they fully dry.
16.5 Painting New Wood Work
The surface shall be finished smooth with plain and rubbed smooth with sand paper of coarse
grade followed by rubbing with medium grade sand paper. No scratches should be left.
Approved type of priming coat shall then be applied. The minor defects like small holes,
cracks open joints as already allowed by the Engineer shall be stopped with putty made from
pure whiting mixed to proper consistency with raw linseed oil. The work shall be lightly
rubbed down smooth before receiving subsequent coat. The coat shall be crossed (across
grains) and laid off (along grains) to give uniform coating. The subsequent coats as specified
shall be applied only after prior coat dries thoroughly and is lightly rubbed down. Unless
otherwise specified the inner surfaces and exposed surfaces shall be applied two or three
coats respectively exclusive of primer coat.
Scaffolding: Specifications given under section of plastering and painting shall apply.
16.6 Providing and Applying White Wash
General: The item refers to white washing over old and new concrete, stone masonry, brick
or plastered surface and asbestos cement sheets.
White Wash: White wash shall be prepared from fresh burnt white stone, lime or shell item.
The item shall be dissolved in a tub with sufficient quantity of water (about 4.50 lit/Kg of
lime) and the whole mass well and thoroughly mixed and stirred until it attains the
consistency of thin cream. The wash shall be taken out in small quantities and strained
through a clean coarse cloth.
16.7 Providing Washable Distemper
Distemper: Washable distemper of approved make colour and shade shall be used. It shall
conform to IS 427 (2005). Approved quality distemper shall only be used. The brand shall be
got approved from the Engineer, who shall if necessary, call for the sample and ask for
sample painting on the surface to be painted before approval.
Scaffolding: This may be double or single as per section of plastering and pointing.
Preparation of Surface: The surface to be distempered shall be cleaned and all cracks,
holes and surface detects shall be repaired with gypsum and allowed to set hard. All
irregularities shall be sand papered smooth and wiped clean. The surface so prepared must be
completely dry and free from dust before distempering is commenced. In the case of walls
Page 115 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
newly plastered, special care shall be taken to see that it is completely dry before any
treatment is attempted, for old surface which had been earlier distempered the surface shall
be cleaned of grease, dust etc. The flaking of previous coatings, if any shall be taken off. All
cracks, holes and surface defects shall be repaired with gypsum and allowed to set hard then
sand prepared smooth and wiped clean. But in case the surfaces are coloured or white
washed, the wash must be removed thoroughly first.
Priming Coat: The priming coat shall be applied over the completely dry surface in the
manner recommended by the makers in case of patented distempers. When no priming coat
is specified by the manufacturers, a finely powdered chalk mixed with a thin solution of glue
shall be applied to prepare a good, hard background, the coating when dry being rubbed as
clean and smooth as possible.
Application: The manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed regarding preparation of the

surface and application of priming and finishing coats. Distemper shall not be mixed in a
larger quantity than actually required for a day's work. Hot water should be used to prepare
the mixture. Alternatively ready-wear whiting complying with IS: 63 (2006) may also be
used. Clean gum dissolved in hot water shall then be added in proportion of 2 gm of gum to
one litre of lime or whiting to prevent the white wash coming off easily when rubbed.
Scaffolding: This may be double or single according to requirement and shall conform to
relevant specification given under the section on `Cement Plastering'
.
If ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags or cloth rags shall be tied on their tops to avoid
damage or scratches to the wall. Proper stage scaffolding shall be erected when white
washing the ceiling. The Contractor shall be responsible for accidents, if any take place.
Preparation of Surface: The surface shall be prepared by removing all mortar dropping and
foreign matter and thoroughly cleaned with wire or fiber brush or other means as may be
directed by the Engineer to produce an approved and clean and even surface. All loose pieces
and the scales shall be scrapped off and the holes stopped with mortar. After cleaning the
surface the unwanted nails shall be removed and all nail holes, cracks and crevices stopped
with mortar similar in composition to the surface to the white washed. The mortar should be
cured.
Application: On the surface so prepared, the white wash shall be laid. Each coat shall be laid
on with a brush. The first stroke of the brush shall be from the top downwards and another
from bottom upwards over the first stroke and similarly one stroke from right and another
from left over the first brush before it dries. This will form one coat. Each coat must be
allowed to dry and shall be subject to inspection before the next coat is applied. When dry,
the surface shall show no signs of cracking. It shall present a smooth and uniform finish free
from brush marks and it should not come off easily when rubbed with finger.
No portion in the surface be left out initially to be patched up later on. For new work, the
white washed surface shall present a smooth and uniform finish. For old work, patches and
repairs shall be white washed paint with the required number of coats.
Doors, windows, floors and other articles of furniture etc, shall be protected from being
splashed upon. Splashing and dropping, if any shall be removed and the surface cleaned.
The treated surface shall be allowed to dry and harden. The next coat of distemper shall be
laid on in exactly the same manner as the first one but only after the earlier laid coat has
thoroughly dried. The number of coats to be applied shall be as mentioned in the item. The
Page 116 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
brushes used should never be allowed to rest on the bristles and after the use they should be
cleaned. The number of coats as specified in the item shall be applied.
16.8 Providing and Applying Washable Oil bound Distemper
General: The specifications given under washable distemper shall apply except that
washable oil bound distemper of approved shade, colour and quality, conforming to IS: 428
(2000) shall be used after applying primer coat is recommended by markers of distemper.
16.9 Cement Painting in Two Coats
Cement paint, with a base of white Portland cement of approved make, colour and shade
shall be used. Approved quality cement paint shall only be used and shall be brought to site
in original airtight containers with seals intact.
Scaffolding: As per Specifications under `Plastering and Pointing'

.
Preparing the Surface: The surface to be painted shall be cleaned of all loose dust and dirt,
old paint and all cracks, holes and surface defects shall be repaired with cement plaster,
cured and allowed to set hard. Before painting is commenced, the surface is wetted well and
water is allowed to run off. Any grease, oil paint, shall be removed by approved methods.
Application of Paint: Mixing of paint and procedure of painting shall be as specified by

the manufacturer. When no Specifications are furnished, following specifications shall
generally apply.
The dry cement paint shall be thoroughly mixed with clean fresh water to produce paint of
required consistency (normally that of ordinary paints).
The paint shall be kept stirred and used within one hour of mixing Hardened or damaged
paint shall not be used.
The paint shall be applied by brushes in the manner specified by the manufacturer. The
number of coats shall be as mentioned in the wording of the item. When more than one coat
it to be provided, the subsequent coats shall be applied after the preceding coat has
thoroughly hardened, inspected and approved as per manufacturer' s specifications.
Curing: Each application of paint should be wetted at the end of the day with a fine water
spray. Depending on climatic conditions, wetting should be done only after an interval of at
least 6-8 hours after the application. In dry weather the painted surfaces shall be kept damp
for atleast two days and protected from direct sun.
*****
Page 117 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 17
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Table of Contents
Clause Description
17.1 Road Works
17.2 Sub - base
17.3 Road base
17.4 Surfacing
17.5 Site Drainage
17.6 Sanitary Arrangements
17.7 Precautions to be taken to protect the environment
Page 118 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-17 : MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
17.1 Road Works
Road works includes the construction of drainage for the site, the preparation of the sub-
grade and the construction of sub-bases, bases and surfacing for those roads (including hard-
standings) and parking areas which form part of the permanent works. Any other roads hard
standings or paths necessary for the construction of the works shall be deemed to have been
allowed for by the Contractor as part of the Temporary Works.
A. Definitions
1. Sub-Grade means the ground, embankment of existing road surface on which the road is
to be constructed.
2. Formation means the prepared sub-grade ready for the laying of the pavement.
3. Sub-base means the layer or layers of material laid on the formation.
4. Base means the layer of material laid on the sub-base
5. Surfacing means the layer or layers of material laid on the base.
6. Pavement means the sub-base, base and surfacing
Unless otherwise specified the road works shall be as per the requirements of the IRC
Specifications for Roads and Highway as specified in MoRTH, together with an addenda
thereto current at date of tender. All materials and finish shall be to the Engineer'
s approval.
Sub-Grade
After compaction of the sub-grade and before commencing any further construction the sub-
grade shall be proof rolled in the presence of the Engineer with smooth wheeled roller
having a weight not less the eight tonnes and an effective load of not less than 50 kg/100 mm
of its effective rolling width.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any part of the sub-grade surface moves during proof
rolling it shall be corrected as directed and proof rolled again. This procedure shall continue
until the Engineer is satisfied that there is no movement of the surface under proof rolling.
Where directed by the Engineer areas corrected as specified above shall be retested for
density.
17.2 Sub-Base
Material for the sub-base shall be to the standard specification and shall be approved by the
Engineer.
A. Construction
Material shall be laid in one or more layers, each not exceeding 150 mm thick, and the total
compacted thickness of sub-base shall nowhere be less than the specified nominal thickness
or such variation as required by the Engineer in writing.
Page 119 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
i. Incidental filling with sub-base material of soft areas, ditches etc. shall be carried out in
150 mm layers compacted as approved.
ii. Each layer of material shall be compacted with 16 passes of a smooth wheeled roller
having a minimum load of 500 kg per 100 mm width of the effective rolling width or a
vibratory roller having a static load per 100 mm width of roll between 125 kg and 175
kg or such other roller or combination of rollers approved by the Engineer.
17.3 Road Base
Transporting, laying and compacting of road payment materials containing tar or bitumen
binder shall be to the Standard Specification. Material for the road base shall be wet mix
macadam.
A. The thickness of the road base to all roads and surfaces areas shall be:
Base Thickness
Lean concrete, wet mix macadam 140 mm
B. Compaction shall be by a smooth wheeled roller having a load of 500 kg/100 mm

of effective rolling width. The number of passes shall be according to the Standard
Specifications depending on the material and as approved by the Engineer.
17.4 Surfacing
The surfacing to site roads and surfaced areas other than the main access road shall be a
single course of Single Course Tar macadam.
The nominal size of coarse aggregate shall be 13 mm and the coarse aggregate content 35
percent. The single course shall have a finished thickness of 50 mm. surface dressing shall be
carried out as specified or where required by the Engineer.
A. Compaction shall be by a smooth wheeled roller having a load of 500 kg/100 mm of

effective rolling width. The number of passes shall be according to the Standard
Specifications depending on the material and as approved by the Engineer.
B. Finish The finished surface of the road shall be uniform, well rolled, with accurately
formed line and level, camber and crossfalls. The texture of the finished surface shall be
free of pits and undulations. The tolerances in the required camber crossfall and along
any line parallel to the centre line shall not exceed +/-16 mm when measured with a 3
long straight edge. The finish shall be to the Engineer'
s approval.
17.5 Site Drainage
Drainage: Site drainage shall consist of open ditches or of pipes as maybe shown on the
Drawings. Where practicable drainage work shall be completed before road works or other
adjacent works are commenced. Open ditches shall be excavated to the cross-section shown
on the Drawings with the sides dressed fair throughout and the bottoms accurately grade to
regular falls.
A. Pipe Laying: Pipes shall be laid to lines'and levels as shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. Trenches for pipes drainage shall be excavated to the
minimum dimensions necessary for the proper construction of works and generally in
Page 120 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
accordance with of the Specification. After pipes have been laid, tested and, where
specified, surrounded with gravel or concrete, the trenches shall be backfilled with
excavated material and compacted to a dry density equal to that of the adjacent ground.
B. Pipes: Pipes and fittings for jointed drainage shall conform to the requirements of one
of the following Standards:
1. IS: 458 (2003) specifications for RCC pipes. The pipes and fittings shall be of
"Standard" quality with approved flexible spigot and socket joints.
2. IS: 651 (2003) or IS: 3006 (1979 reaffirmed 2003) salt glazed stoneware pipes or
chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes.
17.6 Sanitary Arrangement
Sanitary pipe work, appliances and fittings shall comply with the requirements of IS: 1742
(1983), IS: 5329 (1983) and IS: 2064 (1993).
17.7 Precautions to be taken to protect the Environment
During laying of sewers minimum disturbance to the traffic should be ensured by proper
planning, giving adequate advance notice, indicating traffic diversion, etc. Critical roads
should be completed faster by mobilizing extra resources. During Construction sprinkling of
water and other methods to be resorted to reduce dust generation. Adequate measures to be
taken in choice of pump sets and installation to reduce noise during construction and
operation to ensure that the standards prescribed by Chhattisgarh Environmental
Conservation Board are met. It shall be ensured that the communication facilities like
telephone are not affected during construction. The equipments shall be so selected that
during start up and operation the health of the operators is not affected.
*****
Page 121 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-18
MECHANICAL WORKS
Table of Contents
Clause Description
18.1 Applicability
18.2 List of Standards
18.3 Materials
18.4 Design and Construction
18.5 Tropicalisation
18.6 Climate
18.7 Re-Rating Due to the Climatic Conditions
18.8 Packing and Delivery
18.9 Finish
18.10 Wrought Steels
18.11 Castings
18.12 Bronze
18.13 Aluminium and Aluminum Alloys
18.14 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Castings
18.15 Painting and Metal Protection
18.16 Chromium Plating
18.17 Galvanizing
18.18 Fasteners
18.19 Forging
18.20 Foundations and Setting of Machinery
18.21 Built in Items
18.22 Location and Alignment
18.23 Couplings
18.24 Bearings and Lubricators
18.25 Gearboxes
18.26 Steel work
18.27 Hand railing and Safety Chains
18.28 Open Mesh and Chequered Plate Flooring
18.29 Multiple Duct Covers and Frames
18.30 Pipe work General Requirements
18.31 Welder Qualification
18.32 Pipe work Installation
18.33 Valves
18.34 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
18.35 Labels
18.36 Guards
18.37 Suppression of Noise
18.38 Submersible Sewage Pumps
18.39 Mechanically Raked Screen
Page 122 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Clause Description
18.40 Trolley and Chain Pulley Block

18.41 Pipes and Fittings
18.42 Sluice gates
18.43 Data sheet for pumps
18.44 Mechanical Drawings
18.45 Submission and Approval of Vendor Drawings
18.46 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Page 123 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 18 : MECHANICAL WORKS
18.1 Applicability
The scope of this specifications covers furnishing of all materials, equipment, plant,
labour, transport, tools, etc., and all other services necessary for the complete mechanical
works at sewage pumping station in the project, inclusive of all connected civil works not
specifically listed herein but necessary to complete the job as a whole, all as per
specifications and as directed by Engineer, inclusive of all surveying and setting out
necessary for the correct locations and levels of the structures/buildings and cleanup of
working areas after completion of the work.
The following clauses specify general mechanical requirements and standards of

workmanship for equipment and installation and must be read in conjunction with the
particular requirements of Contract. These specification clauses shall apply where
appropriate except where redefined in the particular required sections of the Specification,
which shall be applicable.
The quantities set out in the BOQ of the tender shall be treated as estimated quantities of
the work and shall not be deemed as actual quantities of the work. Contractor shall be
responsible for proper measurement before procuring the material. All payments shall be
made to the Contractor on the basis of actual work done and at accepted tender rates.
Briefly the specifications are applicable to inlet screen chamber, sluice gates, control
valves, submersible pumps, hoists, cranes, etc.
The scope includes design, manufacture, testing and inspection at places of manufacture,
supply, delivery to site, storage at site, installation / erection, testing and commissioning
and handing over of the particulars mentioned at the end of this Chapter.
18.2 List of Standards
Title of various standards referred to in the specifications are indicated below and its
revisions. This list does not necessarily cover all the standards referred to:
Standard No. Title
IS 14289 (1995) Specification for arc welding of Nickel and Nickel alloys
IS 5600 (2002) Pumps – Sewage and Drainage – Specifications
Short link chain for lifting purposes general conditions of
IS 5616 (1982)
acceptance
IS 800 (1984) Code of practice for general construction in steel
Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon suitable for fusion
IS 2856 (1999)
welding for high temperature service
IS 6911 (1992) Stainless steel plate, sheet and strip
Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and
IEC-189 Part 1 & 2
PVC sheath
Page 124 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Standard No. Title
Specification for Copper Alloy Gate, Globe and Check

IS 778 (1984)
Valves for Waterworks Purposes
IS 5 (2004) Colors for ready mixed paints and enamels
IS 210 (1993) Grey Iron Castings - Specifications
IS 318 (1981) Specification for Leaded Tin Bronze Ingots and Castings
IS 325 (1996) Three Phase Induction Motors
Design, Erection and testing (Structural Portion) of Cranes
IS 807 (2006)
and Hoists - Code of Practice
Steel Tubes, Tubulars and Other Wrought Steel Fittings -
IS 1239- part 1 (2004)
Specification - Part 1 : Steel Tubes
Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings,
IS 1239- part 2 (1992) Part 2 Mild steel tubulars and other wrought steel pipe
fittings
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas
IS 1536 (2001)
and sewage
Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and
IS 1537 (1976)
sewage
Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and
IS 1538 (1993)
sewage
PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 1 For
IS 1554-Part 1 (1988) working voltages upto and including 1 100 V
Specification for PVC Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric
Cables - Part 2 : for Working Voltages from 3.3 kV up to
IS 1554-Part 2 (1988) and including 11 kV
Steel for General Structural Purposes - Specification

IS 2062 (1999)
Code of Practice for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes
IS 3177 (1999) and Gantry Cranes other than Steel Work Cranes
Specification for Pressure and Vacuum Gauges

IS 3624 (1987)
IS 1030 (1998) Carbon steel castings for general engineering purposes
Short link chain for lifting purposes general conditions of
IS 5616 91982) acceptance
Technical requirements for roto-dynamic special purpose
IS 5120 (1977)
pumps
IS 6280 (1971) Specification for sewage screens
IS 3938 (1983) Specification for Electric Wire Rope Hoists
Page 125 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
18.3 Materials
All materials incorporated in the works shall be the most suitable for the duty concerned
and shall be new and of first class commercial quality, free from imperfection, and
selected for long life and minimum maintenance. Specified make or equivalent make
conforming to IS specification shall be supplied by the Contractor to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
18.4 Design and Construction
a. The plant design, workmanship and general finish shall be of sound quality in
accordance with good engineering practice. Design shall be robust and rated for
continuous service, at the specified duties, under the prevailing operational site
conditions.
b. The general design of mechanical and electrical plant particularly that of wearing
parts, shall be governed by the need for long periods of service without frequent
attention but shall afford ready access for any necessary maintenance.
c. Similarly items of plant and their component parts shall be completely

interchangeable. Spare parts shall be manufactured from the same material
specification as the originals.
d. No welding, filling or plugging of defective work will be permitted without the

written permission of the Engineer. All welding spatter shall be removed.
e. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all the equipment
selected is fully compatible, mechanically, electrically and also with respect to
instrumentation, control and automation.
f. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure his equipment interfaces with
any existing equipment correctly. Any interfaces must not affect the integrity of the
equipment, or invalidate any warranties or guarantees.
g. Each component or assembly shall have been proven in service in a similar

application and under conditions no less than those specified therein.
h. The equipment shall be compatible with the civil structure, when installed, with
sufficient space for operator access and maintenance procedures.
i. All materials shall be of the best commercial quality and free from any flaws, defects
or imperfections. Materials shall be selected to eradicate or reduce corrosion to a
minimum.
j. All type (as applicable), routine and acceptance tests shall be conducted in the
presence of Engineer on all the equipment as per latest applicable IS without any
extra cost. Typical type test reports for other equipment shall be submitted by the
Contractor for approval by Engineer.
k. Some of the detail drawings may not be ready at the time of placing the orders. The
Contractor shall have to proceed with the work as and when such drawings are
released. Contractor shall have absolutely no claim on the Engineer on this account
and shall not be entitled for any compensation whatsoever on account of delay in
release or issue of drawings, revisions in drawings, etc. Efforts shall be made
Page 126 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
however to release drawings progressively to have uninterrupted progress of

construction.
l. Based on structural drawings, bar bending schedule shall be prepared by Contractor

and got approved from Engineer before laying of reinforcement.
m. The enclosed drawings with Tender documents are for the reference and information
only of the Tenderer as they are preliminary in nature. These drawings do not furnish
the various details such as bolt holes, sleeve pockets, inserts, reinforcements,
packings, finishes, etc. These drawings indicate approximately the quantum and
nature of work involved. The rates quoted shall hold good for all the final details for
actual execution as shown on the drawings released for construction later on. No
claim in regard to details on construction drawings being at variance with bid
drawings shall be entertained.
18.5 Tropicalisation
Equipment is to be designed for Bilaspur climate and the following shall apply:
i. Tropical grade materials should be used wherever possible. Some relaxation of these
provisions may be permitted where equipment is hermetically sealed.
ii. Iron and steel in general to be painted or galvanized as appropriate in accordance

with the Specification. Small iron and steel parts (other than stainless steel) of all
instruments and electrical equipment, the cores of electro-magnets and the metal
parts of relays and mechanisms are to be treated in an approved manner to prevent
rusting. Cores etc, which are built up of lamination or cannot for any other reasons be
anti-rust treated, are to have all exposed parts thoroughly cleaned and heavily
enameled, lacquered or compounded.
iii. The use of iron and steel is to be avoided in instruments and electrical relays
whenever possible. Steel screws, when used, are to be zinc, cadmium or chromium
plated or, when plating is not possible owing to tolerance limitations, shall be of
corrosion resisting steel. Instruments, screws (except those forming part of a
magnetic circuit) are to be of brass or bronze. Springs are to be of brass, bronze or
other non-rusting material. Pivots and other parts for which non-ferrous material is
unsuitable are to be of an approved stainless steel.
iv. Fabrics, cork, paper and similar materials, which are not subsequently to be treated
by impregnation, are to be adequately treated with an approved fungicide. Sleeving
and fabrics treated with linseed oil or linseed oil varnishes are not to be used.
18.6 Climate
i. All plant and materials used shall in all respects be suitable for the climatic
conditions at Bilaspur as detailed in below. The following maximum conditions shall
be used for all design.
ii. Maximum peak ambient

shade temperature : 43oC
Maximum daily average

ambient shade temperature : 38oC
Page 127 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Maximum yearly average

ambient shade temperature : 30oC
Maximum Relative Humidity : 80%
In damp situations and wherever exposed to the weather, precaution shall be taken against
corrosion of metal work, cable armour conduit and the like.
18.7 Re-Rating Due to the Climatic Conditions
i. All electrical equipment including cables shall be re-rated for continuous operation in
an ambient temperature of 450C in accordance with the appropriate regulations.
ii. All materials and equipment which are subject to certification by testing authorities
etc, shall be certified as being tested at 450C ambient.
18.8 Packing and Delivery
a. All plant and equipment as necessary shall be packed in first quality containers or
packing; no second-hand timber shall be used. All packing must be suitable for
several stages of handling via inland transport and movement on site.
b. Flanged pipes are to have their open ends protected by adhesive tape or jointing and
are then to be covered with a wooden blank flange secured by service bolts.
c. The sleeves and flanges of flexible couplings shall be bundled by wire ties. Cases
containing rubber rings, bolts and other small items shall not normally weigh more
than 500 kilogram gross.
d. Precautions are to be taken to protect shafts and journals where they rest on wooden
or other supports likely to contain moisture. At such points wrappings impregnated
with anti-rust composition or vapour phase inhibitors are to be used of sufficient
strength to resist changing and indentation due to movement which is likely to occur
in transit. The form of the protective wrappings and impregnation are to be suitable
for a minimum period of twelve months.
e. Lids and internal cross battens of all packing cases are to be fixed by screws and not
nails.
Hoop metal bindings of cases are to be sealed where ends meet and if not of rustles
material are to be painted contents of cases are to be bolted securely or fastened in
position with struts or cross battens and not with wood chocks, unless they are
fastened firmly in place. All struts or cross battens are preferably to be supported by
cleats fixed to the case above and below to form ledges of which the batten may rest.
Cases are to be up-ended after packing to prove that there is no movement of
contents.
Where parts are required to be bolted to the sides of the case, large washers are to be
used to distribute the pressure and the timber is to be strengthened by means of a
pad.
Contents of cases are to be bolted securely or fastened in position with struts or cross
battens and not with wood chocks, unless they are fastened firmly in place. All strut
or cross battens are preferably to be supported by cleats fixed to the case above and
Page 128 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
below to form ledges on which the batten may rest. Cases are to be up-ended after
packing to prove that there is no movement of contents.
Where parts are required to be bolted to the sides of the case, large washers are to be
used to distribute the pressure and the timber is to be strengthened by means of a
pad.
All stencil marks on the outside of the casings are to be either of a waterproof
material or protected by Shellac or varnish to prevent obliteration in transit.
f. Wood wool is to be avoided as far as possible.
Waterproof paper and felt linings are to overlap at seams at least 12mm and the
seams secured together in an approved manner, but the enclosure is to be provided
with screened openings to obtain ventilation.
g. Where applicable, indoor items such as electric motors, switch and control gear,
instruments and panels, machines components, etc. are to be `cocooned'or covered in
polythene sheeting, selected at the joints and the enclosures provided internally with
an approved desiccator.
h. Bright metal parts are to be covered before shipment with an approved protective
compound or coating and protected adequately during transport to site. After erection
these parts are to be cleaned by the Contractor.
i. Each crate or package is to contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope and copies
in duplicate are to be forward to the Engineer; prior to dispatch. All items of material
are to be clearly marked for ready identification against the packing list.
All cases, packages, etc. are to be clearly marked on the outside to indicate the total
weight, to show where the weight is bearing and to indicate the correct positions for
slings, and are to bear an indelible identification mark relating them to the
appropriate shipping documents.
j. Structural steel work pipes valves encased fittings and metal work shall be similarly
marked. In addition one in every ten repeated articles shall bear the dispatch marks in
suitable paint or other approved medium. When in the opinion of the Engineer the
dispatch marks cannot be applied satisfactorily to any item they shall be stamped on a
petal label attached to the item or part by means of a piece of wire passing through
holes at either end of the label and secured so that it lies flat with the item.
k. The Engineer may require to inspect and approve the packing before the items are
dispatched but the Contractor is to be entirely responsible for ensuring that the
packing is suitable for transit and such inspection will not relieve the Contractor for
any loss or damage due to faulty packing.
18.9 Finish
Workmanship and general finish shall be of first class commercial quality and in
accordance with best practice. All covers, flanges and joints shall be properly faced,
bored, fitted, fixed, hollowed, mounted or chamfered as the case may be, according to the
best approved practice and all working parts of the plant and other apparatus, shall
similarly be well and accurately fitted, finished, fixed and adjusted.
Page 129 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
18.10 Wrought Steels
Where not otherwise specified wrought steel shall be selected from the appropriate grade
of IS: 1570 and be free from blemishes, short or hammer marks.
The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer, the grade number selected
for each component.
18.11 Castings
All casting shall have a homogenous structure and be free from blow holes, flaws and
cracks. Any casting having a thickness in parts in excess of 3 mm to that which it is
purported to be shall be rejected. No repairs or patchwork to castings shall be allowed
other than that approved by the Engineer.
Castings subject to hydraulic pressure shall be tested to 1.5 times the maximum working
pressure. Certified copies of Test Reports shall be forwarded to the Engineer as soon as
the test is completed.
a. Steel Castings
Where otherwise not specified, the steel castings shall be selected from appropriate grade
of BS EN 10293:2005 (Steel castings for general engineering uses).
b. Grey Iron Castings
All gray iron castings supplied shall be to the appropriate grade of IS:210 (1993). The
Contractor shall replace any casting which the Engineer considers is not of first class
appearance or is not in any way the best which can be produced, although such a casting
may have passed the necessary hydraulic or other tests. No plugging, filling or welding
shall be acceptable.
c. Spheroidal Graphite Iron Castings
All spheroidal graphite or modular graphite iron shall be to the appropriate grade of BS
2789: 1985 (Specification for spheroidal graphite or nodular graphite cast iron).
18.12 Bronze
Where otherwise not specified, the bronze used shall be made of a strong and durable zinc
free mixture to IS:318 (1981).
18.13 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys
Aluminium and aluminum alloys shall not be utilized unless alternative materials are
considered unacceptable. The use of aluminum requires the approval of the Engineer in
all cases.
18.14 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Castings
Castings shall be manufactured from IS: 617 (1994) and subjected to a chill cast to
increase tensile strength. Aluminium and aluminum alloys shall not be utilized unless no
other materials is considered suitable. Immersed structures or structures that are
periodically immersed shall not be constructed from aluminous or aluminum alloys.
Page 130 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
18.15 Painting and Metal Protection
All bright metal parts shall be covered before shipment with an approved protective
compound and adequately protected during shipment to site. After erection these parts are
to be cleaned.
All exposed metal parts of the equipment including piping, structures, railings, etc.
wherever applicable, after installation unless otherwise surface protected shall be first
painted with at least one coat of suitable primer which matches the shop primer paint
used, after thoroughly cleaning all such parts of all dirt, rust, scales, greases, oils and
other foreign materials by wire brushing, scraping or sand blasting, and the same being
inspected and approved by the Engineer for painting. After wards, the above apart shall
be finished with two coats of alloyed resin machinery enamel paints. The quality of the
finish paint shall be as per the relevant standards or equivalent and to be of the color as
approved by the Engineer. The paint shall be suitable for use in sewage works
atmosphere. All pipe services wherever applicable are to be painted in accordance with
the Owner' s standard color code scheme, by the Contractor.
18.16 Chromium Plating
All chromium plating shall comply with IS: 1986 (1981).
18.17 Galvanizing
Where steel or wrought iron is to be galvanized, it shall be carried out by the hot-dip
process and shall conform in all respects with IS 2629 (1985).
Adequate provision for filling, venting and draining shall be made for assemblies
fabricated from hollow section. Vent holes shall be suitably plugged after galvanizing.
All surface defects in the steel including cracks, surface lamination, laps and folds shall
be removed in accordance with IS: 6159 (1998). All drilling, cutting, welding, forming
and final fabrications of unit members and assemblies shall be completed before the
structures are galvanized. The surface of the steel work to be galvanized shall be free
from welding slag, paint, oil, grease, and similar contaminants. The articles shall be
pickled in dilute sulfuric or hydrochloric acid, followed by rinsing in water and pickling
in phosphoric acid. They shall be thoroughly washed, stoved and dipped in molten Zinc
and brushed, as per relevant IS.
On removal from the galvanizing bath the resultant coating shall be smooth, continuous,
free from gross imperfections such as bare spots, lumps, blisters and inclusions of flux or
dross. Edges shall be clean and surfaces bright.
Bolts nuts and washers shall be hot dip galvanized and subsequently centrifuged. Nuts
shall be tapped up to 0.4mm oversize before galvanizing and the threads oiled to permit
the nuts to be finger turned on the bolt for the full depth of the nuts.
During off-loading and erection, nylon slings shall be used. Galvanized work which is to
be stored in works or on site, shall be stacked so as to provide adequate ventilation to all
surfaces to avoid wet storage staining.
Small areas of the galvanized coat damaged in any way shall be restored by: -
Page 131 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
i. Cleaning the area of any weld slag and thoroughly wire brushing to give a clean
surface.
ii. The application of two coats of zinc-rich paint (not less than 90 per cent zinc, dry
film), or the application of a low melting point zinc alloy repair rod or power to the
damaged area, which is heated at 3000C.
Fastenings of galvanized steelwork shall be hot dip galvanized and subsequently

centrifuged in accordance with IS: 2629 (1985). Nuts shall be tapped upto 0.4 mm over
size before galvanizing and the threads oiled to permit the nuts to be finger turned on the
bolt for the full depth of the nuts. Where surfaces of galvanized steelwork are to be in
contact with aggressive solutions and\or atmospheres the galvanizing shall receive further
protection by painting.
18.18 Fasteners
Bolts, nuts and studs with nominal diameters up to and fasteners including 39 mm
required to be made in carbon steel shall conform to BS 6104:Part 3:1981 (Mechanical
properties of fasteners Specification for set screws and similar threaded fasteners not
under tensile stresses) and threaded in accordance with relevant part of IS: 1363 and IS:
1367. Bright steel washers 3 mm in thickness shall conform to BS 4320:1968
(Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric series) and
shall be provided beneath bolt head and nut.
The above items required to be supplied in stainless steel shall conform to relevant part of
IS: 1570. These items together with holding-down bolts and anchor plates required to be
supplied in high tensile steel shall conform to BS 970.
Drilled anchor fixings for use on concrete structures shall be of a type ‘Fasteners’
approved by the Engineer' s Representative. The Positions of all drilled anchors shall be
approved by the Engineer' s Representative and the Contractor proposing to use such
fixings shall be deemed to have undertaken to supply, mark off, drill and fit. All exposed
bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal and the length of all bolts shall be such, that when
fitted and tightened down with a nut and washer, the threaded portion shall fill the nut and
not protrude from the face thereof by more than a half diameter of the bolt. Rivets shall
conform to and tested in accordance with relevant IS.
18.19 Forging
Deleted
18.20 Foundations and Setting of Machinery
The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of all foundation and plinths required for
the plant and shall be responsible for ensuring that all foundations and plinths are
constructed and boxed out for of machinery holding-down bolts in accordance with the
approved drawings.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary templates for suspension of the holding - down
bolts during grouting of same.
The Contractor shall visit the site during the course of construction and check the Civil
Works to ensure that the foundation and /or plinths are correct recording location and
height, for the acceptance of the machinery. When the foundations and/or plinths have
been completed and are in a satisfactory condition the machinery shall be installed as
directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Page 132 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
The machinery shall be mounted on flat steel packing of a thickness selected to take up
variations in the level of the correct foundations. The packing shall be bedded by chipping
or grinding of the concrete surface.
Only one packing of selected thickness shall be used at each location, which shall be
adjacent to each holding down bolt. The number of shims shall not exceed two at each
location and the thickness of each shim shall not exceed 3 mm.
The machinery shall be alighted, leveled and pulled down by the nuts of the holding down
bolts with a spanner of normal length, and no grout shall be applied until the machinery
has been run and approved by the Engineer for stability and vibration. The Contractor
shall then carry out the grouting and building in of the machinery, however the Contractor
shall take responsibility for the satisfactory nature of this work.
18.21 Built In Items
The Contractor shall provide full details of the box-outs and plant fixing and foundation
requirements. The Contractor shall deliver all items of equipment that are required to be
built in the civil works, as required by the construction programme and shall arrange for a
representative room. The equipment supplier to be in attendance during the progress of
such works. The Contractor shall grout up and make good the works as instructed by the
Engineer' s Representative.
18.22 Location and Alignment
Where individual items and/or mechanically coupled, such as motors, gearboxes and
similar items shall have correct alignment for satisfactory operation. Each such item shall
be mounted on a common bed plate and when alighted shall be located by means of
dowels to ensure that correct re-alignment can be easily achieved when re-assembling the
items after removal for overhauls.
18.23 Couplings
Flexible couplings shall be couplings rated at not less than the stalling torque load of the
motor. Couplings liable to impregnation by oil shall be of all metal flexible type.
General service coupling shall be of the flexible multi-pin and resilient bush type, having not
less than six bushes and each bush shall have an inner sleeve to allow rotation on the pin
(bushes shall not be in direct contact with the pin). All pins shall have shoulders to allow
positive location and securing to the half coupling face.
Flexible couplings shall be supplied in matching balanced sets machined, balanced and
marked before leaving manufacturer' s works. The couplings shall be a tight fit on the shafts
and secured with hand fitted keys and fully checked for alignment shall be a tight fit on the
shafts and secured the hand fitted keys and fully checked for alignment. All necessary
equipment for checking alignment shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Where flexible coupling are used, the Contractor shall fully describe the arrangements
proposed for ensuring that the desired freedom of relative movement between the shafts is
obtained when transmitting a torques corresponding to the continuous maximum rating of
the motor.
Solidly bolted couplings shall be subject to accurate alignment and the Contractor'
s proposed
alignment procedure shall be forwarded to the approval of the Engineer. In particular,
alignment procedures which involve rotating one half coupling only will not be accepted.
Page 133 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Overload release couplings shall not rely on shear pins. Release torque shall be adjustable
over a wide range and preferably without the need to change components. The coupling shall
be capable of angular alignment of 1 degree maximum and 1 mm displacement of shafts.
Hydraulic couplings shall be oil filled with thermal overload protection device. The coupling
shall be fully rated to transmit the motor full load power without exceeding normal working
temperature and due regard shall be taken to ambient temperatures. An enclosure around the
coupling shall be provided to prevent oil spray in the event of operation of the thermal
overload device.
The Contractor in the presence of the Engineer’s representative shall check final alignment
of all types of coupling.
18.24 Bearings and Lubricators
The size of bearing shall be not less than that calculated for Bearings and a minimum L10
basic rating life in accordance with Lubricators Part 1, taking into account all considerations
of reliability, materials of manufacture and operating conditions. All bearings shall be rated
and sized to ensure satisfactory running without vibration under all conditions of operation
for a minimum life of 50,000 hours running.
They shall be efficiently lubricated and adequately protected from ingress of moisture, dust
and sand and the particular climatic condition prevalent at the site. All bearings shall be to
ISO standard SI unit dimensions where practicable.
All ball or roller bearings except those supplied and "sealed for life" shall be arranged for
grease gun lubrication and a suitable high-pressure grease gun shall be supplied.
Adequate "Stauffer" screw top pressure grease lubricator with `tell tale'stems or "Tat" grease
nipples shall be provided for all moving parts. The position of all greasing and oiling points
shall be arranged so as to be readily accessible for routine servicing. Where necessary,
suitable access platforms shall be provided.
The type of lubricant and intervals of lubrication, which shall be kept to a minimum (not less
than nine days), for each individual item of plant shall be entered on a working schedule,
which shall form part of the Operation and Maintenance instructions.
A list of recommended lubricants and their equivalents bearings shall be entered in the
Operation and Maintenance instructions.
18.25 Gearboxes
The gearboxes shall be totally enclosed dust, water and hose proof. Satiable lifting lugs shall
be provided. They shall be robustly constructed for arduous duty.
The gear case shall be manufactured from gray cast iron to IS: 210 (1993) and of a grade to
ensure high strength and wear resistance. Inspection covers shall be provided together with
protected oil level indication, breather, with oil mist prevented, and drains plug.
The gearboxes shall be designed for operation at the ambient temperatures specified without
the assistance of a cooling fan.
The mechanical service factor shall be not less than 1.75 when applied to the rated motor
power.
Page 134 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
The gears shall be manufactured from steel to IS: 7403 (1974) of grade selected by the
Contractor and entered in the Schedule of Particulars. The teeth shall be profile ground and
lapped to a high standard of accuracy and finish.
Rolling bearings shall be adequately rated to ensure a running life of not less than 50,000 hrs.
The input and output shafts shall have oil seals fitted to prevent the egress of lubricant when
the gearbox is mounted in the required orientation. The seals shall also prevent the ingress of
dust, sand and moisture. Lubrication of the gears shall be by a splash or forced system.
Each gear unit shall be subjected to a full load test at the inclinations specified for duration of
3 hours during which time temperature, vibration and noise level together with oil tightness
shall be recorded in the presence of the Engineer' s Representative.
After satisfactory completion of the tests each unit shall be drained of lubricant. All internal
surfaces shall then be coated with suitable preservative. A metal label shall be securely wired
to the gear case to clearly state that the gear case requires to be coated with a suitable
preservative.
The gear box shall be securely wired to the gear case to clearly state that the gear case
requires to be filled with lubricant, the type and grade of which shall be clearly identifiable.
18.26 Steelwork
The Contractor shall provide and fix all the steel work, including stairways, ladders, hand
railing, chequered plate and open mesh flooring frames and curbing as detailed in the
specification or as shown on the contract drawings.
All steel work shall be constructed in mild steel and shall be galvanized after manufacture in
accordance with sub-section 18.17. For all prefabricated metalwork, including multiple duct
covers, external ladders. Open mesh flooring, chequered plating, hand railing staircase,
structural steel work and the like, the Contractor shall submit fabrication drawings for the
approval of the Engineer prior to he manufacture of any of these items.
18.27 Hand Railing and Safety Chains
a) Hand railing
Hand railing shall be of either galvanized mild steel of circular hollow section and shall
comply with the relevant requirements. Mild steel toe boards shall be provided 100 mm high
by 3mm thick positioned above the platform level and fixed securely to the standards. All
items shall be galvanized in accordance with sub-section 18.17.
Standards shall not be less than 38 mm external diameter and rails shall not be less than 25
mm external diameter.
Horizontal handrails shall be 1100 mm high with an intermediate rail at mid height. Handrail
height shall be measured vertically from finished floor level to the handrail centerline.
Handling and fixings shall be designed to withstand a horizontal force of 740 N/m run
without permanent distortion or failure of components. When a horizontal force of 360 N/m
is applied at handrail level the deflection at any pint on the handrail shall not exceed 1/125 of
the distance between the center lines of adjacent standards or 10mm whichever is the least.
Page 135 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
All mounting flanges shall be of substantial construction, with horizontal flanges drilled for
not less than three bolts with two bolts on a line parallel to and on the walkway side of the
line of the hand railing and vertical flanges drilled for to less than two bolts and line through
the bolts being vertical. Fittings shall be screwed or secured with grub screws. The standards
shall be set at to more than 1.5 m c/c. When provided in sections, hand railing shall be joined
together with propose made fittings secured by screws or grub screws.
All ladders, stairway or other openings shall be guarded on three sides by hand railing
conforming to the requirements stated above. The Contractor shall ensure that unless
specified hereinafter to the contrary, all hand railing shall be of uniform appearance and
manufacture.
b) Safety Chain
Mild steel safety chain shall be 8 mm nominal size grade (M 4) non calibrated Chain Type 1,
complying with relevant IS. After manufacture mild steel safety chains shall be hot dip
galvanized as per relevant IS.
Stainless steel safety chains shall be manufactured from grade 316S31 steel complying with
IS: 3109 part 1 (1982). Chain links shall be welded and have an internal length not exceeding
45 mm and an internal width of between 12 mm and 18 mm. The fins caused by welding
shall be removed and the weld shall be smoothly finished all round. When tested each chain
shall withstand a breaking force of 30kN and a proof force of 15 kN.
18.28 Open Mesh and Chequered Plate Flooring
Open mesh flooring and gratings shall generally comply with IS: 3502 (1994) except where
otherwise specified hereinafter. Such flooring and gratings shall be of rectangular mesh and
non-slip and shall be mild steel galvanized.
Flooring shall be provided to span between the supporting members as shown on the
Contract Drawings. Where necessary intermediate support members shall be provided and
fixed. Galvanized mild steel toe plates 100 mm high and not less than 3 mm thick shall be
provided and fixed at all cutouts except where otherwise shown on the Contract drawings.
Both the load bearing and transverse bars in rectangular flooring panels shall be obtained
symmetrically around the centre lines of the panels in both directions, so that when the
panels are fixed in extensive areas or in long runs, the bars of all panels are in line.
Chequered plate flooring shall be galvanized and of the non-slip type, not less than 10mm
thick measured excluding the raised pattern. The flooring shall be secured to its frame by
stainless steel countersunk set screws.
All flooring shall be designed to carry a loading of 750 kg per sqm and the deflection shall
not exceed 1/200 of the span or 10mm whichever is the least. All flooring shall be removable
and set flush in mild steel galvanized frames. All frames shall be provided with lugs for
building in.
Flooring shall be provided in sizes suitable for lifting and removal by one man and with the
appropriate cutouts to permit its removal without disturbing or dismantling spindles,
supporting brackets, cables or pipe work. Flooring spanning wide openings shall be
supported on removable bearers and fixings to provide the required rigidity and these shall
be supplied and fitted by the Contractor. These members shall be removable to afford clear
Page 136 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
access to the openings, which includes ducts. Lifting keys shall be supplied for each location
and the type of key shall be such that inadvertent release is avoided.
18.29 Multiple Duct Covers and Frames
Multiple duct covers and frames shall be of cast iron, water proof, non-rocking and recessed
for filling with concrete or similar material. They shall be of the type incorporating integral,
removable, intermediate beams to given the required clear pit opening as shown on the
Contract Drawings. A heavy grease seal is to be formed between the cover and frame to
prevent ingress of grit.
18.30 Pipe work General Requirements
The Contractor shall supply, deliver and erect all pipe work and fittings within the structures
and externally as indicated on the Contract drawings and in accordance with relevant
sections of this Specifications.
Pipe work and fittings shall be suitable for a safe working pressure equivalent to the
maximum working pressure of the system. The safe working pressure of the pumping mains
shall be the closed valve head of the pump plus the maximum suction static head. The
maximum surge pressure shall be limited to 125% of the maximum working pressure. All
pipe work and fittings shall be of adequate strength to accommodate the maximum surge
pressure of the system.
The minimum pressure rating of pipe work and fittings shall be 10 bar the exception being
ductile iron pipe work and fitting which shall have a minimum pressure rating of 16 bar.
There shall be a sufficient number of mechanical joints to enable mechanical plant and
valves to be disconnected from built-in pipe work. Such joints shall be tied and shall not be
allowed to sustain the weight of any pipe work.
All pipe work and fittings shall be sized for the required capacity at a velocity limit
depending on the nature of the fluid or substance to be conveyed. Under no circumstances
shall velocity exceed 2.50 m/s. All pipe work shall be adequately supported by purpose
made fixings. Support shall not be provided by plant or equipment.
The position of any thrust blocks required shall be indicated on the Contractor' s detail
drawing together with the position of any sleeve required through partition walls in
buildings. Puddle flanges shall be provided for building at locations in which pipes 80mm
diameter and above pass through structural concrete below ground level.
Where pipe work is connected to plant and equipment readily demountable fittings in the
form of unions or flanged adaptors shall be provided. The flanged adaptor on the delivery
pipe of pumps shall be located upstream of the reflux value where appropriate. Flexible
joints shall be provided in all pipe work subjected to linear constraint.
All jointing work including the provision of suitable full face gasket not less than 9 mm in
thickness and galvanized fastenings shall be included. Pump suction shall be standard
castings in either cast iron or ductile iron. Unless otherwise specified, the pieces shall have a
radial branch to enable a more streamlined flow from branch to body. Due allowance shall
be made for reinforcement in the vicinity of the branch.
Prior to dispatch each item of pipe work or associated fitting shall be clearly identified in
paint with the plant item number indicated on the Contractor's arrangement drawing.
Page 137 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Puddle flanges shall be provided on all pipes where they pass through pumping station walls.
Each puddle flange shall be continuously welded to the pipe on both sides of the flange.
Pipe jointing surfaces and components shall be kept clean and free from extraneous matter
until the joints have been made or assembled. Care shall be taken to ensure that there is no
ingress of grout or other extraneous material into the joint annulus after the joint has been
made.
The dimensions of gaskets shall comply with IS specifications. Gaskets shall be

manufactured from material complying with BIS specification.
Pump suction and delivery manifolds shall be provided with a drain valve where natural
drainage does not occur.
Hydraulic testing shall not be carried out until all fabrication has been completed when the
pressure applied and sustained without further pumping shall be twice the working pressure.
The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning the internal surface of all pipes prior to
erection particularly the removal of weld deposits. Initial capping of the ends for protection
during transport and storage shall not be removed until erection takes place.
18.31 Welder Qualification
Before welding work commences on pipe work, the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer' s
Representative that the welders have previously carried out similar welding work within
recent months. When instructed by the Engineer' s Representative, the Contractor shall
arrange for the welder to produce test welds in accordance with the relevant provisions of IS:
817.
18.32 Pipe work Installation
All pipe work, pipe fittings, jointing materials, etc., shall be of the best quality free from
defects and obtained from a supplier approved by the Engineer. The installation of the pipe
work shall be carried out using skilled personnel and pipe work shall be installed according
to the drawing provided by or approved by the Engineer. Where valves are incorporated in
pipe work, the valves shall be provided with their own supports, such that no excess loading
is exerted on pipe work. All pipe work materials shall be off-loaded, stored on site and
handled thereafter in such a manner that they are adequately protected against damage or
deterioration.
a) Underground Pipes
Unless otherwise stated all underground pipes shall be buried in trenches, which have been
excavated in accordance with the relevant section of the specification.
b) Examining Pipes
Before being used, each pipe casting or fitting shall be properly examined and should it
appear defective in any way, it shall be set apart and not used until it has been examined and
passed by the Engineer. All metal pipes, which shall be buried in the ground, shall, prior to
their installation, be slung and sounded in an approved manner. The Engineer shall set any
pipe found to be faulty by this method, aside for examination.
Page 138 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
c) Cutting Pipe work
All pipe work shall be cut with proper pipe cutting tools. The use of hammer and chisel for
this purpose shall not be permitted. Great care shall be exercised when cutting
concrete/bitumen lined spun iron and ductile iron pipes, to ensure that there is no damage to
the lining. Should any damage to the lining take place which is to an extent which the
Engineer deems to be undesirable, then the pipe shall be rejected. The Contractor shall then
prepare another pipe for incorporation into the works. All pipes which have been cut shall
have the edges dressed and debarred.
18.33 Valves
a) Sluice / Gate
Sluice valves shall be of the following types:-
IS: 2685 (1971) Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
sluice valves.
IS: 13095 (1991) Butterfly valves for general purposes.
IS: 14846 (2000) Sluice Valve for Water Works Purposes (50 to 1200 mm size) -
Specification.
The type and size of valve to be used at each location shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
Sluice valves shall be of the double-flanged cast iron wedge-gate type unless otherwise
specified. They shall have a cast iron body with renewable gunmetal faces on body wedge,
and a bolt-on cast iron bonnet. Rising stem valves shall also incorporate a combined yoke.
Where sluice valves above 350 mm bore are mounted with the spindle in the horizontal
plane, the valve bodies shall be fitted with renewable machined gunmetal gate slides and the
gates with renewable hard bronze shoes, accurately machined to reduce sliding friction.
All sluice valves above 500mm bore (300mm if power actuated) shall be provided with
jacking screws. Valves above 350 mm bore where mounted in the vertical plane shall be
provided with feet.
Unless otherwise specified, each valve shall be provided with a suitable hand wheel of
adequate diameter for the duty required. Gearing shall be supplied where necessary, to
ensure that the required operating force applied by hand to the rim of the wheel does not
exceed 25 kg.
Hand wheels shall have smooth rims with clockwise direction of closing. To protect the
threads of rising stems and spindles, ‘vandal and weatherproof’ clear polycarbonate tube
covers shall be securely fitted. The tubes shall be clearly and permanently engraved to
indicate the position of the valve.
Valve stems shall be of stainless steel, machined all over with a machine cut, robust
trapezoidal or square form thread, operating in a gunmetal nut.
Stem seals shall be of the stuffing box and gland type, arranged for easy replacement of
packing and shall be accessible for maintenance without removal or the valves from service.
Page 139 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Extension spindles, head stocks and foot brackets shall be provided where specified. Where
possible, providing the valves is not subject to submergence, the extension spindle shall be of
the non-rising type. A cast iron bridle piece, or similar, shall be incorporated on valves of the
rising spindle type. Where rising stem valves are subject to submergence, the extension
spindle shall also be of the rising type, with the threaded portion positioned above tope water
level. Extended spindle installations shall include all necessary brackets, intermediate
supports, etc.
Where extended spindles require to be operated at open flooring level, spindle guides, or
guide brackets, shall be provided close to flooring level. In order to absorb the thrust in both
directions of operation, thrust tubes shall incorporate all necessary fixing brackets and
spindle guide plates.
Where valves are required to be operated by tee keys, spindle caps shall be fitted. The caps
shall be drilled and each provided with nut and bolt for securing to the spindle, which shall
likewise be drilled to accept the bolt. Each cap where fitted shall be supplied complete with
operating tee key.
All hand wheels, headstocks, foot brackets, guide brackets and thrust tubes shall be of cast
iron.
Valves shall carry identification marks and/or plates in accordance with the IS. Those for use
on process plant shall carry and additional brass plate carrying a valve identification and a
brief description of its function.
Valves shall be sized such that the velocity through the valve when fully open does not
exceed 2.25 m/s at the rated throughput. They shall have flanges as per standard specification
and shall be capable of withstanding the same test pressures as the pipeline on which they
operate. All nuts and studs subject to vibration shall be fitted with spring washers or locking
tabs.
b) Reflux Valves / Non - Return Valves
Reflux valves shall comply with BS: 5153 and be double flanged cast iron unless otherwise
specified. They shall be of the quick action single door type, designed to minimize slam on
closure by means of heavy gunmetal - faced doors weighted as necessary. The valves shall
be fitted with positively fixated renewable gunmetal door sealing faces. The door hinge
pin/shaft shall extend through a sealing gland on the side of the body, and be fitted with an
external lever to permit back flushing. Glands shall be of the stuffing-box type with the
exception that for valves below 450 mm bore they may be of the Ò'ring type. The valve
door shall be weighted to suit the application and the level shall be of the heavy duty type
designed for the addition of external weights.
All reflux valves shall be suitable for operating in the horizontal plane unless otherwise
specified. Covers shall be provided to allow ample access of leaning and service and shall be
supplied complete with tapped bosses fitted with air release cocks. Valves above 350 mm
bore shall be provided with feet.
The design of valve body shall be such that there is adequate clearance around and at the
back of the door to minimize jamming by range and debris. Stops shall be provided to limit
the back life of the door, these shall be positioned to prevent fouling.
The hinge pin/shaft shall be stainless steel and square in section, to ensure positive location
of the door. If circular shafts are utilized, the back flushing lever shall be located on a
Page 140 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
squared section, the diagonal dimension of which shall be equivalent to the full diameter of
the shaft. Both door and lever shall be positively and securely fixed to the hinge pin/shaft.
Grub screws, pins (parallel or taper) or clamps will not be acceptable. All internal fixing
devices shall be of stainless steel.
Valves shall carry identification marks and/or plates in accordance with IS.
Valves shall be sized, such that the velocity through the valve when fully open does not
exceed 2.25 m/s at the rated throughput. They shall have flanges to IS: 778 (1984) and shall
be capable of withstanding the same test pressures as the pipeline on which they operate. All
nuts and studs subject to vibration shall be fitted with spring washers or locking tabs.
a). Non-return valve shall be as per IS 53 12 Part 1 & 2 (2004, 1986).

b). Valves shall be free from sharp projections, which are likely to get clogged with stringy
materials.
c). The valves shall be suitable for mounting on horizontal pipeline.
d). The internal parts shall be easily accessible for inspection through inspection hole.
e). Hydraulic passages and doors shall be designed to avoid cavitations.
f). Valve body shall be designed for 1.5 times the rated pressure.
g). Valves shall be of swing type.
h). Valves shall be quick closing type with non-slam characteristics. In case of swing type,
the non-slam characteristics shall be achieved by providing suitable combination of
door and hydraulic passages without any external damping arrangement, or counter
weights.
i). Valves 450 mm and above shall be provided with supporting foot.
j). Flow direction shall be clearly embossed on the valve body.
k). Valve flange faces shall be parallel to each other and shall be at right angle to valve
centerline. Flange back shall be machined or spot faced for proper seating of bolt head
and nut.
l). The pressure rating of valve shall be minimum PN 1.0.
c) Sewage Air Valves
a). The air valve must be of the type that incorporates a kinetic and an automatic air release
valve in one unit. It should be able to release air (gases) and to admit air into the sewage
line, when the line is emptied.
b). The air valve must guarantee complete separation of liquid sewage from the sealing
system of the air valve under all working conditions.
c). The air valve must have arrangement for draining and flushing by external water.
d). All sealing mechanism system parts of the air valve should be made of stainless steel-
316.
e). The body of the valve should be such as to minimize the accumulation of sewage deposit
at the bottom of the coating or of cast iron. The valve mechanism must be such as to
prevent opening of the air valve upon every slight pressure change in line.
f). Each air valve must be supplied with a sluice valve for isolation for maintenance
purpose.
Page 141 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
18.34 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
Gauges shall be provided as in the Specification. Pressure and compound gauges of approved
manufacturer’s, shall be provided and fixed directly to and at the same level as the delivery
and suction branches of each pump. The gauges shall be fitted with diaphragm type isolating
valves. Gauges shall not be connected to air release or auxiliary suction pipes.
A diaphragm type pressure vacuum transmitter shall be connected to the delivery piping of
each submersible pump, on the upstream (pump) side of the sluice and reflux valves and
within the valve chamber. These shall then be connected by means of small bore tubing to
the pressure gauge, mounted within the control panel, or any other location as decided by the
Engineer at site.
A flushing pin shall be provided to clear the hole in the delivery pipe where pressure tube is
connected.
All gauges shall have concentric dials of 150 mm diameter, pressure gauges being graduated
in meters head, and compound gauges in cm of mercury and meters head. Gauge graduations
shall be such that the gauge is never used continuously beyond 60 per cent of the maximum
graduation. The face of the dial shall have a warning label market in red attached thereto
reading in Hindi and English:-
"IMPORTANT TURN OFF WHEN NOT IN USE"
The gauge mechanism shall be of the Bourdon tube type, having stainless steel movements
and shall comply with BS 1780:1985 (Specification for bourdon tube pressure and vacuum
gauges). It shall be sealed from the liquid being measured by means of a diaphragm or
capsule and be filled with silicone oil.
All gauges shall be fitted with a pressure snubber to dampen pressure pulsations.
Before the gauges are delivered to site, each gauge shall be tested in accordance with BS
1780:1985 and a test certificate for each gauge, confirming that they are to the required
accuracy, shall be sent to the Engineer. Further copies of the test certificates shall be
incorporated in the operating and maintenance manuals.
18.35 Labels
The Contractor shall arrange for the supply and fitting of engraved identification labels to all
valves and items of plant. The reference numbers of all valves shall be as indicated on the
schematic diagram to be supplied under the Contract.
Designation labels shall be of 5 mm Traffoly with black lettering on white background.

Embossed materials and techniques shall not be accepted.
The Contractor shall provide 2 No. enameled iron plates worked "Men Working on Plant".
The plates shall be 200 mm x 75 mm with red lettering on a white background.
N.B. All identification and warning labels shall be in HINDI (native language) and English.
18.36 Guards
Adequate guards shall be supplied and installed throughout the installation to cover drive
mechanisms. All rotating parts drive belts, etc, shall be securely shrouded to the satisfaction
Page 142 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
of the Engineer to ensure the complete safety for both maintenance and operating personnel.
However, whilst all such guards shall be of adequate and substantial construction they shall
also be readily removable for gaining access to the plant without the need for first removing
or displacing any major item of plant. The guards shall be of the open mesh type except
where retention of fluid spray is required.
18.37 Suppression of Noise
All plant offered shall be quiet in operation. The noise level within the building shall not be
more than 70 decibels (+5 per cent on this over the audible frequency spectrum) "A" scale
when measured 3 meters from any single item of plant during starting, running and scooping.
The noise level outside the building shall not be more than 55 decibels (+5 per cent on this
over the audible frequency spectrum) "A" scales when measured 3 meters from the external
wall. Noise test measurement shall be made on completion of the installation of the pant at
site to verify that it complies with this Clause. Plant which fails to comply with the noise
level limits when tested shall render it liable for rejection unless it is satisfactorily modified
at the Contractor’s expense by the programmed commissioning date.
18.38 Submersible Sewage Pumps
The submersible sewage pump shall be mono-block type with non-clog design. It shall be
suitable for pumping raw unscreened sewage containing sludge, storm water, long fibers,
plastic pieces, used condoms, etc. The pump shall be able to pass through soft solids of 100
mm dia. and capable of dealing with the sewage/sludge with specific gravity of 1.05. Pumps
shall be of maximum 1450 rpm, however pumps of 960 rpm if suitable for given duty point
shall be got approved from the Engineer.
Impeller shall be of non-clog type design. Additionally, a special contra-block cutting and
tearing system shall be on the suction side of the pump for disposing off soft material, which
would otherwise clog the pump.
Maintenance free, antifriction, permanently grease filled, ball bearings shall be provided
which shall take care of all the axial and radial forces at any point of operation. The weights
of the revolving parts of the pumps including the unbalanced hydraulic thrusts of the
impellers shall be carried by thrust bearings provided in each pump assembly.
The pump installation design shall be such as to facilitate automatic installation and removal
of the pump without having to enter into the wet well. Profile gasket shall be provided in
automatic coupling system to avoid metal-to-metal contact between the pump and delivery
bend to ensure leak-proof joint.
The reverse rotation prevention system shall be incorporated in the pump design to ensure
that the pump does not start rotating in the reverse direction due to wrong electrical
connections.
An arrow clearly showing the direction of rotation shall be cast on the volute casing.
Pump Casing: Pump Casing shall be of C.I. as per IS 210 Gr FG 260. The internal surfaces
shall be free of rough spots. The casing shall have centre line discharge.
Impellers: Impellers shall be of Cast Steel CF8M grade. Impellers shall be of semi open,
non-clog design. Additionally, a special contra-block cutting and tearing system will
preferred on the suction side of the pump for disposing off soft material which would
otherwise clog the pump.
Page 143 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Pump Shaft: The pump shaft shall be hard chrome plated steel or alloy steel (SS-410) as per
manufacturer'
s standard. The shaft shall be of one-piece construction.
Pump Bearings: Pump bearings shall be of the antifriction type. The bearings shall be able
to take normal thrust loads due to unbalanced hydraulic loads on the impellers plus the
weight of all rotating parts of the pumps. Pump bearings shall be designed with a minimum
life of 50,000 hours. The bearings shall be grease lubricated for life and shall be maintenance
free.
Guide Rail Assembly: The assembly shall have CI pedestal, bracket, delivery bend, Carbon
Steel Guide Rail Pipe / Wire, upper guide rail holder etc. The pedestal and bracket shall
provide automatic coupling between pump delivery flange and discharge bend (duck foot
bend).
Mechanical seals: Double seals shall be provided to prevent pumped liquid entering into the
motor winding. The seals shall be situated in oil chamber to ensure proper lubrication.
Moisture Sensor: Moisture sensor (seal monitor) shall be provided in the oil chamber to
detect the failure of the mechanical seal. The sensor will trip the pump-motor in the event of
ingress of moisture into the oil chamber.
Lifting chain: Each pump shall be provided with carbon steel galvanized lifting chain of
adequate strength.
Fasteners: All pump fasteners shall be of SS 304.
Foundation Nuts and Bolts: SS304 foundation nuts and bolts shall be provided.
Protective Coating: The pumps shall be epoxy painted.
Pump Balance: All rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced as per the
relevant IS.
a) Submersible Motors
The submersible motor shall be dry, squirrel cage type, suitable for three phase supply,
continuous duty, with class ' F'insulation. Winding of the motor shall be impregnated by
resin. Motor shall have integral cable entry port and cable entry shall be properly sealed.
The pump motor may often require starting after intermittent clogging. The motor shall
therefore incorporate aluminum die cast rotors to ensure better starting torque characteristics.
The enclosure for motor shall be IP-68. Each phase of the motors shall be provided with
thermic switches or bimetallic electromechanical temperature detectors. The motor shall
operate satisfactorily at all operating levels in wet well.
Motor shall be sealed against entry of liquid being pumped by using two seals.
Submersible Cable: Pumps shall be provided with submersible cables of suitable length both
for power and control cables, which shall be terminated in the pump starter panel or in the
weatherproof junction box, if pump starter panel is situated beyond the length of the
submersible cable.
All motor shall be suitable for operation on a 415v, 50 HZ, 3 phase, AC supply.
Page 144 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Motor shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the expected life span
when operated continuously under the following supply conditions.
i. Variation of supply voltage from the

rated motor voltage +/-10%
ii. Variation of supply frequency from the

rated frequency +/-5%
iii. Combined voltage and frequency

Variations +/-10%
All motors shall be capable of starting 10 times pr hour. The stalled motor current shall not
exceed 6 times the full load current.
Starting current of motor shall exceed 200% of the rated full load current for star- Delta
starting and 600% of rated full load current for DOL Starting under any circumstances.
Motor shall be capable of starting and accelerating the load with the applicable method of
starting without exceeding the acceptable winding temperature, when the supply voltage is in
the ranges of 10% above of the rated motor voltage.
Motor shall be designed to withstand 120% of the rated speed for two minutes without and
by mechanical damage in direction of rotation.
The insulation class of motor winding shall conform to class - F and the maximum
temperature rise shall not exceed 95oC, when measured by winding resistance method and
85oC, when measured by thermometer method for an ambient temperature of 45oC.
Motor shall be offered for routine and type tests in accordance with IS: 4029 (1967) and IS:
325 (1996) at the manufactures works. Test certificates shall be endorsed to the effect that
they are properly balanced and free from vibration. In addition, a test shall be required to
establish the maximum transient starting current.
b. Characteristic Curves
Characteristic and system curves for the pumps shall be supplied to a reasonable large scale,
which shall show the capacity of the pump under single and multi pump operation at the duty
point.
When tested through their complete range of workable heads at the manufacturer’s works, all
the pumps shall give results which conform to the curves submitted with the Tender. Curves
showing pump efficiency and KW loading shall also be included. The desired minimum
efficiency of pump set shall be 60%.
c. Performance Test
Each pump shall be tested at the manufacturer' s premises for the full operating range of the
pump to relevant IS. Test shall be carried out at rated speed with minimum NPSH available
at site. Pump performance shall be within the tolerance limits specified in the above said IS.
The contractor shall furnish the guaranteed values of discharge and efficiency for the total
head at duty point for each pump.
Page 145 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
18.39 Mechanically Raked Screen
a. Mechanically raked screens are to be installed in the inlet chamber of sewage pumping
station for arresting floating or similar material from sewage entering into a pumping
station.
b. The trash screen shall be vertical and capable of being lifted by means of a electrically
operated lifting arrangement and raised above the operating platform, as and when
necessary.
c. The screen shall be fabricated out of stainless steel flats and Frame Guiding bars and
fixing bolts shall be of stainless steel.
d. The width and height of screens shall be as per the drawing.
e. The trash screen shall move vertically up or down in guide bars that are securely fixed to
the side walls of the inlet chamber by means of suitably sized and spaced rag bolts of
approved material. Each screen shall have two lifting hooks, spaced sufficiently apart
from the centre at the top of the screen frame.
f. Stainless steel lugs shall be provided on the screen frame, two on each side, to enable the
screen to move smoothly in the guide bars. The framework shall be provided only on the
downstream side of the screens.
g. Each bar screen shall be suitable to handle peak flow.
h. Penstock gates shall be provided upstream and downstream in the bar-screen

chamber.
i. All the moving parts in open shall be provided with covers/guards. The screens should
be robust and shall be provided with a most efficient arrangement to prevent the
screenings from falling back into the sewage.
18.40 Trolley and Chain Pulley Block
a. The chain pulley block shall be operated on the lower flange of the bridge girder.
b. The load chain shall be made of alloy steel as per IS:3109 (Part 1 & 2, 1982). It shall
be heat treated to give ductility and toughness so that it will stretch before breaking. It
shall be of welded construction with a factor of safety not less than 5.
c. The hand chains for the hoisting and traverse mechanism shall hang well clear of the hook
and both the chains shall be on the same side. The hand chain wheel shall be made from
pressed sheet steel and shall be provided with roller type guarding to prevent snagging
and fouling of the chain.
d. All the gearing shall be totally encased. Proper lubricating arrangements shall be
provided for bearings and pinions. Gears shall be cut from forged steel blanks. Pinions
shall be of heat treated alloy steel. Gears shall be as per BS:436/IS:4460 (Part 1 to 3 –
1995).
e. The trolley track wheel shall be rim toughened, heat treated carbon steel or low alloy steel
or CI and shall be single flanged and shall have antifriction ball bearings. The wheels
shall be machined on their treads to match the flanges of the track joints.
Page 146 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
f. The traveling trolley frame shall be made of rolled steel conforming to IS: 2062. The side
plates of trolley frame shall extend beyond wheel flanges, thus providing bumper
protection for the wheels. The two side plates shall be connected by means of an
equalizing pin.
g. Axles and shafts shall be made of carbon steel and shall be accurately machined and
properly supported.
h. The lifting hooks shall be forged, heat treated alloy or carbon steel of rugged construction.
They shall be of single hook type provided with a standard depress type safety latch. They
shall swivel and operate on antifriction bearings with hardened races. Locks to prevent
hooks from swiveling shall be provided. Hook shall be as per standard specification.
i The brake for the lifting gear shall be automatic and always in action. It shall be of screw
and friction disc type self-actuating load pressure brake. Brakes shall offer no resistance
during hoisting.
j. If the offered pump set weight is more than the crane capacity specified, the Contractor
shall offer the crane capacity equal to or higher than the weight of the pump set.
18.41 Pipes and fittings (force main only)
a. Ductile Iron pipes shall conform to IS: 8329 (2000). All pipes and fittings shall be as per
drawings and specifications thereof.
b. The pipes shall be of uniform bore and straight in axis. Length of the straight double
flanged pipes shall be within a tolerance of +3mm.
d. The flanges of the straight pipes shall be square to the axis of the pipe. The faces of the
flanges shall be parallel. The bolt holes in one flange shall be located in line with those in
other.
e. The faces of the flanges of the fittings shall be square to the directional axes. The holes
shall be located symmetrically off the centre line. The intersecting axes of the tees shall
be perpendicular to each other.
f. The bolt holes on flanged pipes and fittings shall be drilled with the help of drilling jig.
The blank flanges are to be machined and drilled.
g. The dismantling joints shall be of cast iron with EPDM seal ring.
18.42 Sluice Gates
a) Design Requirements and Construction Features

i) The construction of sluice gates shall be in accordance with the Specification and
generally as per IS: 13349 (1992).
ii) The sluice gates shall be capable of performing the duties set in this Specification
without undue wear or deterioration. They shall be constructed so that maintenance
is kept to a minimum. All parts of sluice gate, including lifting mechanism
components shall be designed for the heads specified with a minimum safety factor
of five.
iii) All sluice gates shall be of the rising spindle type.
Page 147 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
b) Frame
The frame shall be of ample section and cast in one piece. All surface forming joints and
bearings shall be machined. The frame shall be of the flange back type and shall be
machined on the rear face to bolt directly to the machined face of the wall thimble.
c) Guide
i) Guide shall be bolted to the frame or cast integrally with it and shall be machined
on all bearing and contact faces.
ii) The length of guide shall be such that it should support the gate upon the horizontal
line of stem nut pocket.
iii) Arrangement shall be made to prevent lateral movement of bolted on guides. They
shall be capable of taking the entire thrust produced by water pressure and wedging
action. Wedges or wedge facings shall be attached securely to the guides at points
where, in the closed position, they will make full contact with the wedging surfaces
on the slides.
d) Seating Faces
i) Seating faces shall be made of full width, solid section, dove-tail strips of stainless
steel. They shall be secured firmly by means of counter sunk fixings in finished
grooves in the frame and slide faces in such a way as to ensure that they will
remain permanently in place, free from distortion and loosening during the life of
the sluice gates.
ii) The faces shall be of ample section and finished smooth. The maximum clearance
between the seating surfaces, with the slide in the closed position shall not exceed
0.10mm.
e) Wedging Devices
Sluice gates shall be equipped with adjustable side, top and bottom wedging devices as
required to provide contact between the slide and frame facing when the gate is in closed
position. All faces shall be machined accurately to give maximum contact and wedging
action. Wedges shall be fully adjustable with suitable adjusting screws and locknuts and so
designed that they will remain in the fixed position after adjustment.
f) Gate Slides
i) The slide shall be with strengthening ribs where required and a reinforced section
to receive the seating faces.
ii) The slide shall have tongues on each side extending its full length, and the tongues
shall be machined accurately on contact surfaces. Surfaces of the slide that come in
contact with the seat facing and wedges shall be machined accurately. The
maximum allowable clearances between the slide and the slide guide shall be
1.6mm.
iii) An integrally cast stem nut pocket with reinforced ribs shall be provided above the
horizontal centerline of the slide. The stem nut pocket shall be provided with drain.
g) Stem Nut and Lift Nut
Gate shall be provided with a lower fixed stem nut for connecting the stem to the slide and a
revolving lift nut located in the lifting mechanism in the headstock. They shall be of ample
design to endure the thrust developed during gate operation under maximum gate operating
condition loads in opening and closing direction. The stem nut and slide shall be constructed
Page 148 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
to prevent turning of the stem nut in the pocket in the slide. The stem be threaded and keyed
or threaded and pinned to the stem.
h) Stem
i) The operating stem shall be designed for a tensile strength to withstand a 90kg
effort on the crank and for a critical buckling compressive load assuming a 36kg
effort on the crank.
ii) The threads of the stem shall be machine cut or rolled and of the square or acme
type. The number of threads per inch shall be such as to work most effectively with
the lift mechanism used. The top of the stem be provided with a stop collar.
i) Stem Coupling
The coupling shall be threaded and keyed or threaded and bolted, and shall be of greater
strength than the stem.
j) Stem Guides
Stem guides shall be cast, with bushings and mounted on cast brackets. Guides shall be
adjustable in two directions and shall be so constructed that when properly spaced they shall
hold the stem in alignment. Number of stem guides shall be such that unsupported length of
stem shall not exceed one hundred times its diameter.
k) Lifting Mechanism
i) Sluice gate shall be operated through suitable lifting mechanism which shall
incorporate suitable gearing if required.
ii) Lifting mechanism shall be suitable for operation by one man under all conditions.
Lifting mechanism shall incorporate a strong locking device suitable for use with a
padlock or padlock and chain.
iii) The manual operator shall be of the hand wheel crank operated type and shall have
a lift nut threaded to fit the operating stem. Crank shall be removable. Ball or roller
thrust bearings shall be provide above and below the flange on the lift nut to take
the load developed in opening and closing the gate with a torque of 14kg-m on the
crank. Fittings shall be provided to lubricate gears and bearing.
iv) The design of the lift mechanism of the hand operated gates shall be such that the
slide can be operated with a torque of not more than 7 kg-m on the operator after
the slide is unseated from wedges based on the operating head. The maximum
crank radius shall be 380mm.
v) All gears and bearings shall be enclosed in cast iron housing with labyrinth seals.
The lifting mechanism shall be with a cast iron pedestal, machined and drilled to
receive the gear housing and suitable for bolting to the operating floor. The gates
shall close with clockwise rotation of the crank. The direction of rotation to close
the gates shall be indicated on the lift mechanism.
vi) A suitable means shall be provided for lubricating the stem threads directly
adjacent to the lift nut. An inspection cover shall be provided to access the lift nut
and gearing.
vii) Stem shall be provided with a GI pipe cover shall be fixed to the headstock.
viii) Portable type of electric actuator for closing and opening of sluice gates shall be
provided so that closing and opening operation time shall be maximum of 10
minutes.
Page 149 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
l) Fasteners
All anchor bolts, assembly bolts, screw, nuts, etc. shall be of ample section to safely
withstand the forces created by operation of the gate.
m) Wall Thimbles
i) Wall thimbles shall be made of cast iron and shall be supplied along with the gate.
The wall thimbles shall provide a rigid mounting, designed to prevent warping of
the gate frame during installation.
ii) The cross section of the thimble shall have the shape of the letter '
F’. The front, or
mounting flange, shall be machined and shall be drilled and tapped to the same
template used for its particular gate frame. The frame shall be attached to the
thimble with bolts of studs. The depth of the wall thimbles shall not be less than
300mm.
iii) To permit entrapped air to escape as the thimble is being encased in concrete, holes
not lesser than 35mm diameter at not more than 600 mm span, shall be cast or
drilled in each entrapment zone formed by the reinforcing ribs or the flange and
water stop.
n) Lifting lugs
Lifting lugs shall be provided for all gates.
18.43 Data Sheet for Pumps
Data given hereunder are the basis of provisions in the design. Tenderer shall review the
given data and furnish in his offer his recommendations on material of construction,
pumps sizes along with literature and performance curves, details of drive motor like HP,
RPM, and insulation protection.
Sr. Description Identification

No.
Zone I+II Zone III+IV
SPS-A SPS-B SPS-C SPS-D SPS-E SPS-A SPS-B
1. Type S S S S S S S
2. Duty +
Standby
3. Working I I I I I I I
4. Installation Under Under Under Under Under Under Under
Sewage Sewage Sewage Sewage Sewage Sewage Sewage
5. Liquid Raw Raw Raw Raw Raw Raw Raw
handled Sewage Sewage Sewage Sewage Sewage Sewage Sewage
6. PH
7. Consistency
8. Capacity, lpm
9. Head m
10. HP
11. Casing C.I. C.I. C.I. C.I. C.I. C.I. C.I.
12. Shaft S.S. S.S. S.S. S.S. S.S. S.S. S.S.
Page 150 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Sr. Description Identification

No.
Zone I+II Zone III+IV
SPS-A SPS-B SPS-C SPS-D SPS-E SPS-A SPS-B
13. Impeller Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze
14. Characteristic to be enclosed
curve
performance
S: Submersible Type I: Intermittent Working
18.44 Mechanical Drawings
a) The drawings and documents to be provided by the Contractor shall include the
following, but shall not be limited to those listed hereunder or in other relevant parts of
the Contract:
b) Drawings submitted by the Bidder with his bid shall be listed in the General Schedules
of the bid document. Such drawings shall show all the essential items of the Plant
offered together with sufficient details to enable the general arrangement of the Plant to
be determined.
c) The outline dimensional drawings submitted by the Contractor shall include the
following in addition to overall dimension:
Parameters of equipment
Load details
Support details
Foundation pocket details
(*) indicates the drawings/documents to be submitted)
Sr. Description To be To be
No. submitted submitted after
with the award of
the Tender the Contract
Outline Dimensional Drawing
1 Submersible pumps * *
2 Sluice valve - motor operated *
3 Non-return valve *
4 Air valve *
5 Metallic bellow *
6 EOT crane *
7 Sluice gate *
8 Lifting type screens with electric hoist *
9 Manual Bar screen assembly *
10 DG Set *
Page 151 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Sr. Description To be To be
No. submitted submitted after
with the award of
the Tender the Contract
11 Ventilation system for screen chamber

12 Propeller Exhaust fans *
13 Fire extinguisher *
Cross Sectional Drawing with Materials of Construction
14 Pump * *
15 Sluice valve - motorised * *
16 Non-return valve * *
17 Metallic bellow *
18 Pump Performance curves : Q Vs H, P, η & *
NPSH
19 Q Vs H curves super-imposed on system *
resistance curves
20 NRV: Velocity Vs pressure drop curve *
21 '
As built'GA drawing of pumping plant *
18.45 Submission and Approval of Vendor Drawings
The following shall be the procedure for submission and approval of vendor drawings:
a) The Contractor shall submit 5 copies (3 copies of drawings for Engineer and 2
copies drawings for the Engineer’s Representative) of the drawings to the Engineer.
All the drawings shall be signed by the Contractor or his authorized representatives.
All drawings shall have necessary certificate given by the firm on its body that the
drawings are as per the specification of the contract and the material of construction
is also as per the contract.
b) The Engineer shall review the drawings and, if found fit for approval, shall forward
2 copies to his representative recommending approval. The Engineer shall return 2
copies to the Contractor duly approved.
c) In case the drawings/documents are not fit for approval but worth for review, the
Engineer shall mark the comments on the drawings and return 2 copies to the
Contractor and 1 copy to his representative. In such case, the Contractor shall
resubmit the revised drawings within two weeks as per sub-clause (a) above and the
same shall be repeated till the drawings are finally approved as per sub-clause (b)
above.
d) If the submitted drawings/documents is not worth for review, the Contractor shall be
informed accordingly.
e) On receipt of the approved drawings as per sub-clause (b) above, the Contractor
shall submit additional 3 copies of the approved drawings to the Engineer for
reference and records.
After tests on completion, the Contractor shall submit, within 10 days of the conclusion
of the tests, dialers / tracings of the "As Built Drawings" to the Engineer.
Page 152 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
18.46 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
The operation and maintenance manuals shall be arranged to provide separate volumes
for each principal section of the Works and they shall relate to as-built conditions and
shall include all necessary drawings and diagrams for a proper understanding of the
Works.
The operation and maintenance manual shall cover all items of the Works and shall be
approved in draft form initially prior to commencement of erection. For this purpose,
three draft copies shall be submitted to the Engineer. A mere collection of
manufacturers’ descriptive leaflets will not be acceptable in satisfaction of this
Clause. The operation and maintenance manual shall comprise both operating
instructions and maintenance instructions.
The manuals shall include, but not be limited to the following information:
a) Descriptive overview of the whole of the Works.
b) Descriptions of all systems installed, including mechanical, electrical,
instrumentation, control systems with relevant design and operating parameters.
c) Descriptions of all equipment supplied including manufacturer' s leaflets, which
shall be scheduled for easy reference.
d) Schedules and manufacturer' s catalogues for all equipment supplied, giving duties,
electrical load, etc.
e) Schedules of all equipment suppliers (and their local agents) including names,
addresses, telephone, fax and e-mail numbers.
f) Start-up, operation and shut-down instructions for all parts of the Works. These
shall include step by step directions on setting the Plant to work listing all
adjustments and settings necessary for the current functioning of the Plant.
g) Instructions on monitoring of Plant performance and sample log sheets for each
Plant item, to be filled by operators on a routine basis.
h) "Dos" and "Don' ts" in Plant operation. Operator' s attention shall be drawn to all
operations considered to be dangerous to operators or likely to cause damage to the
Plant.
i) Procedures to deal with breakdown and emergencies
j) Safety requirements
k) Checking, testing and replacement procedures to be carried out on all plant items on
a daily weekly and monthly basis or at longer intervals to ensure trouble free
operation. Full maintenance instructions for all equipment including planned
maintenance schedules or charts giving daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, half
yearly, annual and overhaul instructions, together with recommended lubricants and
spares. These shall also include details of routine maintenance work that will be
within the competence of the normal maintenance staff and notification of
maintenance work that will have to be done by the manufacturer, his agent or other
specialist operator.
i) Fault locations and remedy charts to facilitate tracing the cause of
malfunctions or breakdown and correcting faults.
m) Complete list of recommended lubricants and lubrications charts.
n) A ' spares schedule'which shall consist of a complete list of item wise spares for all
Plant items with ordering references and part numbers.
o) A complete list of manufacturer' s instructions for operation and maintenance of all
bought out equipment. The list shall be tabulated in alphabetical order giving the
name of supplier/manufacture, identification of the Plant item giving the model
Page 153 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
number and the literature provided including instruction leaflets and drawing
numbers.
p) Step by step procedure for the dismantling, repair and re-assembly of all items of
equipment.
q) Part-list and drawings or exploded diagrams for each item of Plant with
construction particulars, materials of construction, mating components, clearances
and tolerances, maximum wear permitted before replacements are to be done, etc
r) Record drawings of all systems installed, including general arrangements, conduit
and wiring diagrams, control schematics and valve charts, etc., to a reduced scale.
s) Certified suppliers'drawings of all equipment supplied, which shall be scheduled
for easy reference
t) Site test reports for all mechanical, electrical and instrumentation systems. Site test
process reports for proving tests, commissioning reports, and supplier' s test
certificates.
The Contractor shall furnish 5 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Each
volume shall be durable and permanently bound within a stiff binder of a design to be
approved by the Engineer. They shall permit the subsequent incorporation of revisions
to be necessary during the Defect Liability Period.
*****
Page 154 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 19
ELECTRICAL WORKS
Table of Contents
Clause Description
19.1 General
19.2 Standards
19.3 Requirement of Statutory Authorities
19.4 Voltage Regulation
19.5 Ambient Temperature
19.6 Power Factor
19.7 HT supply
19.8 Condition of Operation
19.9 Motor Control Panel
19.10 Interlocking Arrangement
19.11 Inspection of Circuits
19.12 Labeling
19.13 Painting
19.14 Electric Motor
19.15 Cables and Cable laying
19.16 Push Button Starters for Actuators
19.17 Control Switches
19.18 Push Buttons
19.19 Indicating Lamps
19.20 Safety Equipments to be provided
19.21 Lighting System
19.22 Pressure Frequency
19.23 Point Wiring
19.24 Circuit Wiring
19.25 System of Wiring
19.26 Balancing of Circuits
19.27 Drawings
19.28 Cables
19.29 Rating of Lamp, Fans, Socket Outlet Points and Exhaust Fans
19.30 Joint and Looping Back
19.31 Control at Point of Entry Supply
Page 155 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Clause Description
19.32 Installation of Main Switch Gear

19.33 Indication Identifying Earthed Neutral Conductors
19.34 Main Switch Board
19.35 Bottom of Switch Board
19.36 Switch Board Recessed in Wall
19.37 Screening of Live Parts
19.38 Danger Notice Plate
19.39 Type of Switch Boards
19.40 Capacity of Circuits
19.41 Passing Through Walls
19.42 Fixing to Walls & Ceiling
19.43 Fittings
19.44 Wiring
19.45 Earthing
19.46 Battery, Battery Charger & DC Distribution Board
19.47 Diesel Generating Equipment
19.48 Power Capacitor
19.49 Cables
19.50 Painting.
19.51 Details of Tests
Page 156 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION – 19 : ELECTRICAL WORKS
19.1 General
Following clauses specify General Electrical requirements and standard of workmanship for
the equipment and installations. General specification Clauses shall apply where appropriate
except where particularly redefined in the Special Specification Clauses.
19.2 Standards
The equipment offered shall comply with the relevant Indian Standards. The equipment
conforming to any other approved International Standards, which is considered equivalent or
superior, shall be acceptable. The tenderer however, shall have to substantiate equivalence or
superiority.
19.3 Requirement of Statutory Authorities
The electrical equipment/installations shall comply with the requirements of

Rules/Regulation as amended up-to-date, required by Statutory Acts or Authorities.
1. The Indian Electricity Rules, 1956
2. The Indian Electricity Act.
3. The Indian Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948
4. The requirements of Chief Electrical Inspector to the Government of Chhattisgarh.
5. The requirement of Chhattisgarh State Electricity Board.
6. Fire advisory Committee Insurance Act.
The Contractor shall get the drawings, layouts of HT sub station, etc., approved from
Chhattisgarh State Electricity Board and Chief Electrical Inspector to the Government of
Chhattisgarh, wherever necessary. The Contractor also shall arrange to get the installation
inspected by Chief Electrical Inspector and carryout modifications/ rectification as required
and obtain safety certificate to commission the Sub-station, DG set and other electrical
equipments. However before submitting application to Electricity Board for HT or LT
supply, it should be ensured, the immediate requirement of maximum demand load in KVA
and specify load requirement clearly in the application. Further after ascertaining the actual
field condition and the probable time for inspection to be fixed by contractor that all
electrical equipments/ system are ready to commission. An application for HT supply
connection to be submitted to authority to avoids delay in commissioning the electrical
equipments.
19.4 Voltage Regulation
During starting of heavy equipment the voltage may drop by a maximum of 15% for
period of 45-60 seconds depending upon the duty of the driving equipment. All the
electrical equipment shall, therefore, be suitable for trouble free and uninterrupted
operation even during such voltage variation at the time of starting of heavy equipments.
19.5 Ambient Temperature
Page 157 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Where the equipment is installed outside and exposed to direct sunlight, these shall be
suitable for operation at higher ambient temperature and rigorous weather conditions under
which they are required to operate.
19.6 Power Factor
Suitable rating capacitors shall be connected to the LT system with switching arrangements
for a group of capacitor or individual capacitor as the case may be; to improve the Power
Factor up to 0.95. Automatic Power factor correction unit shall be provided to control (ON-
OFF) the capacitors with the help of suitably rated contactors in the circuit.
19.7 HT Supply
The Contractor shall ascertain the details of availability of HT supply from CSEB wherever
HT supply is to be availed and procure equipment accordingly.
19.8 Condition of Operation
The switch board shall not be exposed to moisture or corrosive gases. The Contractor shall
submit layout drawings showing the location of switch board and other equipment proposed
to be installed for the approval of Engineer.
19.9 Motor Control Panel
The motor control panel shall have the following equipments.
- Main switchgears ACB/ MCCB/ MCB, with required capacity in case of 415V motor
pump sets.
- ACB/ MCCB/ MCB or suitable circuit breaker to suit the motor capacity and voltage.
- Motor starter- Auto transformer/ Star Delta/Soft starter.
- Contactors
- Single phase preventer
- Ammeter with selector switch
- Voltmeter
- Pilot lamps for indication
- Trip Alarm
- Stop push button
- Start Push Button
- Addition equipments if any
Push Button Operated DOL Starter: DOL starter shall be of double break type and shall
incorporate air break contractor with bimetallic thermal electro magnetic overload relays on
all three phases with start/stop push button in front of switch board. The starter shall be
capable of 10 operations per hour. The DOL starter shall conform to IS-1822.
Star/Delta Starter: The push button operated Star/Delta Starter shall be of the fully
automatic type with an adjustable timer incorporated for automatic change-over from star to
Delta. The starter shall incorporate the electro magnetic or thermal type bimetallic overload
releases, pneumatic electro time delay relay, the solenoid coil operated under voltage release
and current operating single phasing preventer. The started shall conform to IS-1822-1967 or
latest.
Auto Transformer Starters: The auto transformer starter shall be of the fully automatic
type. For auto transformer starting, magnetically operated starting, accelerating and running
Page 158 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
contractors shall be provided either operating under solid state or electronic timing devices.
The auto transformer shall limit the starting current to 1.5 times full load current for motors
up to 100 HP and 1.25 times full load current for motor above 100HP with appropriate
tapping. The auto transformer shall be provided with one under voltage coil, three
magnetically operated overload, coils and a single phasing preventer relay.
One ammeter of ample capacity to take care of the starting current shall also be provided in
the starter.
Isolating Switches: Isolating switches shall be on load double break type and shall have
suitable current and voltage ratings. The "ON" and "OFF" position shall be clearly marked.
Isolators used for motor control circuits shall be of motor cut type, capable of carrying the
starting current of the motor.
The isolators shall conform to IS: 4046 and IS: 4237.
440V Contactors: The three pole contactors with minimum of 2NO + 2NC working
contacts and one number of 1NO + 1NC spare conductors shall be used. The contact made of
anti-weld silver cadmium shall be designed to give minimum bounce to ensure long contact
life. The rating of the contractor shall suit the motor and capacitor circuit duty. The
contractor shall be suitable for AC-3 duty in respect of making and breaking operations at
specified power factors. The contactors shall conform to IS: 2959.
Equipment wiring: All the switch boards, panels, annunciation panel and mimic panel shall
be neatly wired using 1100/660 volt grade PVC insulated stranded copper conductor cable of
minimum 2.5sqmm to suit the requirement. The wiring shall be bunched in groups by non-
metallic clips or bands. Each group shall be adequately supported along its run to prevent
sagging and string on the terminals.
19.10 Interlocking Arrangement
The control panels containing the contractors, relays, etc. shall be enclosed in free standing
steel sheet enclosure with front cover so interlocked with the isolator that the door cannot be
opened with isolator at ÒN'position. These panels shall be front wired, front connected and
provided with closing handles with ON and STOP mechanical indication having in built
locking system so that back access would not be required for inspection and maintenance.
The enclosure shall be dust and vermin proof type built using 2 mm. thick steel sheet while
doors and partitions may be fabricated from 1.6 mm thick sheet. Since the entry of cables of
the panel is generally from the bottom the cable gland supporting plate shall be mounted not
less that 600 mm above the floor level.
19.11 Inspection of Circuits
Facility for inspection of the circuits, to ascertain if all the Contractors, relays, fuses, etc. are
in proper working order/condition or otherwise shall be provided by means of a push button
or selected switch.
19.12 Labeling
Labels of switchgears shall indicate reference number of the switch, the specified current
rating and the part of the distribution controlled. Labels on circuit breaker boards shall
indicate the reference number of controlling switch. The lettering of all labels shall not be
Page 159 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
less than 5mm, high. The schedule and details of the labels shall be submitted to the
Engineer - in - Charge for approval.
19.13 Painting
The panels shall undergo chemical de-rusting sand blasting decreasing, pickling in acid bath
and phosphates as per IS; 6005 and primed. The panels shall be thoroughly rinsed with clean
water after phosphating, followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven
drying. The phosphate coating shall be sealed by the application of two coats of ready mixed,
stoving type zinc chromate primer.
Two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be applied, each coat followed by
stoving. The final finished thickness of the paint film on steel shall not be less than 100
microns and shall not be more than 150 microns. The color for the finishing paint shall be
bright battleship gray as per IS: 5 (Shade No.631). The finished painted appearance of panels
shall present and aesthetically pleasing appearance free from dust and uneven surface.
The paint shall withstand humid tropical climate, rain, etc. The paint shall not scale of or
removed by abrasion during normal handling.
Sufficient quantity for touch-up paint shall be furnished for application at site.
19.14 Electric Motor
19.14.1 General
Type : Squirrel case induction motor suitable for continuous duty.

Standards : Performance - IS 325, IEC 34
Dimensions - IS 1231, IEC 71
Site conditions : Ref. Ambient -45 oC
Max humidity - 100%
Cast iron body with integral feet and frame. The stator core shall be that of high grade carlite
insulated low loss silicon steel lamination stacked together and fully tightened. The rotor
shaft made of high grade forged/rolled steel. A spacious terminal box is to be provided to
accommodate aluminum conductor cables.
Technical Particulars : Rated voltage: 415V+110%

Frequency: 50Hz+3%
Temperature rise of 75oC over ambient of 45 oC
Enclosure: IP 55
Type of cooling: Totally enclosed fan cooled
Motor (kW) Frame size min
37 225S
75 280S
110 315S
Acceptable makes Siemens, NGEF, CGL, and KEC
19.14.2 Supply Voltage and Characteristics for Motors
All LT motors shall be squirrel cage motor and the motor shall be suitable for the following.
Supply voltage : 415 Volts, 3 Phase, 50 Hz AC supply

Voltage variation : + 10%
Frequency variation : + 5%
Page 160 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Combined variation of
Voltage & Frequency : 10%
All motors shall be foot / flange mounted squirrel cage induction type and shall be capable of
developing at least 10% more power than demanded by the pump or driven equipment over
its entire range of safe operation.
Motors shall be continuous maximum rated as per IS: 325 and IS: 4722 (latest edition) and
preferably be designed for low starting current and smooth acceleration except for cases
where the driven equipment characteristic demand otherwise. Motors shall be of 4/6/8 pole
design fitted with ball roller bearings and provided with one or more terminal boxes large
enough to accommodate armored PVC insulated aluminum conductor of appropriate ratings.
19.14.3 Motor Winding
Motor winding shall be insulated with Class F insulation with temperature rise limited to
Class B rating as per IS: 325 and IS; 4722 over an ambient temperature of 45 0C. The pull
out torque of the motors at rated voltage and frequency shall preferably be 200% of FLT in
each motor above 5.5 KW rating. Motors shall be suitable for star-delta / or Direct on Line
starting.
19.14.4 Starting Current for Heavy Motors
However, when LT motors are switched on with full voltage applied onto their terminals, the
starting current shall be limited to 550% of full load, current for squirrel cage induction
motors. All LT motors shall be squirrel; cage type.
19.14.5 Motor Protection
All motor shall be provided with protection to IP 55. For hazardous location flame and
explosion proof enclosures shall be provided. Appropriate water proof enclosures shall be
provided to outdoor electric panels and starters, to provide sufficient protection from rains,
dust, vermin etc.
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for rotating electrical machinery shall conform
to the requirements of IS: 4691. Flame proof motors shall comply with relevant specification
of mine safety requirements and other applicable specifications for this type motors
including IS: 5571.
Space heaters of adequate capacity shall be provided to prevent moisture condensation. They
should be automatically switched on when the starter is in OFF condition.
19.14.6 Motor Testing
Testing of motors shall comply with the requirements of IS: 4029. Dimensions of foot
mounted motors shall comply with the requirements of IS: 1231. Generated values of
efficiency and power factors at full load and 3/4 load shall be furnished by the tenderer.
19.14.7 Motor starting arrangements
Individual Motor starters / panels for 415 volt 3 Phase 50 Hz Motors shall be as below:
- For Squirrel cage motors up to 3.7 kW : Direct-on-line

- Squirrel cage motors above 3.7kW to 38kW : Star-delta starters
Page 161 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
- For motors exceeding 38kW : Auto transformer or any other soft

starters acceptable to CSEB.
Each control panel / starter shall incorporate isolator, HRC fuse contactors, timing relays,
overload relays, single phase preventer, Hour meter (for pump running hours) etc.
appropriate for the scheme of control. Contactors shall be of AC 3 duty (minimum).
Contractors rating for each motor shall be at least 25% higher than the full load current of the
motor and contractor shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2959, IS: 4237 and IS:
10118. Reversible starters shall be provided wherever necessary. Motor starter rated 30kW
and above shall be provided with auxiliary relay for motor space heater.
19.15 Cables and Cable Laying
19.15.1 Following type of cables shall be used.
1. For HT Power Supply : 3Core, XLPE, 11KV, Armoured Aluminum

cable (E)
2. For LT Power Supply : 3.5Core, 3.0Core or 2.0Core 1.1/0.66KV PVC
insulated, PVC sheathed armoured cables.
3. For control cables : Multi-core, multi stranded copper cable minimum
2.5 mm2 with PVC insulation, armoured and PVC
sheathed.
The minimum size of control cable shall not be less than 2.5 mm2.
All cables shall be suitably derated for grouping and higher ambient temperature. For
selecting cable sizes, 45 oC ambient temperatures shall be taken as base.
The cables shall conform for LT to IS: 1554 - Part I and for HT to IS: 7098 - Part - II.
19.15.2 Cable Accessories
All accessories like cable glands, lugs and terminal markings etc. shall be used conforming
to relevant standards / as specified. The end termination for HT cables shall be heat
shrinkable (Raychem/ equivalent) type. For 1.1KV grade cables double compression gland
and crimping type lugs shall be used.
19.15.3 Cable Laying
Cable laying and termination shall be such that chances of cable getting damaged are remote.
LT cable shall be laid in cable trench, on trays or buried underground with appropriate
protection. All LT cables when laid on the cable trays shall be properly dressed and clamped
as required without crisscrossing and unnecessary overlapping. Cables shall be properly
dressed and clamped. The color codes shall be Black for neutral, Red, Yellow and Blue for
three different phases.
Laying of HT and LT under ground cables
The laying UG cables on ground by excavating a trench of 1.2metre depth for HT cable and
0.75m depth for LT cable, and cables laid. The cables shall be protected by good quality
brick on the sides and top of the cables and fill up top layer with sand.
Page 162 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
In routing, necessary barriers and spacing shall be maintained for cables of different voltages
in case they lie side by side. Telephone cables shall cross the power cables only at about right
angles and these two shall not run in close proximity.
LT cables shall be bent in radius not less than 12 times their individual overall diameters,
while HT cable shall have bends not less than 15 times their individual overall diameter.
Routes of these cables shall be arrived at on the basis of the relevant drawings and after
consulting the Engineer-in-charge.
19.15.4 Drawings and Schedules
Size of cables shall be given in singe line power diagrams. A cable schedule shall be
prepared on the basis of relevant drawings. All cables and wires shall be adequately sized to
carry continuously the normal currents expected on the relative circuits. All trenches for
electrical cables shall be separate from water or sewage pipe line trenches.
19.15.5 Splicing and Termination
Straight through joints shall be avoided. In case, these are absolutely necessary they shall be
made at convenient locations suitably protected as approved and sanctioned by the Engineer-
in-charge. Compression type cable and glands shall be used for cable connections. Double
compression cable end glands shall be used. Cable glands shall be brass with cadmium or
nickel plating. Tinned copper lugs shall be used for copper cable termination while
Aluminum lugs shall be used for Aluminum cable termination but in no case within the
conduit pipes or ducts. Branch circuit wiring shall be spliced, only in switch boxes, panel
switch socket outlet boxes light fixtures outlets and circular junction boxes. They shall be
made only with approved porcelain connectors.
19.15.6 Cables shall be tested in accordance with IS: 1554 / 7098
19.16 Push Button Starters for Actuators
The push button stations shall be of die cast aluminum, robust, vermin proof having two
Earthing terminals with (a) switch element 1NO + 1 NC and (b) 1 NO + 1 NC The push
button shall be weather proof or flame proof type as specified. It shall be positive in contact
opening with self wiping contacts. The push button station shall be with push buttons RED-
ON, GREEN - OFF, AMBER - TRIP and Black - REVERSE and lockable in off position
with key. The degree of protection for element shall be IP: 65. The rating shall be 10 Amps
at 415V AC. The mounting of the push button station shall be as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.
19.17 Control Switches
Control and instrument switches shall be of rotary type flush mounting having enclosed
contacts which are accessible by the removal of cover and shall be provided with properly
designated scutche? on plates clearly marked to show the operating positions.
Control switches shall have momentary contacts, spring return to centre with pistol grip
handle. Instrument and selector switches shall have oval knob.
19.18 Push Buttons
Page 163 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Push Buttons shall be momentary contact type with rear terminal connections. The color of
the push buttons shall be "Green" for start and "Red" for stop. Whether required, the push
button shall be suitably shrouded to prevent inadvertent operations. They shall be provided
with integral inscription plates engraved with their functions. The contact element shall have
at least 1 No. and 1 NC contacts. The contacts shall be able to make and carry at least 6
Amp. at 415 AC.
19.19 Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps (LED Type) shall be panel mounting type with rear connection. The lamp
shall have translucent lamp cover, of suitable color. The cover shall be oil and dust proof
poly-carbonate lenses. The bulb and lenses shall be interchangeable and replaceable from
front of the panel.
19.20 Safety Equipments to be provided
The contractor shall provide the following safety equipments as per IE rules, on the HV
panels, Generator panels, control panels and main MV panel-rooms.
1. Rubber mat conforming to IS 5424 in front of all the HT and MV panel for their entire
length - 1000m wide.
2. Sufficient pairs of electrically tested rubber gloves. These are to be kept in a suitable
wooden box.
3. A shock treatment instruction chart in Local Language and English duly framed as
detailed in IS: 1355. The nearest medical facility available with phone number shall also
be kept.
4. First aid box containing full compliments of medicines for treatment of electrical burns
in the main switch room.
5. Adequate number of portable fire extinguishers of dry powder (store type) as per IS:
935 to suit the individual substation, pumping station requirement.
6. Adequate number of caution notices in Local Language and English shall be fixed
permanently on the equipment to comply the requirement of IE rules.
7. Safety posters for vigilance against electrical accidents as per IS: 1255.
8. Adequate number of fire buckets with MS angles stand.
9. 4 Nos. round bottom fire buckets marked fire shall be provided in the HT sub stations.
19.21 Lighting System
The definition of terms shall be in accordance with the Indian Standard Code of Practice for
Electrical working installation IS: 372 except for the definition of a "Point". The wiring and
the equipments shall comply in all respects with the requirement of rule 50 and 51 of IE
rules/56 as amended from time to time. The wiring and other electrical equipments shall be
suitable for trouble free operation at variation of voltage and frequency prescribed in IE
rules.
19.22 Pressure Frequency
Page 164 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Pressure and frequency of supply all current consuming devices shall be suitable for the
pressure and frequency of the supply to which these are to be connected and shall
function at variation voltage and frequency as per IE rules.
19.23 Point Wiring
Point wiring shall include all work necessary to complete wiring from switch circuit of any
length from the tapping point on the distribution circuit switch board to the following.
- Ceiling rose for fans, Lighting etc.
- Socket outlet (in the case of socket outlet points).
- Lamp holder (in the case of wall brackets, batten points, bulk head and similar fittings).
- Call bell buzzer (in the case of the works "via the ceiling rose / socket outlet or bell push
where no ceiling rose / socket outlet is provided).
19.24 Circuit Wiring
Circuit wiring shall mean the length of wiring from the distribution board up to the tapping
point of the nearest first points of that circuit, viz., up to the nearest first switch board
measured along the run of wiring.
19.25 System of Wiring
The complete wiring facility system shall conform to the requirements of all relevant local
codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in the specification
and drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the Engineer-in-charge.
A. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the contractor shall take the following
precedence:
1. Engineer’s decision;
2. Local codes of practice;
3. Drawings;
4. Specification;
5. International standards and requirements
Submissions
A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of
construction.
Routing of installation
B. Sample of proprietary factory-made accessories, elbows, risers, reducers, tees, crosses, etc.
Products
STEEL CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Conduit:
1. All conduits shall be of heavy gauge solid drawn ERW welded manufactured out of 16
(1.6mm) gauge MS Sheet up to 32mm dia and 14 (2 mm) gauge for sizes above 32mm.
2. Both inner and outer surfaces shall be smooth without burrs, dents and kinks.
Page 165 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
3. Conduits shall be black stove enameled inside and outside. The cross section of conduit
shall be uniform throughout.
4. The welding shall be uniform such that welded joints do not yield when subjected to
flattening test. Welded joint shall not break when threaded or bent at an angle.
5. Conduit shall conform to specifications of IS: 9537 (Part-II) and the capacity of
conduits shall be in accordance with the standards
6. The minimum size of the conduit shall be 19/20mm diameter.
7. Care shall be taken to ensure that all conduits are adequately protected while stored at
site prior to erection and no damaged conduit is used.
B. Fittings:
1. Samples of conduit fittings shall be submitted for approval prior to use on work.
2. Fittings shall be those intended for use with screwed conduits and shall comply with IS
9537. However, bends, elbows and tees shall not be installed.
3. Boxes and cover plates installed outdoors shall have fixing lugs exterior to the box so
that fixing screws do not enter the box interior.
4. Adaptors used with flexible conduits shall conform to IS: 9537.
C. Circular Boxes:
1. Circular boxes shall be of malleable cast iron, galvanized and of standard pattern with
spout(s). When used for connecting lengths of conduits, circular boxes shall be
provided with cover plates of similar make that are complete with brass fixing screws.
D. Rectangular Boxes
1. Rectangular boxes (adaptable boxes) shall be of mild steel not less than 2.4 mm gauge
and galvanized. When used as junction boxes, lids of the same gauge with brass fixing
screws shall be used.
E. Boxes for Accessories
1. Boxes for accessories shall be suitable for surface mounting or recessed mounting
according to the requirements. Surface mounted boxes and accessories shall be metal
clad pattern. Recessed boxes and accessories shall be complete with insulated molded
type cover plates conforming to IS: 5133 Part I-1969.
F. Covers
1. All covers for boxes, etc shall be made of galvanized steel of 1.2mm thickness.
PVC Conduit and Accessories
Page 166 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
A. PVC Conduit
1. All conduits shall be high impact rigid 2mm thickness PVC heavy duty type and shall
comply with I.E.E. regulations for non-metallic conduit as per IS-9537/1983 (Part-III).
2. All sections of conduit and relevant boxes shall be properly cleaned and glued by using
epoxy resin glue and the proper connecting pieces.
3. Inspection type conduit fittings such as inspection boxes, drawn boxes, fan boxes and
outlet boxes shall be of M.S. or otherwise mentioned.
4. Conduit shall be terminated with adopter/PVC glands as required.
B. Accessories
1. Accessories used for conduit wiring shall be of an approved type conforming to IS:
3837-1966.
2. All accessories used shall be of standard white or black color, identical to conduit used.
3. Plain conduits should be jointed by slip type of couplers with manufacturer’s standard
sealing cement.
4. All conduit entries to outlet boxes, trunking and switchgear are to be made with
adaptors female thread and male bushes screwed.
5. PVC-switch and socket boxes with round knockouts are to be used. The colors of these
boxes and the conduits shall be the same.
6. Standard PVC circular junction boxes are to be used with conduits for intersection, Tee-
junction, angle-junction and terminal. For the drawing-in of cables, standard circular
through boxes shall be used.
7. Samples of accessories shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.
8. All jointing of PVC conduits shall be by means of adhesive jointing. Adequate

expansion joints shall be allowed to take up the expansion of PVC conduits.
Conduit Installation
A. Layout:
1. The conduit layout and conduit routes shall be submitted for approval. Allowance for
adjustments due to site conditions shall be made at no extra cost.
2. Conduit routes shall be chosen for easy, straight runs with minimum bends and
crossings. Generally they shall follow the structure of building, running at right angles
or in parallel to floors and ceilings. Conduits shall be kept within 300 mm of floors and
ceilings when running parallel to them.
3. Outlet boxes for housing accessories shall be used as draw boxes. The total number of
draw boxes shall be kept to a minimum and shall be provided so that conduit runs do
not exceed 12 m or have more than two right angle bends.
Page 167 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
4. All conduits shall be kept clear of gas and water pipes. In particular, conduits shall be
at least 150 mm away from gas pipes. Where proximity to these pipes is unavoidable,
they shall be effectively segregated e.g. using rubber or other insulating material to
prevent appreciable voltage differences at possible points of contact. Segregation from
extra low voltage circuits and telecommunication circuits shall also apply unless these
are wired to the same voltage requirements as lighting and power circuits.
5. Conduits from different distribution boards shall not be connected to the same junction
box. Each run of conduit shall be assembled complete with draw-in-wires.
Joints And Terminations:
1. Electrical and mechanical continuity shall be maintained throughout all conduit joints
and terminations. Conduit threads shall be thoroughly cleaned and tightly screwed.
The conduit system shall be watertight after installation.
2. Conduits shall be connected using couples or via boxes. With a coupler, the ends of the
conduit shall butt close together and the running coupler is screwed tightly on and
tightened by a locknut.
3. Conduits terminating into boxes provided with spouts shall be threaded so that there are
no exposed threads. For boxes with no spouts, the termination shall be made using a
brass bush and a coupler. The conduit is pushed through the knockout or drilled entry
and the bush is screwed tightly onto its end. The coupler is screwed to butt firmly
against the exterior wall of the box.
4. Where conduits are not jointed or terminated in boxes, they shall be terminated in a
screwed brass bush.
5. In all joints and terminations, conduit threads shall not be exposed. Where this cannot
be avoided as in a running coupler, the exposed threads shall be coated with red lead
paint to seal against the ingress of water.
Bends:
1. Conduits shall only be bent cold with an approved type of bending block or bending
machine, without altering the dimensions of their sections.
2. All conduit bends shall be such as to permit compliance to the requirements for bends
in cables to as stated in the BS 7671.
3. Bends shall be made with as large a radius as the position of the conduit within the
building permits. Where the bend is more than 90 degree, circular or rectangular
junction boxes are to be used for connecting conduits.
Cabling:
1. The conduit system must be installed free of obstructions and sharp corners before any
cables are drawn in. Conduits shall be thoroughly swabbed to remove moisture and dirt
immediately prior to the drawing in of cables.
2. Cables shall be drawn without crossing each other and shall not be pulled against the
walls of the draw boxes. Slack cables shall left in all draw boxes.
Page 168 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
3. Cables shall be continuous throughout conduit lengths and no joints are permitted.
There shall be no kink in cables, neither any cut, abrasion or chink in the cable
insulation.
4. The same conduit shall carry the lead and return conductors bunched together.
However, the same conduit shall not house cables from different distribution boards.
5. Cables for power and lighting circuits and extra low voltage systems shall not be drawn
into the same conduit. Lighting and power circuits shall run in separate conduits
except, where an adopter box is employed as final distribution point, a number of final
circuits are grouped together in larger conduits between the distribution board and the
adopter box provided that all final circuits in one conduit are of the same phase. In the
case of three phase circuits, all three phases including neutral, if any, shall be drawn
into the same conduit.
6. Conduits shall not constitute the earth continuity path for the electrical circuit. A
separate circuit protective conductor shall be installed within the conduit. The whole
conduit system shall be effectively earthed.
7. Flexible conduits shall have a separate earthing conductor installed within the tubing
and connected at conduit ends. Flexible conduits in general shall not be used for more
than 3m length.
8. Maximum number of PVC insulated 650/1100 V grade/copper conductor cable

conforming to IS:694-1990
Nominal 20mm 25mm 32mm 38mm 51mm 64mm

Cross-Sectional
area of Conductor S B S B S B S B S B S B
in Sq. mm
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1.50 5 4 10 8 18 12 - - - - - -
2.50 5 3 8 6 12 10 - - - - - -
4 3 2 6 5 10 8 - - - - - -
6 2 - 5 4 8 7 - - - - - -
10 2 - 4 3 6 5 8 6 - - - -
16 - - 2 2 3 3 5 5 10 7 12 8
25 - - - - 3 2 5 3 8 6 9 7
35 - - - - - - 3 2 6 5 8 6
50 - - - - - - - - 5 3 6 5
70 - - - - - - - - 4 3 5 4
Note:
i. The above table shows the maximum capacity of drawing in of cables in conduits
ii. The columns Head ‘S’ apply to runs of conduits which have distance not exceeding 4.25 m
between draw in boxes and which do not deflect from the straight run by an angle of more
than 15 degrees. The columns heads ‘B’ apply to runs of conduit which deflect from the
straight by an angle of more than 15 degrees.
iii. Conduit sizes are the nominal external diameters.
Access and Drainage
1. The conduit system shall be rewirable, that is, draw boxes must be accessible for the
purpose. Where boxes are concealed, their covers shall be flushed with the finished
surface.
Page 169 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
2. The need for accessibility notwithstanding, the conduit system shall be protected against
the ingress of water and impurities. When installed, conduits shall be kept dry and free of
debris with approved pipe plugs or caps. Such plugging is especially essential prior to
pouring concrete for concealed installation. As for boxes, they shall be covered by steel
plates prior to concreting.
3. When installed outdoor, and in situations liable to condensation of moisture, conduits

shall be arranged to be self draining, so that water may drain to low points which are
fitted with a drain plug. Conduits laid under concrete floors shall have watertight floor-
traps of approved detail for access of these drainage points.
4. Conduits run on surfaces other than structural steel members shall be secured using
galvanized space bar saddles and brass fixing screws. Spacing of saddles shall not exceed
1.2 m for conduit sizes up to and including 25 mm and 1.8 m for sizes 32 mm and above.
5. Conduits run on structural steel shall be secured using girder clips or an approved clamp.
These conduits and those run in the vicinity of structural steel shall be bonded to the
steelwork using an efficient and permanent metallic connection. The conduits shall not in
any way be under mechanical stress.
6. All conduit boxes except loop-in patterns shall be fixed direct to the building structure in
addition to the support provided by the conduits.
7. Conduits terminating into surface boxes shall be secured by a minimum of 3 saddles at

not less than 32 mm, 150 mm and 300 mm respectively from the box.
8. Conduits shall be painted with an approved paint to blend with visual environment. A
zinc rich undercoat shall be provided before painting the final coat.
19.26 Balancing of Circuits
The balancing of circuits in three phase installations shall be arranged before hand to the
satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
19.27 Drawings
All wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly in plan, the main switch board, and the distribution
fuse board, the run of various mains and sub-mains and the position of all points with their
classification.
19.28 Cables
All cables to confirm the relevant Indian Standard. Conductors of all cables except the
flexible cable shall be of aluminum.
The smallest aluminum conductors for the final circuit shall have a nominal cross-sectional
area of not less than 2.5sq.mm. The minimum size of aluminum conductors for power wiring
shall be 4.0sq.mm. (1/2.24mm)
19.28.1 Flexible Cable
Conductor of flexible cable shall be of copper. The minimum cross-sectional area of

conductor for flexible cable shall 0.0006 sq. inch (14/0.0076 inch).
Page 170 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Unless the flexible cables and conduits are protected by armour or rubber of PVC sheath,
these shall not be used in work shops and any other places where they are liable to
mechanical damage.
3.0Core flexible cable shall be used for connecting single phase appliances.
19.29 Rating of Lamp, Fans, Socket Outlet Points and Exhaust Fans
Incandescent lamps installed in pump house & other means shall be rated at 60 watts and
100 watts respectively.
Table fans and ceiling fans shall be rated at 60 watts. Exhaust fans shall be rated according to
their capacity.
6 & 16Amps Socket outlet points shall be rated at 100 watts and 1000 watts respectively,
unless the actual values of load are known or specified.
19.30 Joint and Looping Back
Unless other wise specified the wiring shall be done in the "Looping System". Phase of live
conductors shall be looped at the switch box and neutral conductor can be looped from the
light, fan or socket outlet. In non-residential buildings, neutral conductor and earth conductor
and earth continuity wire shall bought to each switch board situated in each room and halls.
These shall be terminated inside the switch boards with suitable one number 5Amps. Socket
outlet and control switch boards with suitable connectors and the switch board shall be of
adequate size to accommodate one number 5Amps. Socket outlet and control switch in
future.
19.31 Control at point of Entry supply
These shall be a linked main switch gear with fuse on each live conductor of the supply
mains at the point of entry. The wiring throughout the installation shall be such that there is
no break in the neutral wire except in the form of a linked switch gear. The neutral shall also
be distinctively marked. In this connection rule 33(2) of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956
shall also be referred.
19.32 Installation of Main Switch Gear
The main switch gear shall be installed as near as practicable to the termination of service
line and shall be easily accessible without the use of any external aid.
19.33 Indication Identifying Earthed Neutral Conductors
On the main switch gear, where the conductors include an earthed conductor of a two wire
system or a conductor which to be connected thereto, an indication of a permanent neutral
conductor. In this connection Rules 32(1) of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 shall be
refereed.
19.34 Main Switch Board
All main switch gear shall be of metal clad and shall be fixed at close proximity to the point
of entry of supply.
Page 171 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Open type switch boards shall be fixed only in dry area and in well ventilated rooms and
they shall not be placed in the vicinity of storage batteries and exposed to chemical fumes,
Toilets, above gas stores etc.
Switch Boards Exposed to Weather shall be weather proof and the wiring shall be
accordingly.
19.35 Bottom of Switch Board
A switch board shall not be installed so that its bottom is within 1.25 m above the floor
unless the front of the switch board is completely enclosed by a door, or the switch boards, is
located in a position to which only authorized person have access.
19.36 Switch Board Recessed in Wall
Switch board shall be recessed in the wall if so specified in the schedule of work or in the
special specifications.
Equipments which are on the front of a switch boards shall be so arranged that inadvertent
personnel contact with live parts is unlikely during the manipulation of switch gears,
changing of fuses or like operations.
19.37 Screening of Live parts
The various live parts unless they are effectively screened by substantial barriers of non-
hygroscopic, non-flammable, insulating material shall be so placed that an arc cannot be
maintained between such parts and earth.
19.38 Danger Notice Plate
All switch boards connected to medium voltage and above shall be provided with "Danger
Notice Plate", conforming to relevant Indian Standards.
19.39 Type of Switch Boards
Metal clad switch gear shall preferably be mounted on any of the types of boards mentioned
below.
19.39.1 Hinged Type Metal Boards
Such boards shall be suitable for mounting of metal clad switch gear consisting of not more
than one switch gear and ICBD 4way or 6way Metal Box shall consists of a box made of
sheet not less than 3 mm thick and shall be provided with a hinged cover enable the boards to
be swung open for the examinations of the wiring at the back. The joints shall be
subsequently welded. Metal boards may be made of suitable size angle iron of maximum
size f 25 mm x 35 mm x 6 mm or channel iron of minimum size of 25 mm x 25 mm x 6 mm
frame work suitably mounted on front with a 3 mm thick M.S plate and on back with 1.5m
M.S. sheet. The front sheet shall be provided with suitable hinges to enable the board to be
swung open for examination of the wiring. The joints shall be substantially welded.
The boards shall be securely fixed to the wall by means of rag bolts and shall be provided
with a locking arrangement and earthing stud. All wires passing through the metal boards
shall be bushed. There shall be a clear distance of 3 cm. between the front and back sheets.
More space shall be allowed wherever necessary.
Page 172 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
A wooden board to thickness not less than 6 mm. may be provided at the back, if so required
in the special specification in any particular.
No apparatus shall project beyond any edge of panel. No fuse body shall be mounted within
2.5cms. of any edge of panel.
19.39.2 Fixed Type metal board
Such boards shall be suitable for large switch boards for mounting large numbers of switch
gears and / or higher capacity metal clad switch gear.
These shall consist of an angle of channel iron frame fixed on the wall at the top. There shall
be a clear distance of 1 m. in front of the switch board.
The connections between the switch gear mounting and the concerning cable up to the wall
shall be enclosed in a protection pipe.
The detailed dimensions and design of metal boards and angle from frame work for switch
gears including the disposition of the various mountings which shall be symmetrically and
neatly arranged for arriving at the over all dimensions shall be prepared and submitted before
hand and have the prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
19.39.3 Marking of Apparatus
When a board is connected to voltage higher than 250 volts all the terminals or loads on the
apparatus mounted on it shall be marked in the following colors to indicate the different
poles of phases to which the apparatus or its different terminals may have been connected.
AC Three Phase : Red, Blue and Yellow

Neutral : Black
When four wire three phase wiring is done, the neutral shall preferably be in one color and
the other wires in another color.
Where a board has more than one switch gear each such switch gear shall be marked to
indicate which section of the installation it controls. The main switch gear shall be marked as
such. Where there is more than one main switch board in the building, each switch board
shall be marked to indicate which section of the installation and building it controls.
All markings required under this rule shall be clear and permanent.
All distribution boards shall be marked `Lighting'or `Power'as the case may be and also
marked with the pressure and number of phases of the supply. Each shall be provided with
a circuit, diagram and the current rating of the circuit and size of the fuse element.
19.39.4 Main and Branch Distribution Boards and their Locations
Unless otherwise specified in the special specification main and distribution fuse boards
shall be the metal clad type.
Main distribution Boards shall be controlled by a linked fuse unit and a circuit breakers.
Each outgoing circuit shall be provided, of MCCB /MCB with SP / TP as per requirement.
Branch Distribution boards shall be controlled by a MCCB /MCB. Each outgoing circuit
shall be provided neutral conductor shall have provision for disconnecting individually for
Page 173 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
testing purpose. At least 20% spare circuit breaker of the same capacity shall be provided on
each branch distribution board.
19.40 Capacity of Circuits
Lights and fans may be wired on a common circuits, such circuit shall not have more than a
total of ten points of light, fan and socket outlet or a load or 800 watts whichever is less.
Power circuits on buildings shall be designed with a maximum of two outlets per circuit,
based on the loading.
Where, not specified the load shall be taken as 1 KW per outlet. Wherever the load to be fed
is mote than 1 KW it shall be controlled by an isolator switch or miniature circuit breaker.
19.41 Passing through Walls
When conductors pass through walls, any one of the following methods shall be employed.
Care shall be taken to see that wires pass very freely through protective pipe or box and that
wire pass through in a straight line without any twist or cross in wires, on either ends of
such holes.
A conductor shall be carried in an approved heavy gauge solid drawn or lap welded conduit
or in a porcelain tube of such a size that it permits easy drawings in. The ends of conduits
shall be neatly bushed with porcelain, wood or other approved material.
Where a wall tube passes outside a building so as to be exposed to weather, the outer end
shall be well mounted and turned downwards and properly bushed on the open end.
19.42 Fixing to Walls and Ceiling
Plug for ordinary walls or ceiling shall be of well seasoned teak or other approved hard
wood not less than 5 cm. long by 25 cm. sq. on the inner and 2 cm. sq. on the outer end.
They shall be cemented into walls within 6.5 mm of the surface the remainder being finished
according to the nature of the surface with plaster. Where owing to irregular coarsing or
other reasons the plugging of the walls or ceiling with wood plugs present difficulties, the
wood casing, wood batten or metal conduit shall be attached to the wall or ceiling in an
approved manner. In the case of white washing plugging of walls or ceiling can be done in a
better way where neatness is the first consideration. In all such case approver type of
asbestos or fiber fixing plug (Raw or Phil plug) with correct size of tees shall be used and
done in a workman like manner.
19.43 Fittings
Lights, fans and sockets outlets shall be so located as to provide maximum comfort to the
occupant and to enable him to utilize the electricity in the most economical manner.
Where conductors are required to be drawn through tube or channel leading to the fitting, the
tube or channel must be free from sharp angles or projecting edges.
Non-flammable shade form a part of a light fitting against all risks of fire, celluloid shade or
light fitting shall not be used under any circumstances. Vitreous enameled iron shade shall be
or size 250 mm x 90 mm (nominal) size with a tolerance to 5 mm). Plastic shade shall not be
generally used in the fittings suitable for incandescent lamp.
Page 174 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Enclosed type fittings shall be provided with a removable glass receptacles, arranged to
enclose the lamp completely and of such size of construction as to prevent undue heating of
the lamp, or if the position of fittings be such that the glass shall be protected by a suitable
wire guard. The loads of pre-wired fixture shall be terminated on ceiling rose of connector.
External light fittings and lamps shall have weather proof fittings of approved design so as to
effectively prevent the admission of moisture. An insulating distance piece of moisture proof
material shall be inserted between the lamp holder nipple and the fittings.
In verandahs and similar exposed situations, where pendants are used they shall be of
fixed rod type. Bulk head type fittings shall be of cast iron/cast aluminum body suitably
painted white inside and gray outside complete with heat resistance glass cover, P.C.
holder and wire guard suitable for 100 watts incandescent lamp. Wherever specified
gasket for cover and shock proof B.C. holder shall be provided. Fluorescent tube light
fittings of 40W/80W fixed type shall be provided in general for conservation of energy
and less maintenance.
19.43.1 Accessories
All switches shall be paced in the live conductor of the circuit and no single pole switch or
fuse shall be inserted in the earth or earthed neutral conductors of the circuit.
19.43.2 Socket Outlets
Every socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch.
The switch controlling the socket outlet shall be on the `Live'side of the line.
15Amps socket outlet shall normally be fixed at any convenient space 23cms. above the
floor level or near such levels in special cases as desired by the Engineer-in-charge. 15Amps
switch and socket should be integral provisions of an indicator diode. The switch for 5 Amps
socket outlet shall be kept along with socket outlet. However, in special case, if desired by
the Engineer-in-charge the 5Amps. Socket outlet shall be kept at normal switch level and
that for 15Amp along with the socket outlet. However, in special case, if desired by the
Engineer-in-charge the 5 Amps socket outlet shall be placed at the normal switch level. 15A
sockets shall have MCB/fuse with peep lamp indicator.
Where socket outlets are placed at lower levels, they shall be enclosed in a suitable metallic
box, as the case may be to harmonies with the system or wiring adopted.
In an earthed system of supply a socket outlet and plug shall be of the three pin type. The
third terminal shall be connected to earth.
Conductors connecting electrical appliance with a socket outlet shall be of flexible twin cord
with an Earthing core which shall be secured by connecting between the earth terminal of
plug and the metallic body of the electrical appliance.
19.43.3 Attachment of Fittings and Accessories
In case of conduit wiring, all accessories like switches sockets, outlets, call bell pushes and
regulators shall be fixed in flush pattern with wall. Accessories like ceiling roses, brackets,
battens, stiff pendants, etc. shall be fixed on metal outlet boxes.
Page 175 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Aluminum alloy or cadmium platted over screws shall be used to fixing the accessories to
their bases. The blocks/board shall normally be mounted with their bottom 1.25 m from floor
level. The Boards shall have a sun mica finish.
19.43.4 Fans, Regulators and Clamps
Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.
All ceiling fans shall be wired to ceiling roses or to a special connector boxes and suspended
from hooks or shackles with insulators between hooks and suspension rods. Joints are not
allowed in the suspension rod.
For concrete roofs ceiling fan hooks shall be buried in the concrete during construction. M.S.
flat of size 40 mm x 6 x mm bent in the form of an inverted Ù'supported on two cross rods
or cross flats. 60 mm long which are bound together to the top reinforcement of the roof
shall be used. the distance between the vertical legs shall not be less than 15 cm. and the
legs shall project at least 13 com below the ceiling and oval holes shall be made in them for
carrying a 15 cm dia rod hook.
Alternatively a 15 mm dia, M.S. rod in the shape of Ù'with their vertical legs bent
horizontally at the top at least 19 cm. on either side and bound to the top reinforcement of
thereof shall be used.
In building with concrete roofs having a low ceiling height where the fan clamp mentioned
under clause (c) can not be used or whatever specified recessed type fan clamp inside a case
iron box, shall be used.
Canopies on top of suspension rod shall effectively the suspension.
Unless otherwise specified all ceiling fan shall be hung 2.75 M above the floor.
In the case of measurement of extra down rod for ceiling fan including writing the same
shall be measured in units of 10 cms. Any lengths less than 5 cm. shall be ignored.
19.43.5 Exhaust Fans and Luminaires
19.43.5.1 Exhaust Fans
Exhaust fans shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards.
Exhaust fans shall be fixed at the places indicated by the engineer-in-charge. For fixing an
exhaust fan, a circular hole shall be provided in the wall to suit the size of the frame, which
shall be fixed by means of rag bolts embedded to the wall. The hole shall be neatly plastered
to the original finish of the wall. The exhaust fan shall be connected to exhaust fan pointing
which shall be wired as near to the hole as possible by means of a flexible cord, care being
taken that the blades rotate in the proper direction.
Exhaust fans for insulating in corrosive atmosphere the exhaust fan shall be painted with a
special PVC paint or chlorinated rubber paint (Chloro rubber paint).
Installation of exhaust fans at locations need careful consideration. The regulations of ceiling
fans/exhaust and regulators shall be connected to earth by loop earthing.
Page 176 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
19.43.5.2 Indoor Decorative Luminaires
Luminaire shall be suitable for use with twin T.L. 40 watt 1200 mm (4' ). 240V fluorescent
lamps, comprising of CRCA sheet steel channel stove enameled gray which incorporates all
electrical accessories like quick fit lamp holder, starter holder, polyester filled ballast, power
factor correction capacitor and duly pre wired upto the terminal block, with earthing
arrangement facility, cover made for channel from CRCA sheet stove white enameled
covering the channel fixed by twin screw, suitable for ceiling or pendent mounting suitable
for 19 mm dia conduit, reflector plate for acrylic diffuser and end covers, complete in all
respects ready for use. The luminaire shall conform to IS: 1913.
19.43.5.3 Industrial Luminaire
Lumnaire shall be suitable for use with twin T.L 40 watts 1200 mm (4' ),240 V fluorescent
lamps comprising of Rail made of CRCA sheet steel stove enameled white, incorporates all
electrical accessories like quick fit lamp holders, starter holder, polyester filled ballast and
power factor correction capacitor and duly provided upto the terminal block with earthing
arrangement facility suitable for ceiling or pendant mounting suitable for 19 mm conduit
with stove enameled reflector gray outside and white inside which can be installed without
aid of any; tools, complete in all respects and ready for use.
The luminaire shall conform to IS : 10322.
19.43.5.4 Emergency Light
Emergency light unit working on 230 volts. A.C. supply shall be self containing unit with
20 watts 600 mm long florescent lamp type `SWITCH ON MAIN FAILURE’. It shall be
electronic automatic fluorescent type which incorporates a unit trickle charge circuit, which
shall prevent overcharging or battery. The battery shall be maintenance free. The unit shall
provide 4 hours illumination following power failure. The units shall generally conform to
IS : 9583.
19.43.5.5 Gate Lights
The gate lights shall be of post top lantern type, weather proof, and suitable for
H.P.S.V./metal halide lamp 70/150 watts and shall conform to IS 2149.
G.I.Pipes of suitable diameter shall be provided at gate concrete pillar as conduit for wiring
and fixing post top lantern luminaries.
The post top lantern shall be suitable for use with one number 70 watt H.P.S.V./metal halide
lamp.
The luminaries shall comprise of a single self contained dia cast Aluminium housing
M.B.V. treated, incorporating the ballast, power factor improvement capacitor and ignitor,
non-hygroscopic lamp holder all pre-wired upto terminal block. The housing shall be
suitable for 60 mm O.D. mounted on post-top.
Opal white one piece double conical dome made of vandal proof high density polyethylene
resistant to ultra violet radiation and heat shall be provided. The degree of protections shall
be 43. The housing shall be die cast Aluminium MEV treated. The pressure ring shall be dia
cast Aluminium M.B.V. treated.
19.43.6 Outdoor Yard Lighting
Page 177 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
19.43.6.1 Poles
Street light poles shall be steel tubular swaged type 152, 127,106.6 mm dia. 4.5, 4.5, 2.65
mm thick (4 x 2.25 x 4.25), 8.5 metres long with M.S base plate with pipe cap and over
hung 2 meters long having dia to suit the socket of 70/150 watts. 240V, High pressure
sodium vapour lamp or metal halide fitting, conforming to IS :2713 - 1969.
19.43.6.2 Outdoor Luminaire
The luminaire shall be 1 x SON - 70/150 watts H.P.S.V. Or Metal Halide Lampe
complete with all accessories and shall be.
Deep drawn Aluminium reflector stove enameled gray outside and brightened and
anodized inside lined with felt gasket to prevent insect entry.
Die cast Aluminium housing covered with a lid shall be provided to accommodate all
electrical accessories, such as independent ballast, powers factor improvement
capacitor, wired upto terminal block.
A clear acrylic cover shall be fixed to the reflector by means of 4 toggles.
The luminaries shall be mounted on the mast arm of 50 mm O.D . Mirror compartment
and tray compartment shall have degree of protection IP 43 and IP 33 respectively. The
reflector shall be manufactured of drawn Aluminium sheet and be painted to stove
enamel gray outside and brightened and anodized inside.
The housing shall be die cast Aluminium -A6 Grade MBV treated covered with acrylic
sheet clear.
19.43.7 Flood Lights
Flood lights luminaries shall be H.P.S.V. SON - 250 W/ 250V lamp complete with all
accessories. he luminaries shall comprise of:-
Housing made of aluminum alloy of low copper content for greater corrosion resistant,
cooling fins shall be provided for effective heat designs. The housing shall accommodate
reflectors made form, highly purity Aluminium elector chemically brightened and
anodized.
The housing shall be closed from the front by heat resistant toughened glass with silicon
gaskets and held in a ring.
The rear cover also made of cast Aluminium alloy of low copper content shall be
provided with cooling fins. The rear cover shall accommodate a lamp holder, a lamps
support internal earthling terminal, reflector stup. The lamp holder should be duly wired
upto or terminal block. The luminaire shall be using in conduction with the suitable
control gear box. Degree or protection shall be IP -54.
The housing shall be of cast Aluminium LM 6 Grace (High Silicon and low copper)
M.B.V.treated. The housing bracket shall be. M.S hot dip galvanized.
The reflector casing shall be high purity Aluminium electrochemically brightened and
anodized.
Page 178 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
The front cover glass shall be heat resistant and toughened provided with gasket silicon
rubber.
19.44 Wiring
19.44.1 Surface Conduit Wiring System
PVC conduits pipes of approved gauge thickness shall be used. The maximum number of
PVC insulated 660 volts grade copper conductor cable that can be drawn in one conduit of
various sizes and the number of cables per conduit shall not be exceeded. The minimum
PVC conduit disconnecter shall not be less than 25 mm.
In long distance straight run of conduit, inspection type junction box at reasonable intervals
shall be provided.
19.44.2 Fixing of Conduit
Conduit pipes shall be fixed by heavy gauge clamps, secured to suitable PVC plugs or other
approved plugs with screws in an approved manner at an interval of not more than one metre
but on either side of the couplers bends, or similar fittings, saddles shall be fixed at a
distance of 30 cm from the centre of such fittings. The saddle should not be less than 24
gauges for conduits up to 25 mm dia. and not less than 20 gauges for larger diameter.
Where conduit pipes are to be laid along the trusses, steel joints etc. the same shall be
secured by means of ordinary clips or girder lips as required by the Engineer-in-charge.
Where it is not possible to drill holes in the truss members, suitable clamps with bolts and
nuts shall be used. The width and the thickness of the ordinary clips or girders clips and
clamps shall not be less than as stated below:
19.44.3 Switch Box
Switch box shall be made of metal on all sides, except on the front.
In the case of cast boxes, wall thickness shall be at least 3 mm and in case of welded mild
steel sheet boxes the wall thickness shall not be less than 18 gauge for boxes, up to a size of
20 cm x 30 cm and above this M.S. boxes shall be used. Unless otherwise stated 3mm thick
phenolic laminated sheets, like sun mica shall be fixed on the front with brass screws. Clear
depth of the box shall not be less than 60 mm and this shall be increased suitably to
mounting of fan regulators in flush pattern. All fittings shall be flush pattern. Only a portion
of the above box shall be sunk in the wall, the other portion being projected out for suitable
entry of conduit pipes into the box.
19.44.4 Recessed Conduit Wiring System
Recessed PVC conduit wiring system shall comply with all the requirements of surface
conduit wiring system specified in clauses above and in addition to the requirements
specified in the following clauses.
The chase in the wall shall be neatly made and out ample dimensions to permit the conduit
to be fixed in the manner desired. In the case of buildings under construction, fixed work,
specials care shall be taken to fix the conduit and accessories in position along within the
building work, to avoid damage to the finished wall etc.
All outlets such as switches, wall sockets etc. shall be flush type.
Page 179 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
The outlet box shall be same as above and shall be mounted flush with the wall. The metal
box shall be efficiently earthed with conduit by an approved means of earth attachment.
14 SWG G.I wire shall be provided to facilitate drawings of wire in the conduit while laying
of recessed conduit.
19.45 Earthing
Earthing in general shall comply with C.P. (Code of Practice) 3043 of Indian Standards.
Earth electrode either in the form of pipe electrode or plate electrode should be provided at
all premises for providing Earthing system.
As far as possible, all earth connection shall be visible for inspection and shall be carefully
made.
Except for equipment provided with double insulation all the non current carrying metal
parts of electrical installation are to be earthed properly. All metal conduit trunking cases.
Sheets, switch gears, distribution fuse boards, lighting fittings and all other parts made of
metal shall be connected to an effective earth electrode.
The main earth electrode should be G.I perforated pipes/GI or Copper plate (as per
requiment) driven into the soil as per standard practice continuous looped Earthing should be
provided with adequate size G.I. wire /feat. Earthing work should conform to I.E. Rules.
The electrodes shall be situated at a distance not less than 3.0 m from the building fencing
structure and equipment foundations. The earth pit shall conform to IS: 3043 and GI earth
electrodes of not less than 100 mm external dia. shall be driven to a depth of at least 3m in
the ground below the ground level. The surrounding the electrodes, soil shall be treated up
with salt, coke and charcoal.
Earth electrodes shall be installed near the main supply point and shall comprise a Pipe of
appropriate diameter driven to depth of 3metres below ground level, or to a greater depth, if
so required to obtain a sufficiently low earth resistance value. Alternatively copper plate
mesh to be used as the main earth electrode conforming to IS: 3043. The electrodes shall be
driven at least 3 m away from the building or any other earth station.
Minimum requirement of earth pits as per I.E. rules are as under:
- Two numbers independent for transformer body

- Two numbers independent for transformer neutral
- Two numbers independent for four pole structure
- One number for lightning arrestors.
- Two numbers of L.T. panel at sub-station and at pump house.
19.45.1 General
A resistance between Earthing system and the general mass of earth shall not be greater
than 1 ohm.
B The earth loop resistance to any point in the electrical system shall not be in excess of
0.5 ohms in order to ensure satisfactory operation of protective devices.
C The resistance to earth shall be measured at the following:-
Page 180 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
1. At each electrical system ground or system neutral ground.

2. At one point each grounding system used to ground electrical equipment enclosures.
3. At one point each grounding system used to ground wiring system enclosures such as
metal conduits and cable sheaths or armored.
A. All Earthing conductors shall be of high conductivity copper/ G.I. and able to protect
against mechanical damage as per BOQ. The cross-sectional area of earth conductor
shall not be smaller than half that of the largest current carrying conductor. However,
the contractor shall use the sizes specified in the bill of quantities of the Tender.
Common earth mats of resistivity of less than one (1) ohm shall be constructed below
the lowest floor structure prior to any ground work construction. The earth mats shall
comprise the complete earth electrodes, earth strips/grids, earth inspection chambers,
earth leads, main earth terminals, earth test link boxes at ground level, etc. Each
individual Earthing system shall have earth leads connecting its main earth terminal
directly to an earth electrode underground as specified.
B. All Earthing products/accessories shall be in accordance to IS standards.
C. The mating surface of all tapes at joints etc shall be cleaned before clamping and
riveted with proper connector or exothermic welded. All connections to electrical
apparatus shall be made by bolted connection in a visible and accessible position
19.45.2 Pipe Earth Electrode
A. G.I. pipe shall be of medium class 100mm dia. and 3m in length.
B. G.I. Pipe electrode shall be cut tapered at bottom and provided with holes of 12mm dia.
drilled not less than 7.5cm from each other up to 2m of length from bottom.
C. The electrode shall be buried in the ground vertically with its top being 20cm minimum
below ground level.
D. Clamping of the earth leads to the earth rod shall be made by earth clamp. The clamps
shall be capable of providing high pressure contact between the earth rod and the earth
leads to achieve low contact resistance.
E. When two or more electrodes are driven to form a group, the heads of the electrodes in
the group shall be bonded to each other by means of a 25 mm x 3mm GI / Copper strip,
laid at a depth of at least 600 mm in soil.
F. Recommended water seal insert sleeve approved by Engineer-in-charge shall be

provided with all earth electrode penetrations through basement water proofing
membranes and the installation be done under strict supervision.
19.45.3 Plate Earth Electrode
A. The plate earth electrode shall consist of copper plate or G.I. plate as per item of work.
The plate electrode shall be buried in ground with its faces vertical and top not less than
4.5m below Ground level. The plate shall be filled with charcoal dust and common salt
filling, extending 15cm around it’s on all sides.
Page 181 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
B. A watering pipe of 50mm dia. of medium class G.I pipe shall be provided.
C. The top of the pipe shall be provided with a funnel and a G.I. mesh screen for watering
the earth. In the case of pipe electrode a removable plug shall be provided.
D. The Earthing lead from electrode onwards shall be suitably protected from mechanical
injury by suitable dia. medium class G.I. pipe in case of wire and size according to strip
size.
E. The overlapping of strips at joints shall done in approved manner
a. GI strips shall be riveted with rivets/ bolted and welded.
b. Copper strips shall be riveted with rivets/ bolted brass nuts, bolts and washers and
brazed.
F. The protection pipe within ground shall be buried at least 30 cm deep (to be increased to
60cm in case of road crossing and pavements).
G. The portion within the building shall be recessed in walls and floors to adequate depth.
H. In the case of plate earth electrode the Earthing lead shall be securely bolted to the plate
with two bolts, nuts, check nuts and washers.
I. In case of pipe electrode it shall be connected by means of a through bolt, nuts and
washers and cable socket.
J. Main Earthing conductor is taken from the earth electrode with which the connection is
to be made.
K. No earth pit shall be fixed within 1.5 M of a wall of foundation. The location of the
earth electrode will be such where the soil has reasonable chance of remaining moist.
Effort shall be made to locate them in grass lawns or near flower beds or water taps.
19.45.4 Earth Inspection Chamber
A. Earth electrode shall be fitted with a heavy-duty precast concrete inspection chamber/pit
complete with heavy-duty cover as specified on drawings.
B. For earth electrodes located outside or on the apron of the building, earth inspection
chambers shall extend to a depth of not less than 300 mm below finished ground level
and kept free of soil. For earth electrodes located inside building, earth electrodes shall
be buried not less than 100 mm below the floor slab structure. Each earth electrode shall
be clearly marked ‘Safety Electrical Earth Connection – Do Not Remove’.
C. The chamber and cover shall be heavy duty detail to consider the traffic load at the
location of installation. The cover shall be recessed cover to receive the Architectural
floor finish at the location of installation.
19.45.5 Earth Strip
A. Earth strips/grids shall be of bare GI/ Copper strips of 25 mm x 3 mm as specified.
Page 182 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
B. Earth strips shall be riveted or joint with proper connector to earth electrodes
underground below the floor slab structure, and shall be buried not less than 300 mm
below the floor slab structure.
C. In order to minimise the mutual inductance between strips, earth strips shall be positioned
at a distance not less than 6m apart unless otherwise specified.
EARTH BONDING
Circuit Protective Conductor
A. Circuit protective conductor (CPC) is a system of conductors joining together all exposed
conductive parts and connecting them to the main earth terminal.
B. The purpose of circuit protective conductor is to provide a path for earth fault circuit so
that the protective device will operate to remove dangerous potential differences during a
fault condition.
C. The circuit protective conductors shall take the form of separate cable with a sheath in
green/yellow color or copper tape of minimum size 25mm x 3mm.
D. All exposed non-current carrying metal parts of light fittings, switchgears, motors,
enclosures, etc. shall be effectively earthed by circuit protective conductors for earth
continuity protection.
E. For equipment where an earth terminal is provided, the earth continuity wire shall be
firmly clamped. Where no earth terminal is provided, the exposed metal part shall be
cleaned of paint and surface rust before welding the earth continuity lead.
F. The minimum size of the principal protective conductors shall be in accordance with to
the current edition of IS: 3043/ BS7671 and BS7430.
G. The external earth terminal on the outside of the end panel of any switchboard shall be
connected to the main earth bar provided in two independent points.
H. Circuit protective conductors shall be provided in electrical and mechanical rooms and
along the routes for the bonding of all exposed conductive parts and extraneous
conductive parts. A suitably sized earth terminal shall be provided at each zone of the
building for this purpose.
I. All exposed conductive parts shall be effectively connected in an approved manner to the
principal protective conductors. The circuit protective conductors shall be single core
copper cables or high conductivity annealed copper tapes specified. Unless otherwise
specified, the minimum cross-sectional area of the circuit protective conductors shall be
selected in accordance with IS:3043/ BS7671:
19.45.6 Earthing Of Lighting Poles
All external poles are to be looped together with continuous 8 SWG GI earth wire clamped
at dollies provided on every fuse box of poles and looped onwards to the other pole. Every
fifth pole shall be connected to earth through an earth electrode.
Page 183 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
19.45.7 Earthing For Lighting Installation
This shall be common grid system, the main grounding conductor laid and embedded in
concrete being grounded at earth pits outside the buildings at approved locations or other
places. The Earthing of L.T. panels shall be connected to two main grounding conductors
each of which along with main cables shall run with cables to distribution boards in which
floor. This shall run along with th4 cable and at the top floor be connected same section
completing the grid.
19.45.8 Sizes Of Earthing Conductors
S System Earthing conductor size and Material

No
Buried in ground/ above ground concrete
1 Main earthing grid 40 x 10 mm GI Flat -

11kV outdoor sub-station 40 x 10 mm GI Flat 50 x 6 mm GI Flat
and 11 kV switchgear
2 415V switchgear suitable to its rating Suitable to its rating.

Transformer, DG set,
Capacitor Control Panel
- Battery charger -25 x 3 mm GI Flat
- 415 VLT Motors
- Valve motors 10 SWG GI wire
- 0 - 15 HP 8 SWG GI wire
- 15 - 40 HP 4 SWG GI wire
- 40 - 50HP 25 X3 mm GI flat
- 50 HP and above 25 X6 mm GI flat

- Lighting distribution Board, 25 X 3 mm GI flat
30 V DC Tripping Unit.
- Local Push Button stations, 14 SWG GI wire

Junction Boxes.
- Lighting and receptacle system 12 SWG GI wire
- Earth Electrode 50 mm dia. 3000 mm long heavy-

duty GI Pipe electrode
- Street lighting Poles 8 SWG GS wire
Notes: 1. Conductors above ground shall be galvanized steel to prevent atmospheric

corrosion.
2. Conductors buried in ground or embedded in concrete shall be galvanized steel.
3. The typical Earthing details shall be shown on drawing.
Page 184 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
19.46 Battery, Battery Charger & DC Distribution Board
Work Description
A. The Battery Charger Unit shall consist of rectifier/battery charger, batteries, protective
devices and accessories as specified herein that will automatically maintain the
continuity of DC electrical power within specified tolerances, without interruption, upon
failure or deterioration of the normal power supply. Continuity of DC electric power to
the load shall be maintained during the power failure period with the supplied by the
batteries, for the duration as specified or until restoration of the normal power supply as
required to meet the Civil Defence code requirement.
B. Single module system shall have the rectifier / charger and all the necessary monitoring
and control functions contained in a single metallic cabinet. Multi-module system shall
have separate cabinet containing the rectifier / charger and the necessary monitoring and
control functions for each module, and with a separate dedicated cabinet to house the
system control and monitoring functions.
C. All equipment except portable equipment shall be firmly held in place. Fastenings and
supports shall be adequate to support their loads with a minimum safety factor of three
(3) times.
Standards
A. The complete Battery Supply System shall be engineering and constructed in accordance
with the latest revision of the following standards and the appropriate BS/IEC:
1. BS7671 - Code of Practice for Electrical Installations
2. BS7430 - Code of Practice for Earthing
3. BS5266 - Code of Practice for the Installation and Maintenance of

Emergency Lighting and Power Supply Systems in
Buildings
4. BS 727 - Specification for Radio-Interference Measuring
Apparatus
5. BS 800 - Specification for Radio-Interference Limits
6. BS 4417 - Specification for Semi-conductor Rectifier Equipment
B. The manufacturing of the cable shall also conform to the requirements of all relevant
local codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in this
Specification and Drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the
Engineer
C. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the following
precedence:
(i) Engineer’s decision;
(ii) Local codes of practice;
(iii) Drawings;
(iv) Specification;
(v) International standards and requirements.
Page 185 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Quality Assurance
A. Battery Supply System ratings shall be the final effective values after the application
of all appropriate derating factors. These ratings shall be adjusted to suit local
conditions, viz. maximum room temperature, etc.
B. All battery shall be heavy duty type of minimum life span of 5 years.
Battery Units
A. The battery shall have sufficient capability to perform the function with safety factor of
1.2. When sizing the AH capacity of the battery, the effect of ageing shall be taken into
consideration.
B. The AH capacity of the battery supplied shall be greater than the calculated AH
requirement, but shall not be less than 20 AH. Every if the calculated AH requirement is
less than 20 AH; the battery must still be rated at 20 AH.
C. The charger shall have sufficient capacity to restore a depleted battery to 80% full
capacity in less than 8 hours.
D. Each battery unit shall consist of nickel-cadmium cells. The nickel cadmium cell shall
comply with requirements specified in IEC 623. The nominal capacity in ampere-hours
shall be the capacity for five-hour discharge (C5). The cell shall be of a type suitable for
medium rate or high rate discharge (i.e. rate of discharge = 3 C5 to 7 C5) Cells of low
rate of discharge is not acceptable.
E. The compartment housing the electrical and electronic components shall be the top
compartment and shall be fully segregated from the bottom compartment which shall
contain the cells. Both compartments shall be well ventilated. If the cells are arranged in
two or more rows, the rows shall be constructed in steps such as the maximum and
minimum electrolyte level markings of each cell shall be visible looking from the front.
At least 300 mm clearance from the top of the cells of the top row shall be provided to
facilitate maintenance.
F. The charger shall be manufactured to provide a well regulated DC supply to the load
while float-charging or quick-charging the battery. The charger shall be the constant
potential current limiting fully automatic type. The charger shall automatically switch to
float-charge after the battery is restored to 80% of its nominal capacity under
quick-charge. Quick-charge shall be "ON'automatically after an emergency discharge
and the duration of quick-charge shall be less than 8 hours.
G. The float charge voltage shall be adjusted to give minimum electrolyte/water

consumption and long maintenance interval. The float charge voltage shall not vary by
more than ± 2% of the set value irrespective of AC input voltage variation of ± 10% and
of load variations from 0% to 100%. The rms ripple voltage across the battery shall not
exceed 1% of the nominal output voltage.
H. The charger shall be protected against low battery voltage and short circuit at the output
by employing current limiting feature. It shall also be protected against reverse battery
voltage. High speed fuses shall be used for protection on DC output, transformer
secondary, rectified or Thyristor stack.
Page 186 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
I. The charger shall be manufactured to operate continuously at a temperature of 50°C. To

ensure long service life for the charger, all semi-conducting devices (e.g. diodes, SCR,
transistors, integrated circuits).
J. The following instruments and control shall be provided on the charges:

1. Mains on/off input circuit breaker with "Mains On: neon or LED indicator".
2. Boost selector switch.
3. On/Off push button for quick checking of the condition/capacity (good/bad
indication) of the battery. When the push button is depressed the battery shall be
allowed to discharge through a resistor for duration of three seconds. If the voltage
drop is negligible for that duration the battery shall be considered as in Good
condition.
4. Voltmeter to measure charger/battery output.
5. Ammeter to measure charger output.
6. Earth fault alarm indication.
7. Under voltage alarm indication.
8. Charger failure alarm indication.
9. Low electrolyte level alarm indication.
10. Terminals for outgoing DC bus wires to the switchboard and for incoming AC
supply.
11. All visual alarm indication shall be of the LED type with its function clearly
indicated. The use of embossing tape for labeling is not acceptable.
K. The following items shall be supplied:

1. Hydrometer and thermometer.
2. Special tools and fittings required to assemble the battery.
3. Two liters of distilled water and battery filler.
4. A tin of petroleum jelly.
AC / DC Control Panel
A. A main A.C. panel shall be provided for the control of all the AC circuits.
B. The panel shall be suitably rated for the size of the Battery Supply System.
C. The panel shall be an ON-OFF switch with fuse protection with suitable terminals for an
incoming supply lead and outgoing bus wires to the Battery Supply System.
D. The A.C control panel may be accommodated in the same cabinet of the Battery Supply
System.
E. Suitable rating MCBs and terminals for an incoming supply lead and outgoing bus wires
to the Battery Supply System switchboard shall be provided.
F. The AC control panel may be accommodated in the same cabinet as the controls for the
battery charger. All outgoing circuits e.g. DC control circuits, motor charging circuit,
etc. shall be protected by miniature circuit breakers. A spare outgoing AC sub-circuit
controlled by MCB shall be incorporated in the battery charger unit.
G. The function of each MCB shall be clearly indicated and the labeling shall be riveted to
the enclosure. A spare outgoing DC circuit shall be provided at each battery charger unit
and the labeling of its function to be carried out by the Contractor.
Connecting Cables
Page 187 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
A. Connecting cables between the load and battery unit shall be neatly run on cable trays
supplied by the Contractors.
B. The connecting cables between the load and battery unit shall be at least 4 mm in size
and shall be run in a ring configuration. Physically, the cables for entry and exit of the
same loop should not be the same. All wiring and termination of connecting cables shall
be carried out by the Contractor. Conductors used for AC and DC circuits shall not be
mixed in the same multi-conductor cable.
Execution
A. The contractor shall provide properly qualified installation and commissioning personnel
and a sufficient number of properly qualified erectors to carry out the work. The erection
commissioning personnel and erector shall be subject to Engineer' s approval. The
contractor shall, upon the request of the Engineer, remove any erection and
commissioning personnel or erector who, in the Engineer' s opinion, is incompetent or
has been conducting himself improperly and shall replace the commissioning personnel
or erector so removed with another acceptable to the Engineer.
B. The erection and commissioning personnel shall represent the contractor on the site and
directions given to him shall be deemed to be given to the contractor. It is the
contractor's responsibility to provide efficient and continuous supervision of the work at
site.
DC system rated for 48 V shall be provided for feeding the control supply to the switch-
gear panels in switch gear room.
The DC system shall comprise of lead acid sealed type, accumulators having 24 cells, 2
Nos. battery charger and DC distribution board. There shall be 4 Nos. stand by cells with
an arrangement of removable links to alternatively change the set of 4 cells in service /
stand by position.
The set of DC batteries shall be mounted either on Teakwood stand duly painted with
acid proof paint or on masonry stand covered with acid proof tiles.
There shall be two nos., float and boost type 48 volts DC battery chargers with automatic
/ manual change over from float to boost charging depending upon the battery condition.
One of these two battery chargers shall be in service at a given time and other shall be
stand by. The battery shall be rated for 150 ampere - hours with a nominal voltage of the
complete bank at a voltage of 48V, capable of supplying 30 Amps for 5 hours.
The charger and DC distribution board shall be enclosed on a common sheet steel
enclosure with necessary compartment for each incoming and outgoing feeder.
Complete information regarding battery layout, space requirement for locating battery,
wall painting of battery room floor, ventilation, method of lighting etc. shall be supplied
by the Contractor. The battery room shall preferably be located inside MCC room as
shown; the battery room shall have acid proof tiles as flooring and upto 4 ft. level. Also
there shall be an exhaust fan of appropriate capacity to extract vapors from the room.
Tests
Batteries and battery chargers shall be routine tested before despatch,in accordance with
Indian Standards. Capacity test shall be carried out on the batteries at site after installation.
Page 188 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
19.47 Diesel Generating Equipment
Electrical power supply for each pumping station will be availed from nearby CSEB
supply point. According to the load requirement HT at 11 KV or LT at 415V - 3 Phase
will be availed from CSEB.
One Diesel driven alternator set of capacity as specified in the special specification shall be
provided to permit operation of the Pumping Station in the event of failure of the CSEB
electricity supply, complete with all equipments like.
Control gear, circuit breakers, cabling, synchronizing equipment etc.
The Contractor shall also make his own calculations with regard to the rating of the
generating set(s), which shall each be large enough to start and run the pumping equipment
but which shall not be less than that stated above, at a power factor of 0.8. The continuous
rating of the motors shall be used to calculate the maximum demand.
A 10 per cent margin of the capacity of the total load shall be allowed for contingencies and
spare capacity.
The engine alternator sets shall be designed such that the starting power peak shall not
exceed 10 per cent of the continuous engine rating and the voltage dip shall not exceed 15
per cent whilst starting the connected load under the worst conditions.
The Contract Drawings show the building, floors and other details as they will be
constructed and the space allocated for the generating plant, control gear and circuit breakers.
If any departures from the proposed layout are necessary the Contractor shall show the
modifications on the drawings submitted with his Tender, and shall can attention to these
suggested alterations.
Tenderers attention is specifically drawn to the operating conditions where by generator sets
could be running at little or no load due to the intermittent and differing flow rates and pump
capacities.
A system using dummy loads to maintain a safe minimum working level is envisaged and
the Tenderer is required to comment upon this or any other proposed system at the time of
Tender submission together with supporting documentation and calculations.
19.47.2 Mode of Operation
Although it is intended to staff each site on a 24 hour basis, the starting, running up, loading
and paralleling of units shall normally be carried out automatically or by manual control.
Where provision of starting automatically the following sequence shall apply:-
The loss of power shall be detected by mains monitoring relays associated with the main
incoming circuit breakers.
The mains monitoring relays shall give a signal to the Generator Switchboard and sound an
audible alarm, warning staff to standby for generator start up.
After a time delay, to be determined, achieved by pan adjustable timer, 0 -15 minutes, the
station incomer shall open together with the 4-pole air break changeover contractor. The
delay is to allow for a possible restoration of supply via the incoming feeder.
Page 189 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
When the time delay has expired, the station incomer and change over contractor have
opened and a visual and audible warning has been given, the first or only duty engine shall
start up.
When the unit has achieved the correct voltage and frequency, it shall automatically switch
"on bus bars", followed immediately by the closure of the appropriate generator circuit
breaker and changeover contractor. The visual and audible alarms shall then be canceled.
Mode of operation
Air circuit breakers shall comply with the requirements of section 5 and shall be 240 V. A.C.
motor wound spring charged with a 240V. A.C. shunt trip coil. Trip and charge batteries
shall be separate.
The circuit breakers and changeover contractors shall operate under the sequence detailed in
this clause and shall be interlocked as follows:-
Main supply and generator circuit breakers cannot be closed together.
The changeover contractor can only connect one source of supply to the busbars and only
close when that supply is available and the circuit breakers are closed.
Interlocks shall be both permissive and prohibitive and all shall be present and operative
before operation of the breaker or changeover can take place.
19.47.3 Detailed Description of Generator Engine
Each engine shall be four stroke, naturally separated or pressure charged, water-cooled,
vertical diesel type, of the airless injection principle with all cylinders and valve gear totally
enclosed.
Each engine shall run at a speed not exceeding 1500 r.p.m and be suitable for remote
operation provided with forced feed lubrication to all working parts including the camshaft,
rocker gear, valve guides etc. A strainer shall be located in a suitable position in each system.
The whole of the lubrication oil shall be cooled by means on an inter-cooler situated adjacent
to the engine with circulation water dissipating the heat taken from the oil. The necessary
circulating pumps shall be provided which shall be integral with the engine together with all
the appropriate pipe work and valving. Individual flow indicators shall be provided for the
jacket and lubricating oil circuits.
A sensitive Class A2 governor shall be incorporated and this shall be capable of maintaining
a constant speed under all conditions of load in accordance with the requirements. Motor
operated speed regulating gear shall be provided to enable the speed of the engine to be
varied by 5 per cent up or down from normal speed while in operation. The remote control
for this regulating gear is to be operated from the switchboard.
Over speed protection shall be provided so that in the event of the engine speed exceeding 10
per cent above the maximum operating speed an audible warning and indicator light shall be
brought into operation, but should the speed still continue to rise to a figure of 15 per cent
above normal sipped the fuel supply shall be automatically cut of and the engine brought to
rest. The audible warning and indicator light, together with the other indicating lights and
alarms specified hereafter, shall indicate on the monitoring panel in the alternator
switchboard.
Page 190 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
A heavy type of flywheel shall be provided so that there will be a minimum of cyclic
irregularity throughout the working range of the engine. Distortion or vibration and
oscillation of the crankshaft shall be obviated under all normal working conditions.
The crankshaft shall be of solid forged steel statically and dynamically balanced to very
close limits.
Hand operated barring gear shall be provided for each engine.
Aspiration air filters shall be mounted directly on each engine and shall be of the heavy duty
type, suitable for a sand laden atmosphere.
Protected thermometers in suitable pockets shall be provided for measuring the temperature
of the inlet and outlet cooling ion water and lubrication oil. Each engine shall be provided
with a temperature indicator on each exhaust branch. Lubricating oil and circulation water
pressure gauges shall be provided on the local panel.
A positive driven tachometer and hours counter shall be provided and fixed in a convenient
place on each engine and the tachometer shall be connected to an engine speed indicator
mounted on a local panel to be mounted on each engine.
In addition to the over speed alarm, protection devices shall be provided in the lubricating oil
circuits and cooling water circuits to operate alarms and indicator lights in the event of
abnormal running conditions prevailing. These lights shall indicate on the remote monitoring
panel. The engine shall shut down under alarm conditions.
The whole of design, rating and testing of each engine shall be in accordance with BIS. for
solid injection liquid fuel engines.
Each engine shall be designed to operate with an ambient air temperature of 45oC and be
capable of satisfactorily providing an output 10 per cent in excess of the BS rating at the
same speed for one hour in any period of 12 hours consecutive running.
Each engine with flywheel and alternator shall be mounted and aligned on a common under
bed. Anti-vibration mountings shall be provided between the under bed and the concrete
foundation.
Each cylinder shall have renewable wet liners, and be fitted with individual cylinder heads.
Wet liners shall be treated on the water jacket side with a rust inhibitor.
Immersion heaters and thermostat control shall be on comported in each engine oil sump and
water jacket to ensure rapid warm up on starting.
Each engine shall be provided with an oil drip tray complete with plugged outlet.
The engine shall be painted in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations, color
finish as advised by the Engineer.
19.47.4 Engine Cooling Equipment
Each engine shall be cooled by a bed plate mounted tropical rated radiator and cooling fan,
adequately rated to maintain the normal working temperature, under continuous, full load
Page 191 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
operation working in conjunction with a pressurized water system, thermostatically

controlled with centrifugal water circulating pump, valves and pipe work.
19.47.5 Exhaust System
A complete engine exhaust system shall be provided for each engine and shall incorporate a
highly efficient residential quality silencer, expansion box, tubular lengths of exhaust piping
and all necessary flexible connections to lead the exhaust fumes outside the building.
The exhaust piping shall be adequately lagged and clad with in the station with polished
aluminium sheeting. All the necessary supports shall be included. Closing plates to apertures
in walls shall also be provided.
Very special attention shall be paid to the preparation and protection of the exhaust system.
19.47.6 Bed plates and Couplings
A rigidly constructed, fabricated steel combined bed plate shall be provided for each
generator set to withstand the Wight and shall be suitably machined on top for the reception
of the engine and alternator. The bed plate design shall incorporate anti-vibration mountings
to provide complete isolation of vibration from the concrete foundations.
Each alternator shall be directly coupled to its associated engine by means of an adequately
rated, flexible, multipoint, balanced coupling in accordance with section 3 securely keyed to
the shaft or close coupled to the engine. Each coupling, flywheel and any other moving part
on the generator set shall be fitted with close mesh guards which shall allow access to all
greasing and lubrication points. Guards shall be readily removable for maintenance purposes.
19.47.7 Starting Equipment
Each of the generator sets shall be started by means of a heavy duty, axial, starter motor,
fitted with automatic disengaging mechanism on engine start-up, operating in conjunction
with a 24 volt battery panel, installed locally to each generator set.
Batteries shall be of the heavy duty, 24 volt, nickel cadmium type, lead acid are not
acceptable, and be complete with charger, housing cabinet and necessary inter connecting
cable. The capacity of each battery set shall allow for not less than 10 consecutive starts,
each of 15 second duration.
Each battery charger shall be connected to the main motor control centre board in the control
room.
19.47.8 Detailed Description of Alternators
The alternators shall be continuously rated for continuous operation and generate at 415
volts, 3 phase 50 Hz, with the neutral point connected to a common earth bed. The alternator
neutral contractor shall be closed when the alternator is running.
The alternator enclosures shall be protected to IP .54 BIS. They shall be suitable in all
respects for operating in the line climate as detailed elsewhere.
The alternator excitation equipment shall be of the quick response self-exciting, self
regulating brush less type, suitable for starting the motors.
Page 192 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
The insulation of the stator and rotor shall be in accordance with British Standard Class `F'
but the alternator shall be designed for a Class È'temperature rise. The efficiencies of the
alternator shall be stated in the Schedules and shall be determined in conformity with the
procedure laid won in BIS. and shall be manufactured in accordance with BIS.
Each alternator shall be capable of satisfactorily providing an output 10 per cent in excess of
the Bs rating or one hour in any period of 12 hours consecutive running.
The rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced to close limits.
Each alternator shall be fitted with anti-condensation heaters of a size to maintain the
temperature of the windings 5oC above ambient. Each heater shall be provided with a switch
and automatic control to disconnect the heater when the alternator is running.
Terminal boxes shall be provided and arranged with sealing chambers for the reception of
the cables detailed in the relevant sections of the Specification. Terminals shall be clearly
marked to give phase identification.
The alternator shall be painted in accordance with Manufacture'

s recommendations, finished
color as instructed by the Engineer.
19.47.9 Fuel Oil System
A complete fuel oil system including bulk storage and daily service tanks and transfer pumps
shall be provided. It shall comprise of one steel, domed end horizontal cylindrical storage
tanks. Each tank shall be mounted on prepared foundations at each compound, all as
indicated on the Drawings, and shall be complete with manholes, filling and draw-off
connections, vent popes and inspection holes and externally indicating contents gauges. The
necessary access ladder and platforms over the tanks shall also be supplied.
Each generator shall be provided with a free standing daily service tank of sufficient capacity
to permit its associated generator to operate under full load conditions for a minimum period
of 12 hours.
There shall be no gravity feed from bulk fuel tanks to service tanks, and no possibility of
promoting and maintaining syphoning through fuel transfer pumps. All necessary valves
shall be included to ensure this. Service tank overflows shall be carried back to the bulk fuel
storage to avoid any flooding of the engine room with fuel oil.
Arrangement drawings shall be supplied to illustrate the complete fuel supply system
showing the position of tanks, valves, pumps and all other related equipment.
A single line scheme diagram of the system shall be submitted and of a form suitable for
permanent display in the generator building.
An accurate fuel oil meter shall be inserted in each feed from the daily service tanks to the
engines. Theses meters shall be in such a position as to be readily readable.
Two filters shall be provided in the main fuel oil supply line with by-passes enabling one
filter to be taken out and cleaned without interrupting the supply of oil through the other
filter.
Page 193 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
19.47.10 Bulk Fuel Tanks
One bulk fuel storage tank shall be provided and shall be manufactured and arranged with all
ancillary apparatus to fit within the areas allocated on the Contract Drawings. The size of
tank shall be such as to contain a sufficient quantity of fuel oil for a minimum of 15 day
operation at full load continuously.
Each tank shall be constructed of not less than 9.5 mm thick (nominal) plate which shall be
free form imperfections and constructed as a rigid unit with internal portions of beaching if
necessary. The tank, or where it has more than one compartment, each compartment, shall be
provided with a manhole and provision for ventilation to a single point shall be made.
All seams shall be continuously welded from both sides. Provisions shall be made to prevent
damage to the tank bottom by impact from the dip-stick. For this purpose a welded stop
collar shall be provided at the top of the dip-stick to rest o the manhole cover.
The dip-stick shall be of non-ferrous material accurately calibrated and clearly marked so as
to be readily identifiable with its respective tank and shall be supplied, calibrated in liters, by
the tank manufacturer.
The dip-stick tube shall be incorporated in the manhole cover, no separate tank opening
being provided for this purpose.
Each tank shall be arranged for filling via a direct filling pipe which shall be positioned to
give easy access for the delivery tanker. A minimum of 5 per cent by volume of the tanks
contents shall be allowed as allege.
The filling pipe and dip-stick tube shall each have a liquid and vapor-proof screwed cap with
captive chain and fitted with a lock with four keys.
The filling pipe and dipping tube shall be carried down to within 50mm. of the tank bottom.
The suction and return flow popes shall terminate not less than 25mm. above the bottom of
the filling and dipping pipe so as to maintain a liquid seal.
A vent pipe not less than 75mm. diameter shall be fitted to the highest point of the tank, and
shall terminate with a wire cage for protective purposes (fine gauge shall not be used).
Each storage tank manhole shall be in an accessible position, and shall not be less than
600mm. diameter clear opening. The manhole lid shall be securely fixed by bolts and have a
liquid and vapor tight joint (close oven proofed asbestos graphite).
The outlet pipe shall be so arranged as to leave a minimum of 75mm. dead space in bottom
of the tank.
Each tank shall have connections to receive the excess flow from the daily tank overflow.
Each tank shall also be provided with an externally indicating contents gauge marked in
Tamil and English to Read "full-1/2 full - Empty".
All openings shall be closed with steel plugs and blanking off steel plates bolted to flanges
for transit to site.
Page 194 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
The contractor shall provide all details of his requirements for access holes, etc. required to
the storage tanks to enable the Civil Contractor to construct the tank installations generally to
the arrangement shown on the Contract Drawings.
Bulk storage tanks shall have the internal and external surfaces decaled by grit blasting,
pickling or other approved method. After decaling, external surfaces shall be give a
phosphate coating followed by a cold water was down. External surfaces shall be painted as
specified. The interior shall immediately be oiled.
Unless specifically stated in the special specifications bulk storage may be resorted to in steel
barrels. Hand operated fuel oil transfer pump may be used to transfer fuel oil barrels to day
tank through flexible fuel hoses.
19.47.11 Daily Storage Tanks
Each engine shall be provided with a daily tank of sufficient capacity to allow 12 hours of
continuous operation at full load. For permanent mounted sets each daily tank shall be
provided with the following fittings:-
Air vent of not less than 50mm. diameter
Overflow piping of not less than 150 per cent diameter of the Fuel Delivery line.
Cleaning man hole and cover of not less than 300,mm diameter.
Contents gauge graduated in Tamil and English to read "Full - 1/2 Full - Empty". The gauge
shall be of the magnetically operated type and shall be complete with low and high level
control contracts.
Outlet connection to engine not less than 50 mm. above tank base.
Fuel outlet isolating valve lock able in open position.
Drain plug.
Excess fuel return connection if necessary.
Inlet connection from bulk fuel supply system including pipe work and connections.
There shall be allowed a minimum of 5 per cent of the volume of the tank contents as allege.
The top oil level of the tank shall not be less than 75 mm from the top of the tank.
Tanks prior to dispatch from manufacturers works shall be tested hydraulically to a pressure
0.5 bars.
Daily tanks shall be complete with all supports and fixing bolts for mounting remote from
engine. base of skid mounted tanks will not be accepted.
There shall be provided all necessary fuel oil pipe work, unions and valves between the day
tank and the engine.
Fuel connecting pipe work to engine shall be seamless steel and all pipes shall incorporate
flexible section if not less than 250 mm. long (plastic pipes or fittings are not acceptable).
Page 195 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
19.47.12 Fuel Transfer Pumps
Adjacent to each daily service tank there shall be provided an electrically driven fuel transfer
pump operating in conjunction with the control switches fitted to the daily tank contents
gauge. The pump shall be of the positive displacement type rated at a capacity to enable the
associated daily tank to be completely filled from empty with 2 hours,. The pump motor
shall be suitable for 415 volt 3 phase operation. Automatic control shall be provided for each
pump, via the control contacts fitted to the associated fuel contents gauge, to maintain a
minimum of 12 hours fuel storage in the daily tank. A semi-rotary, hand operated pump shall
be installed and connected in parallel with each electric pump. both pumps shall be complete
with a minimum of 4 m. of flexible hose and a tow position hand valve to enable the pumps
to extract from the Bulk Fuel Tank or, if necessary from a portable drum situated adjacent to
the daily service tank.
19.47.13 Warning and Safety Notices
The following warning notice shall be supplied and fixed in a prominent position in the
vicinity of each bulk fuel tank with 50mm. plain block black letters on a yellow background,
printed in Hindi and English.
“NO SMOKING”
“DIESEL FUEL - HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE”
Additional notices shall be provided is required. The wording of the notices shall be subject
to the Engineer'
s approval.
19.47.14 Ventilation Equipment
Ventilation shall be so designed to give good ventilation across the generator and
accessories.
19.47.15 Pipe work and Valves
All fuel pipes and fittings shall be of seamless stainless steel, all valves shall be cast steel,
and designed for the duty they are required to perform. galvanized pipe work and fittings
shall not be used for any lines handling fuel. All pipe work shall be fully supported and
complete with all brackets and fixings.
Pipe work installations shall be carries out for the various items of plant equipment and shall
include:-
All pipe work and valves form the bulk storage tanks to the daily storage tanks and filling
point.
For the bulk storage tanks:
1 No easily cleaned filter

2 No. shut off hand operated valves (one each side of filter).
The main fuel line from the bulk storage tank installations shall be fitted with fail safe quick
closing emergency valve with replaceable fusible link arrangement to shut fuel off in event
of fire. The operating temperature of the heat sensitive element shall be 93 C.
Page 196 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
One complete set of valves for each set of fuel transfer pumps comprising suction and
delivery isolation valves, non-return valves and pressure relief valve with return pipe.
Overflow pipe work and fittings from each daily tank to the bulk storage tanks.
19.47.16 Load Banks
The Tenderer shall provide load banks of the non-inductively wound, resistance type units
mounted in outdoor weather and waterproof oil filled containers.
The resistance units shall be rated correctly for each pump and site and shall be clearly
labeled in this respect.
The units shall comply with Section for construction, materials, fittings as applicable for
transformers and oil filled switch gear.
External concoctions shall be by sealed cable boxes with glands, gaiters and segregated
terminal connections.
The first filling of oil shall be included, together with 2 No. sealed silica gel dehydrating
breather replacement elements for each unit.
19.47.17 Performance Requirements
The diesel generator and accessories shall be so designed as to meet the following
performance requirements:
The unit shall be capable of starting room cold condition, reaching operating speed and
taking up load with in the shortest possible period.
The unit shall be capable of delivering continuous layout the generator terminals a net
output specified. This net output shall be obtained after necessary derating of engine due to
site conditions and unit auxiliary power requirements have been taken into consideration.
The unit shall be capable of a peak output of 10% in excess of the rated output for a period
on one hour out of a total of twelve consecutive hours of operation, without exceeding
permissible temperature limits and with a fairly visible exhaust.
The unit shall be continuously rate to supply powder of the periods.
The following items of performance shall be guaranteed during site performance tests by the
supplier in respect of the diesel generator and the auxiliary for the specified site conditions:
- Net electrical output

- Full oil consumption at 1/2 3/4 and full load
- Jacket water temperature to and from engine
- Lubricating oil temperature to and from engine
- 10% overload for one hour out of a total of twelve consecutive hours of operation without
overheating or showing signs of undue stress and within specified frequency variations.
- Freedom from vibration and noise
- Governor response, over speed trip and speed gear capability
- Voltage regulator response
- Excitation at full load and under specified variation of voltage and speed
Page 197 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Window type annunciators shall be supplied and mounted on generator control panel to give
visual and audible indicating for the following conditions.
- High jacket cooling water temperature

- High lubricating oil temperature
- Low lubricating oil pressure
- Low fuel oil tank level
- Engine over speed and trip
- Over current
- Earth fault
- Contractor on & off indication
- Voltage out of limit
- Excitation failure
- Generator fault
19.47.18 Drawings and Data
The Contractor shall furnish the following drawings/data for approval of the Engineer.
1. Control panel dimensions and drawing showing plan, form view, foundation details,
inside view, terminal block location etc.
2. Schematic diagrams of the electrical circuitry
3. General arrangement of the complete DG set.
19.47.19 Testing and Commissioning
The tenderer shall perform all the standard shop tests to ensure that the equipment conforms
to the specifications and meets the performance guarantees.
The installation / commissioning of the D.G. set shall be as per the applicable code of
practice and the MANUFACTURER' S instructions.
19.48 Power Capacitor
Power capacitor and capacitor control panel shall be housed in metal enclosed cubicle.
Power capacitor shall be housed in the lower compartment and capacitor control panel at the
top compartment.
The capacitor banks shall be complete with all parts that are necessary or essential for
efficient operation. Such parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply whether
specifically mentioned or not.
The capacitor bank shall be complete with the required capacitors along with the supporting
post insulators, steel rack assembly, copper bus bars, copper connecting strips, foundation
channels, fuses, fuse clips, etc. The steel rack assembly shall be hot dip galvanized.
The capacitor bank may comprise of suitable number of single phase units in series parallel
combinations. However, the number of parallel units in each of the series racks shall be such
that failure of one unit shall not create an over voltage on the units in parallel with it, which
will result in the failures of the parallel units.
The assembly of the banks shall be such that it provides sufficient ventilation for each unit.
Each capacitor case and the cubicle shall be earthen to a separate earth bus.
Page 198 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Each capacitor unit/bank shall be fitted with directly connected continuously rated, low loss
discharge device to discharge the capacitors to reduce the voltage to 50 volts within one
minute in accordance with the provisions of the latest editions of IS : 2834.
Capacitors shall be of mixed Dielectric of polypropylene and film and paper completely
impregnated with special capacitor oil (phenyl x ylg. ethane) under high vacuum.
Each unit shall satisfactorily operate at 135% of rated KVAR including factors of over
voltage, harmonic currents and manufacturing tolerance. The units shall be capable of
continuously withstanding satisfactorily any over voltage up to a maximum of 10% above
the rated voltage, excluding transients.
19.48.1 Unit Protection
Each capacitor unit shall be individually protected by an MCCB/MCB fuse suitably rated for
load current and interrupting capacity, so that a faulty capacitor unit shall be disconnected by
the fuse without cashing the bank to be disconnected. Thus, the fuse shall disconnect only the
faulty unit and shall leave the rest of the units undisturbed. An operated fuse shall give
visual indication so that it may be detected during periodic inspection. The MCB breaking
time shall co-ordinate with the pressure built up within the unit to avoid explosion. Mounting
of the individual fuse may be internal or external to the capacitor case.
19.48.2 Capacitor Control Panel
A. The switch boards shall be cubicle type suitable for indoor installation floor mounting
and free standing. The design shall be totally enclosed dust - tight damp-proof and
vermin proof offering degree of protection not less than IP-42.
B. Separate segregated compartments shall be provided for circuit breakers, bus bars, cable
box, voltage transformers, wire ways, relays, and instrument and control devices.
Switchgear cubicles / modules shall be provided with hinged doors in front with facility
for padlocking door handles.
C. Vent openings shall be covered with grills so arranged that hot gases cannot be
discharged through them in a manner that can injure the operating personnel. These vent
openings shall be vermin proof.
D. All panels shall be of same height, width and depth. Panels shall be bolted together to
form continuous flush front switch board suitable for front of board operation.
E. The switchgear cubicles shall be rigid and robust in design and construction fabricated
out of CRCA sheet steel. Cubicles shall be made from rigid welded structural frames
made of structural steel sections or of pressed / formed sheet steel of not less than 3mm
thickness. The frames shall be enclosed by sheet steel of at least 2mm thickness,
smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever
necessary.
F. All doors, panels, removable covers shall be provided with non deteriorating (neoprene)
gaskets all around the perimeter.
G. All doors shall be removable and supported by concealed type hinges. The hinges shall
be strong and braced to ensure freedom from sagging, bending and general distortion of
panel or hinged part.
Page 199 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
H. Floor mounted cubicles shall be provided with a 75mm high channel base frame. The
total height of the cubicle shall not exceed 2400mm keeping in view the operating height
of top switch should not exceed 1750mm from FFL including base channel.
19.48.3 Bus Bars & Bus Bar Chamber
A. Three phase bus bars shall be of high conductivity electrolytic Aluminum as stated in
B.O.Q.
B. The bus bars shall be air insulated and housed in a separate compartment segregated from
all other compartments.
C. Bus bars & bus bar connections shall be of uniform cross section shall be suitable for
carrying rated current continuously and short circuit current for specified duration
without overheating. The bus bars connections shall be adequately supported on
insulators to withstand dynamic stresses due to short circuit current specified. Normal
operating temperature for bus bars shall be 85 Deg C. Short circuit rating of the bus bars
shall be 20 to 50 KA for 1 sec as per BOQ.
D. All bus bar joints and bus tap joints shall be silver or tin plated. Joints shall be bolted type
and shall be insulated. Spring / Lock washers shall be provided to ensure good contact on
the joints.
E. Direct access to accidental contact with bus bars and primary connections shall be
avoided by providing shrouds. All apertures and slots shall be protected by barriers to
prevent accidental short circuiting of bus bars. To provide a tight seal between cubicles,
bushings or insulating panels shall be provided for bus bars crossing from one cubicle
into another.
F. All insulating materials used shall be non-hygroscopic and shall be treated for preventing
fungus growth. Surface of insulators shall be highly glazed and treated with silicon
compounds to minimize accumulation of dust, condensation and tracking.
G. All bus bars shall be color coded as per IS: 375.
- Isolating switch/MCB or MCCB

- Contractor with overload element
- Relays responsive to current / voltage/ KVA /PF as specified for automatic
switching
- Sequencing devices, timers and auxiliary relays for automatic sequential switching
of the capacitors in an out of circuit.
- Auto-manual selector switches
- Push button for opening and closing the power circuit.
- Red and Green lamps of capacitors ON/OFF indication.
- Protective relays to protect the healthy capacitor units when one unit fails in a series
connection.
- Space heater and cubicle lighting as per the requirements is required.
19.48.4 Technical Particulars - The Equipment shall conform IS 2834
Rated capacity : As per single line diagrams

Rated Voltage : 433 V
Rated frequency, and phase : 50 Hz, 3 phase
Page 200 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Design Requirements
Insulation level : 2.5 KV (rams)

Capacitor bank connection : Delta
Short circuit withstand for bus bars
Short time (1 sec) : 40 KA (rms)
Dynamic : 102 KA (peak)
Switches
Type of switching : Automatic switching shall be responsive
power factor through power factor sensing
relay
Switching steps : As required
For single motor operation, switching shall be with motor operation.

Rating of contractor : To suit kVA unit
19.48.5 Tests and Test Reports
- All tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest edition of IS - 2834 and as
applicable for the controls.
- Type test certificates for similar capacitor units shall be furnished.
19.48.6 Drawings
The following drawings shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineers Representative
by the Contractor.
1. Fully dimensioned general arrangement drawings of capacitor and capacitor control

panel with elevation side view, sectional view and foundation details.
2. Complete schematic and wiring diagrams for capacitor control panel.
19.49 Cables
A. All cables shall be manufactured and constructed in accordance of the following standards
with the latest revision :
IS: 694 HRPVC/XLPE insulated (heavy duty) electric cables for working voltage
up to and including 1100 volts.
IS: 424- Power cable-flammability test.

1475(F-3)
IS: 7098(I) Specification for cross-linked polyethylene insulated LSZHPVC sheathed

cable for working voltage up to 1.1 KV.
IS: 1554 Specification for PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables for working
voltages up to and including 1100 volts.
ASTM-D: Standard method for measuring the minimum oxygen concentration to

2863 support candle-like combustion of plastics (Oxygen Index).
ASTM-D: Standard test method for measuring the density of smoke from the burning
Page 201 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
2843 or decomposition.
IEEE: 383 Standard for type of tests Class-IE, Electric cables, field splices and
connections for power generation station.
ASTME: Standard test method for specific optical density of smoke generated by
662/ IEC: solid materials
754(x)
IS: 10418 Cable drums.
IS-10810 Testing method of cable.
IS-6121 Cable glands.
IS-9537 Rigid steel conduit.
B. The manufacturing of the cable shall also conform to the requirements of all relevant local
codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in the Specification
and Drawings. Only more stringent specification shall be followed.
C. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the following
precedence:
(i) Engineer’s decision;
(ii) Local codes of practice;
(iii) Drawings;
(iv) Specification;
(v) International standards and requirements.
All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of
construction. As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:
1. Equipment submission with manufacturer’s data
2. Sample submission
3. Shop Drawings of the cable route showing the co-ordinated routing of cables, arrangement on
cable trays, methods of fixing of cable trays and cables, etc. All conduits including concealed
conduit routing drawings shall also be included
4. Cable test reports and IS Certification
5. Builder’s works requirement
6. Cable schedule indicate the following data include:

a. Cable code and type and installation method
b. Cable feed from and serve to
c. Cable route length and voltage drop
d. Cable capacity and
e. Upstream protection breaker rating
Page 202 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
The cable schedule shall be prepared in accordance to the cable manufacturer’s data.
LV Cables
1. They shall be designed to withstand all mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under
steady state and transient operating condition.
2. The aluminum / copper wires used for manufacturing the cables shall be true circular /
sector in shape before stranding and shall be of uniformly good quality, free from defects.
The conductor used in manufacture of the cable shall be of H2 grade.
3. The cable should withstand 2.5 KA for 1 Sec. with insulation armour insulated at one
end. Bidder shall furnish calculation in support of capability to withstand the earth fault
currents. The current carrying capacity of armour and screen (as applicable) shall not be
less than the earth fault current values and duration.
4. The fillers and inner sheath shall be of non-hygroscopic fire retardant materials and shall
be suitable for the operating temperature of the cable. Filler and inner sheath shall not
stick to insulation and outer sheath.
5. Progressive automatic in line indelible, legible and sequential marking (grade, voltage,
capacity, length - in meters) shall be embossed at every meter on the outer sheath of all
cables and at every 5 meter ‘LSZH marking in case of ‘LSZH cables.
6. IS: 3975 method (b) for strip / wire armouring shall only be acceptable. For single core
cable aluminium wire armouring shall be used.
7. Allowable tolerance on the overall diameter of the cables shall be + 2mm.
8. The normal current rating of all HRPVC/XLPE insulated cables shall be as per IS: 3961.
9. A distinct inner sheath shall be provided by pressure extrusion process for all multi core
armoured and unarmoured cables as per IS: 5831.
10. Outer sheath shall be provided by extrusion process as per IS: 5031.
11. The breaking load of armour joint shall not be less than 95% of that armour wire. Zinc
rich paint shall be applied on armoured joint surface.
12. In plant repairs to the cables shall not be accepted.
13. All the cables shall be supplied in non-returnable drums as per IS: 10418.
14. In Case of LSZH Cables
• The outer sheath of cables shall have an oxygen index of not less than 29 as per
ASIMD: 2863.
• The maximum acid gas generation by weight as per IEC: 754 (i) shall not be more than
20% for outer sheath material of all cables. Bidder shall also guarantee the maximum
theoretical acid gas generation with 20% by weight of outer sheath.
Page 203 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
• The cables outer sheath shall meet the requirement of light transmission of 40%
minimum and shall be tested as per ISTMD: 2843. In case the test for light
transmission is conducted as per ASTME: 662. the bidder shall furnish smoke density
values as per this standard and shall co-relate the anticipated light transmission when
tested as per ASTMD: 2843.
• The cable shall pass the fire resistance test as per SS:42, 41, 475 (I) and flammability
test as per EEE:383.
A. Inspection
All cables shall be inspected on receipt of the same at site and checked for any damage
during transit.
B. Joints in Cables
Cable drum length and sizes of cable lengths required may be checked carefully before
cutting the cables from drum. The contractor shall take care that the cables received at
site are distributed to various locations in single length as far as possible to ensure maximum
utilization. Where the joints are unavoidable, the same is to be done with approval from the
Owner/Consultant. The joints shall be done by qualified jointer strictly in accordance with
manufacturer’s instruction / drawings in presence of Engineer-in-charge.
C. Joint Boxes for Cables
The cable joint boxes shall be of appropriate size suitable for type of cable of particular
voltage rating.
D. Cable Joints
1. All cable joints materials shall be of standard make and suitable to requirement. On
jointing of cables in the joint box the cable compound shall be filled in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and in approved manner. All straight through joints shall be
done in epoxy mould boxes with epoxy resins. Straight through joints shall not be
permitted unless the length of run is in excess of cable drum.
2. End terminations of cables more than 1.1 KV grade shall be done with epoxy mould
boxed and epoxy resin. Cable glands shall be 1.1KV grade double compression type and
made to tin plated heavy-duty brass casting and machine finished. Glands shall be of
robust construction capable of clamping cable and cable armour, firmly without injury of
cable.
3. All washers and hardware shall be made of brass tinned. Rubber components used in the
glands shall be made of neoprene of tested quality.
4. Cable lugs shall be tinned copper / aluminium solder less crimping type conforming to
IS: 8309 suitable for aluminium or copper conductor.
5. Crimping of terminals shall be done by using Corrosion inhibitory compound, with

crimping tool.
6. Fire resistant paint has to be applied 1 Meter on either side of cable joint.
Page 204 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
7. The contractor shall liaise fully with all other contractors to achieve an efficient and
properly coordinated installation where equipment has to be re-positioned due to lack of
site liaison; no extra cost shall be incurred by the client.
H.T. Cable (XLPE) (11 KV)
A. The cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) cable shall be aluminium conductor PVC outer sheath
steel strip armoured over inner sheath construction. XLPE cable shall conform to testing in
accordance with IS: 7098 (Part-I) 1977 and (Part-II) 1973. The screening shall be done on
individual cover. The armouring applied over the common covering shall be flat steel wires.
Each and every length of cable shall be subjected to routine test.
B. The termination and jointing techniques for XLPE cables shall be by using heat shrinkable or
push on cable jointing kits.
C. While laying underground cables in ducts care should be taken so that any underground
structures such as water pipes, sewerage lines etc. are not damaged. Any telephone or other
cable coming in the way shall be properly protected as per instructions of the Engineer-in-
charge. The H.T. cable shall be laid at least 1200mm for cable up to 11 KV(E) below the
ground level in a trench 450mm wide.
D. After laying and jointing work is completed High Pot test shall be performed in presence of
Engineer-in-charge and test results submitted for approval in order to ensure that they have
not been damaged during or after the laying of cables. In case, the test results are
unsatisfactory, the cost of all repairs and replacement and all extra work of removal and
relaying will be made good by the contractor without any extra cost.
Note: All other procedure will be followed as per L.T. cables.
Erection of Cables
A. Notwithstanding the cable routes indicated on the Drawings the Contractor shall be entirely
responsible for the supply of correct lengths of the cables to be installed and for all
allowances for connecting and terminating the cables to the switchgears and transformers
respectively
B. The Contractor shall submit proposed cable routes including details of supports for the cables
for approval before installation. The cable shall not be run in places other than corridor,
passageway, electrical riser or other designated areas subject to the Engineer’s approval. The
cost of support shall be deemed to have included in the Contract.
Cable Pulling
A. Winching of cables through ducts / pipes shall only be carried out with the approval of the
Engineer-in-charge in which event a pulley eye shall be attached to the conductors. Cable
shall be run in neat and orderly manner to allow space for future cabling and maintenance.
Under any circumstances the cable shall not run diagonally across a room, cable basement,
corridor, etc.
B. A cable sheath stocking may be employed or cables where no undue stress in the sheath is
likely to occur.
C. Care shall be taken to ensure that the draw strain is applied to the armouring and protected
during drawing against damage.
Page 205 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Cable Laying
A. The cable drum shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. Great care shall be
exercised in laying cables to avoid forming links. At all changes in directions in horizontal &
vertical places, the cable shall be bent with a radius of bend not less than 8 times the diameter
of cable.
B. The cable of 1.1KV grade shall be laid not less than 750mm below ground level in a 375 mm
wide trench (throughout). Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench, the
width of the trench shall be increased such that the inter axial spacing between the cables
except where otherwise specified is at least 150mm minimum or as per site requirements or
as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Where single core cables are used in multiphase
systems, the cables shall be installed in trefoil where possible.
C. In case the cables are laid in vertical formation due to unavoidable circumstance the depth per
tier shall be increased by 200 mm (minimum). Cable shall be laid in reasonably straight line,
where a change in direction takes place a suitable curvature shall be i.e. either 20 times the dia
meter of the cable or the radius of the bend shall not be less than twice the diameter of the
cable drum or whichever less is. Minimum 3 meter long loop shall be provided at both sides
of every straight through joint & 3 meters at each end of cable or as directed at site.
D. Greater care shall be exercised in handling the cable in order to avoid forming ‘Kinks’. The
cable drum shall in-verbally convey on wheels and the cable unrolled in right direction as
indicated on the drum by the manufacturer. The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench
steadily and uniformly without jerks and strains.
E. Cables laid in trenches in single tier formation, 10 cms all-around sand cushioning is provided
below and above the cable before a protective cover is laid. For every additional vertical tier.
The 30 cm of sand cushion is provided over the initial tier. The cable shall be protected by
2nd class brick of size not less than 230 x 115 x 75mm, stone tiles / RCC curved channel be
placed on top of the sand breadth wise for the full length of the cable and where more than
one cable is to be laid in the same trench the brick shall cover all cables and project at least 8
cms over the outer sides of the end cables.
F. Filling of trenches shall be done after sand cushioning and tiles or bricks lying and inspection
is carried out by the Engineer-in-charge (Refer drawing). Back fill for trenches shall be filled
in layer not exceeding 150 mm. Each layer shall be properly rammed & consolidated before
laying the next layer.
G. PVC pipe shall be provided on all road crossing. The size of the pipe shall be above the size
of the cable. Minimum 100mm dia. pipes are to be provided. The pipe shall be laid in ground
with special arrangement and shall be cement jointed and concreting of 1:5:10 shall be
provided as per relevant IS with latest amendment. Nothing extra shall be paid on this
account. Cable route markers at interval of 30 meters and at the point of direction change
shall be provided to indicate cable path. Aluminum strip cable tag of 20mm wide with
engraved tag no. shall be provided at both ends of cable.
H. Where the cables are laid in ducts (pucca trenches) in side the building, they will be laid on
MS rack / cable trays grouted on trenches walls. Cables passing through floors shall be
protected from mechanical damage by steel channel to a height of one meter above the floor.
Sleeve shall be provided in the wall for crossing of cables.
I. Cable openings in wall/floor shall be sealed by the contractor suitably by Hessian tape &
Bitumen compound or by any other proven material to prevent ingress of water.
Page 206 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Fire Seal System
A. All the floor/wall opening provided for cable crossing shall be sealed by fire seal system.
B. The fire proof sealing system shall fully comply with the requirements of relevant IS/BS:476
Part-B. The fire proof seal system shall have minimum one hour fire resistance rating.
C. The fire proof seal system shall be physically, chemically, thermally stable and shall be
mechanically secured to the masonary concrete members. The system shall be completely gas
and smoke tight, antirodent and anti-termite.
D. The material used in fire proof seal system shall be non-toxic and harmless to the working
personnel.
E. Type of fire proof seal system shall be foaming type or flamemastic type compound or
approved equivalent.
F. After laying and jointing work is completed, high voltage test should be applied to all cables
to ensure that they have not been damaged during or after the laying operation and that there
is not fault in the jointing.
G. Cables for use on low and medium voltage system (1.1KV grade cables) should withstand for
15 minutes a pressure of 3000V DC applied between conductors and also between each
conductor and sheaths. In the absence of pressure testing facilities it is sufficient to test for
one minute with a 1000V insulation tester In case the test results are unsatisfactory the cost of
repairs and replacements and extra work of removal & laying will be made good by the
contractor.
H. Cable shall be installed so that separations shown in the table below are observed.
1. HV Cable (11 KV) - HV Cable (11 KV) 50 mm
2. ELV & LV 230 V/433 V - ELV & LV cable 230 V/433 V 50 mm
3. HV cables (11 KV) - ELV & LV cables 230 V/433 V 300 mm
4. LV cables 433 V - Telephone/Instrument cable 350 mm
5. All cables - All hot pipe work 200 mm
Factory Tests
A. Each type of cable specified shall be fully type tested according to IEC 502 and the
appropriate British Standards. The types and sizes of cables required are shown on the
Drawings.
B. Should the Engineer require it, the Contractor shall submit reports issued by a national or
international testing authority on type test that have been successfully performed on the cable
for his approval.
C. The type test shall include the following test:

1. Partial discharge test;
2. Bending test, plus partial discharge test;
3. Tan δ measurement as a function of the voltage and capacitance measurement;
4. Tan δ measurement as a function of the temperature;
5. Heating cycle test plus partial discharge test ;
6. Impulse withstand test, followed by a power frequency voltage test;
7. Medium-voltage alternating current test;
8. Type test (non-electrical) as stipulated in IEC 502, Table VI.
Page 207 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
D. Cable routine test shall be conducted at factory in accordance with IEC 502 for the following
tests:
Measurement of the electrical resistance of conductors.
Partial discharge test,
4-hour MV test.
Site Acceptance Test
A. The Contractor shall supply all necessary testing equipment for site testing. When required,
this testing equipment shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor at a recognized
national laboratory.
B. The Contractor shall engage an Authorised Medium Voltage Testing Engineer who is
recognized by SEB to perform all site tests.
C. In addition to SEB’s requirements and those recommended by the manufacturer, the

following tests shall be carried out:
1. Continuity test
2. Earth test
3. Polarity test
4. Insulation resistance test
5. DC high voltage test. The test voltage shall be in accordance with SEB’s requirements
and Engineer’s approval.
Internal and External Illumination: The illumination system shall consist of lighting towers,
lighting poles, main panel distribution boards, complete with FSU, ELCGB, MCB, Cables JB,
terminal blocks, glans, conduits and accessories and supporting and anchoring materials, lighting
fixtures with fluorescent tube, sodium vapor lamps wires, etc. All materials, fittings and
appliances use in electrical installation shall conform to the relevant IS specifications and shall
be anticorrosive painted /FRP enclosures.
Illumination Level
The following minimum levels of illumination shall be provided in the areas:
Area/ Building Illumination level Type of luminaries
a) Pump Houses 150 lux Ind. 2x40W Fl.Ftg. equip. to

philips TKC-240
b) Control Room 300 lux -Do- but mirror optic type equiv.
to Philips TCS -314
c) Office 200 lux -Do-
d) Sub-station transformer 50 lux 1x70
50 lux 1 x 70 WH.P.S.V. type equiv.

Philips SRP- 48.
20 lux Non integral 1 x 250

WHPSV.F.S
ltg. Fts Philips SNF - 14 or equiv.
Page 208 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
The lighting fixtures shall comply with the following requirements:
a) Luminaries shall have high efficiency Lumen output /Watts

b) Enclosures shall preferably be Frp/Cast Aluminium with corrosion resistance paints.
c) Ballast shall include power factor improvement capacitor.
d) Fittings shall preferably have ballasts.
e) Fluorescent fittings shall be used for indoor areas, HPSV type for outdoor and Yard
areas.
19.50 Painting
All surfaces of equipment/structural steel shall be sand blasted decreased and picked in acid
as required to provide a smooth & clean surface, free of rust / scale / grease.
After cleaning the surface shall be given one coat of high quality red-oxide or yellow
chromate and baking in the oven (for equipment only).
All surfaces shall be then finished with 2 (two) coats of finished syn. chemical paint of shade
631 of IS: 5 or with a paint shade of purchaser' s choice.
19.51 Details of Tests
I. Power & Distribution Transformers
i) Check HV & LV cable terminations, ground connections, fittings and accessories, oil
level and oil leaks at various joints. Check junction boxes, marshalling box, etc. for
correct wiring.
ii) Oil Test: Crackle test and dielectric test as per Clause 7.11 of IS 10028. The oil shall
withstand at least 40 KV with a gap of 4 mm.
iii) Insulation Resistance Test: This may be carried out on new transformer without drying
out the transformer, provided the transformer has not been idle or stored for a long
period. Otherwise, this test shall be carried out during drying out of transformers.
Insulating resistance test shall be carried out between primary & secondary to ground as
well as between primary and secondary. Windings not under test shall be grounded
during the test. A meager rated 1000 volts or higher shall be used for the test.
iv) Polarity & Phasing Out Test:Check external connection of the transformer in
accordance with diagram of connection and phase sequence (anti - clockwise)
II HV & MV Switchgear
i) Check proper mechanical operation of circuit breakers including alignment of trolleys in

case of draw - out type circuit’s breakers, smooth operation of all mechanical parts,
lubrication, mechanical interlocks etc.
ii) Check contact alignment and wipe, proper sequence of closing and opening of main and
arcing contacts.
iii) Check electrical relays, instruments & controls for correct wiring
iv) Insulating test on bus bars - phase to phase and phase to ground. This test will be carried
out with circuit breakers in service positing, but contacts remaining open.
Page 209 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
v) Insulation test on relays & control wiring including current and potential transformers
and wiring of CT & PT secondaries.
vi) Insulation on circuit breakers in withdrawn position - phase to phase and phase to
ground with contacts closed.
vii) Adjust correct settings of relays and/or direct acting trips -as specified.
viii) Operation test: Energize only control circuits and carry out closing and tripping
operations (where AC supply derived from main supply is used for operation, the
switch - gear bus may be energized). Check operations of electrical interlocks. Check
tripping of circuit breakers by manual operation of protective relay contacts. Check
operating of mechanical closing and tripping devices. Check lockout condition for
closing of circuit breakers by simulating the required conditions. Check control,
indications, sequence interlocks and alarms.
ix) Polarity and connections of instrument transformers - Check for correctness of CT &
PT connections provided. Check electrical continuity of secondary with ELV tester.
x) Check operatic of instruments, meters, relays and tripping of circuit breakers by

primary / secondary injections as specified.
xi) Check continuity of power circuits and earth continuity of all non current metallic parts
with a low voltage (6 volts or less) continuity tester.
III Motor Control Centers, Switchgears
i) Check equipment, internal wiring, smooth mechanical operation, interlocks, etc.
ii) Check continuity of power circuits and earth continuity of all non-current carrying
metallic parts with a low voltage continuity tester.
iii) Insulating test for power & control circuits between phases, between phases and
neutral and between phase / neutral and ground.
iv) Check operation by energizing control circuits (without energizing power circuits) for
correct functioning. Simulate eternal controls and interlocks for the same. Note chatter
or humming of contractor and rectify, in necessary.
v) Check fuse ratings and adjust relay setting (overhead, single phasing presenters etc) in
accordance with load ratings.
vi) Polarity and connections of instrument transformers -Check for correctness of CT &
PT connecting provided. Check electrical continuity of secondary circuits with ELV
tester.
IV Motors & Rotating Equipment
i) Check equipment for free movement of rotor, and play, lubricating, and for any
ii) Insulating test of motors - between winding and ground. Use 500 volts manger for
M.V. motors and 1000 volts meager for HV motors.
iii) Check electrical continuity with ELV tester.
Page 210 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
iv) NO load running of motor noting down no load current and voltages in all three
phases.
V Earthing System
i) Measure earth resistance of each electrode separately. If a number of earth electrodes

are interconnected with one another, combined earth resistance shall also be measure.
The earth resistance of each electrode and/or a group of electrodes shall not exceed the
values specified.
ii) Carry out line earth loop impedance test. The loop comprises the line conductor from
the point of fault, back to the supply transformer, the path through transformer
winding, the earthen natural point of the transformer and path for that point to the point
of fault through the Earthing system.
iii) Continuity test for earth continuity conductors with ELV tester.
Statutory Approval: The Contractor shall be totally responsible for obtaining statutory
approval from the electrical inspector or any other statutory authority for the entire
installation carried out by him unless otherwise specified and agreed. Necessary test reports
shall be submitted by him to electrical inspector. This will be an integral part of the contract
and shall not be paid for separately. However fees payable to statutory authorities shall be
borne by purchaser.
Acceptance of Installation: On completion of the work the Engineer, together with the
Contractor, will carry out an inspecting of the installing. The Engineer will issue a completed
copy of the Purchaser' s Acceptance of Electrical Installation to the Contractor as
confirmation that the work has been accepted, subject to any matters noted on the form being
attended to.
*****
Page 211 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF WORKS
Table of Contents
Clause Description
20.1 Scope of Work
20.2 Output and Operational Guarantees
20.3 Staffing
20.4 Safety / Security
20.5 Reporting
20.6 Operation
20.7 Maintenance
20.8 Release of Hazardous substances or Hazardous Waste
20.9 Technical Audit
20.10 Facility Visits
20.11 Operation and Maintenance Manual
Page 212 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
SECTION-20 : SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION &

MAINTENANCE OF SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS
20.1 Scope of Work
The contractor shall operate and maintain the rising mains, pumping stations,
interconnecting sewers and all other allied works under this contract, for a period of 3
years (after commissioning period of 3 months). The salient features of works are:
• Pumping Stations (7 Nos), pumps and all other works within the pump house,
including automation system for controlling operation of electro-mechanical items by
PLC based software from the dry room.
• Rising main(s).
• Interconnecting Channel.
• Screening system.
• General facilities and utility services associated with pumping station.
• PLC based automation system.
• Any other services required for smooth running of the pumping stations.
It is to be noted that all costs, except electricity cost, during the O&M period shall be
borne by the contractor.
The contractor shall provide on job training to the selected staff of the Employer as per
specifications. At the end of 2nd year of operation & maintenance period, an assessment of
the condition of the pumping station and other work (work done under this contract), will
be done by Employer on its own or by an independent body and based on that assessment
the contractor shall, at no extra cost to the Employer, repair and re-condition all the
electro-mechanical equipments in the concluding year of the O&M contract to such a
condition so that they are in running condition with regular preventive and recommended
maintenance as per manufacturer' s recommendations or as per CPHEEO manual. The
contractor's scope shall include supply of all necessary spares that may be required to
operate for another 2 years. The list of critical spares shall be drawn up depending upon
the maintenance record of each & every equipment in the penultimate year of the contract
and the spares shall be supplied in the concluding year of the contract.
20.2 Output and Operational Guarantees
The contractor shall be fully responsible for pumping all the sewage reaching at the wet
sump of pumping station. The performance of the contractor shall be treated as
unsatisfactory if he fails to pump the complete sewage or does not maintain the
guarantees listed in this clause except in force majeure condition or fails to fulfill other
conditions of the contract.
20.2.1 Power Consumption Requirements
The power required to operate the Pumping Station and other facilities under this contract
shall be paid by the Employer directly.
20.3 Staffing
The work shall be carried out on a 24hr basis, without intermission and the staff deployed
by the contractor shall be in accordance with this contract. The contractor shall give or
Page 213 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
provide all necessary superintendence during the O&M period. Such superintendence
shall be given by a competent person having adequate knowledge of the Operation and
Maintenance to be carried out (including the methods and techniques required), the
hazards likely to be encountered and methods of preventing accident as may be required
for the satisfactory working of the entire system.
• Details of personnel to be employed by the contractor.
The number and details of personnel to be employed by the contractor shall be as per
schedule given in Financial Bid. In addition, the contractor will provide adequate number
of qualified and experienced skilled staff, laboratory staff & unskilled personnel during
O&M of the facilities.
No labour below the age of 18 years shall be employed on the work.
List of staff is to be given by the agency to the Employer and advance intimation to be
given before deputing/removing any staff from site during the period of contract. Not
more than one of the contractor' s key staff shall be absent from the project site at any
given time. In case it is necessary for more than one of the key personnel to be absent at a
given time, the contractor shall provide replacement of equivalent or better qualifications.
The CVs of such replacements shall be got approved from Employer in advance.
Employer shall be authorized to direct the contracting agency to remove any or all staff
employed on O&M of the facilities if in his opinion continued presence of such staff is
detrimental to safety or proper O&M. The contractor shall comply with such directions &
post suitable substitute(s) thereof. Whenever the Employer has to inform the contractor in
writing that any person on the work is in his opinion unsatisfactory or/incompetent or
unfaithful or dishonest, untruthful or disorderly or to be otherwise unsuitable/such person
shall be discharged by the contractor from the work and shall not be employed again on it.
20.4 Safety/Security
The contractor shall take all safety precautions under various Acts/Rules, under
Central/State Government. from time to time and he shall be responsible for safety of its
staff and the consequences thereof. The contractor shall deploy round the clock security
personnel at entrance of the premises and in the compound for the safety of the pumping
station premises during the 3 year O&M period including defects liability period. The
contractor shall be completely responsible for the safety of the pumping station and
appurtenances, equipment and personnel during this period.
• Responsibility For Damages
The care of the whole of the permanent works shall remain with the contractor who will
be responsible for all accidents or damages from whatever cause arising and chargeable
for any thing that may be stolen, removed destroyed or damaged to whomsoever
belonging and also for making good all defects and damages to the said works or to any
property adjoining or any cause whatever, whether such damage or defects were
occasioned by the negligence of the contractor or not or may be or might have been
discovered during the progress to be known after the completion whereof or whether
payment may wholly or partially have been made or the works approved as supposed to
have been properly done and no certificate of approval of any works by the Employer or
his authorized representative shall affect or prejudice the right of the Employer against the
contractor or be considered or held as at all conclusive as to the sufficiency of any work
materials.
Page 214 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
Adequate safety precautions against fire, flooding, lightening, electrical shocks, accident
due to moving/non-moving heavy/light equipments shall be strictly observed by the
Contractor at his own cost. Suitable safety measures like gumboots, gloves, safety belts,
ladders, safety lamps, gas masks, oxygen apparatus, insulated tools, alarms, etc, shall be
provided by the Contractor. Necessary medical first aid kit shall be made available all the
time all the pumping station locations. In absence of observance of above safety
precautions, the Contractor shall be responsible for any unforeseen loss of the equipments
or persons dealing with it. Special care shall be taken by the contractor while carrying out
the work in sewage gas zone. Any incidence of human life or accident will be totally
Contractor's responsibility.
The Contractor shall ensure that the staff employed takes all necessary precautions while
carrying out the work either in shift duties or any general shift as per Indian Electricity
Rules/Factory Act/CPHEEO Manual, or manufacturer' s special instruction for safety / gas
handling. The staff should use gas masks, oxygen apparatus, gum boots, safety belts and
safety lamps, etc. while carrying out the work in sumps and gas zone area, rising main
etc.
The Contractor shall make arrangement for all necessary safety equipments for persons
working at pumping station / rising main as per Factory Act/Safety Rules. In the event of
any accident on or off site, in which the Contractor or his personnel are involved, in
which an injury occurs to any person whether directly concerned with the project or a
third party, the Contractor shall inform the Employer within 24 hrs of the occurrence of
the event. The facilities shall be open to local/state/central agencies for verification of
safety/emission/acts compliance.
During night hours, the main gate shall be locked. However, shift duty staff shall be alert
and open the gate during surprise checking of Employer or his deputed staff or any other
Government Authorities or his nominee without any wait. Only bonafide persons shall be
allowed in the premises being a prohibited area. Smoking and drinking shall be strictly
prohibited in the premises.
The staff engaged shall wear common uniform with name plate indicating name and
designation during duty hours.
20.5 Reporting
The Contractor shall prepare monthly reports (in prescribed format to be issued at the
onset of O&M period) of all pumping stations and project performance and submit to the
Employer and shall assist the Employer in preparing the necessary documents for their
purpose and record as per proforma given from time to time. The reports shall contain,
inter-alia, the following:
• A description of the maintenance work carried out in the reporting period.

• A report on major failures, if any, their causes and remedial actions taken.
• Power consumed in the reporting period.
• Power failure and DG operation in the reporting period.
• An inventory of the spare parts available at the end of the reporting period.
• O&M staff deployed by the contractor during the reporting period.
• Any major repair works, if any.
Contractor is required to maintain separate register/computerized records at all sites of

following information:
Page 215 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
• Pumping register
• Working hours register
• Electric break down register
• Maintenance register
• Staff attendance register
• Equipment breakdown, repair record and extent of repair
• DG Set Operating Register
Site Order Book
Site order book shall be kept by the Employer at the pumping station site. Orders entered
in this Book by the Employer or his authorized representative shall be held to have been
formally communicated to the Contractor. The Employer or his authorized representative
shall sign each order as it is entered and will hand over the duplicate to the Contractor or
his representative, who shall sign the original in acknowledgment of having received the
order.
20.6 Operation
In case, the motor or any other equipment is burnt or damaged due to negligence of the
Contractor or due to faulty operation it shall be sole responsibility of the Contractor to
rewind/replace/repair it as per standards of the equipment free of cost. In case of any fault
in operation and performance of the facilities, contractor or his staff at duty shall
immediately report to the Employer about it.
The Contractor shall run the pumping station after ensuring proper voltage. He shall also
record all the power failures and voltage in daily log sheet. He shall bring into the notice
of power supply agency as well as control room and the Employer about the break
down/power failure.
Any dispute with the workmen shall be Contractor' s responsibility as per Labour
Laws/Government Rules and Regulations. In no way the Employer shall be responsible
for the disputes between them.
The Contractor shall follow the rules and regulations as per Factory Act as it is applicable.
The Contractor shall arrange all necessary required tools, tackles and instruments in
advance for proper operation and maintenance of the entire work under this contract.
The Contractor shall operate and maintain all (E&M) equipment as per the
recommendations of the respective equipment manufacturer. He shall further maintain and
operate the pumping station and other works, as per CPHEEO manual or as per approved
norms specified in this document elsewhere along with the Technical Bid. The Contractor
shall be free to follow manufacturer’s manual in this regard. However in case of any
doubt, the Employer shall refer to best of the above standards and the Contractor shall be
bound to carry out the works accordingly.
The bidders shall know all Central/State Government/ Semi-Government/Local Bodies

rules & regulations to this contract without any excuse. Gas coming out of sewage is
hazardous containing Methane, CO, CO2 and H2S etc. Therefore, necessary precaution
and measures are to be taken in regard to human life and installations.
No structure of any kind shall be allowed to be constructed / altered within the premises,
without the permission of the Employer. Nothing is to be paid by the Employer for any
Page 216 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
addition, if allowed. In case of damages to the building/machines and shortcoming to the

machines, the same has to be made good as per original shape/good running condition by
the Contractor. The decision of the Engineer in this regard shall be final and binding.
20.7 Maintenance
Every part of the works and all the materials to be used therein shall be subjected to such
tests from time to time during the execution of the work as the Employer may direct and
the whole of such tests shall in all cases be made at the Contractor'
s sole expense.
The work shall be carried on and completed under the exclusive control, direction,
supervision and to the satisfaction of the Employer. The Employer shall likewise have full
power to reject or condemn any work or material that he may deem unsuitable. In case of
any work or material being rejected by the Employer, the Contractor shall immediately
remove and replace the same to the satisfaction of the Employer or the Employer shall
have full powers to get the same removed and replaced and deduct the expenditure
incurred in the process from any amount due or that may become due to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall use only the original and genuine spares of the original equipment as
per recommendations given in the maintenance booklet of the manufacturer’s as per
directions of the Employer. Adequate stock of such spares is to be maintained by the
Contractor. Test certificate of manufacturer is required along with supplies. Test
certificate of all major equipment shall be submitted from the manufacturer.
If any material brought upon the site of works or to the places where any operations have
been or are being carried out in connection with or for the purpose of the works, be in the
judgment of the Employer, of an inferior or improper description or improper be used in
the works, the said materials or workmanship shall where required by the Employer be
removed or amended by the Contractor forthwith or within such period for every breach
by the Contractor in this clause, the Employer is hereby authorized to remove or cause to
be removed the materials and workmanship so objected to or any part thereof and replace
the same with such other materials and workmanship as shall be satisfactory to him and
there upon the Contractor shall on demand repay to the Employer the expenses incurred
there by or to which the Employer may be put or be liable in connection therewith.
The Contractor shall be responsible for civil maintenance of buildings and roads,
changing of broken glasses, white washing and painting after two years and watering of
lawns/plants within the premises.
The Contractor shall also be responsible to maintain cleanliness in and around the
premises including machineries, disposal of screening, grit, floatings removed from the
sump, etc.
All the steel structures and machines installed in open areas should be painted after every
monsoon period after cleaning the surface as per the Employers direction.
However all the machines, equipments as well as steel structures inside the buildings shall
be painted after every twelve calendar months after proper cleaning of the surface as per
Employers direction except H. T. panel and transformers.
Surface drains shall be cleaned every year before the start of monsoon.
Page 217 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
All leakages shall be attended to promptly to avoid any nuisance, etc. Chokages shall be
removed at once. All the valves/gates which are not used regularly shall be operated at
least once a week and make sure that they are properly lubricated /greased.
All safety valves shall be checked daily and ensure that they are working properly. In case
of any fault the same shall be attended immediately without any wait. The maintenance of
the electro-mechanical equipments shall be as per maintenance manuals of the
manufacturer for all equipments. Contractor shall keep all the safety devices in working
order.
The Contractor shall make sure that no unwanted material shall float/grow in and around
different units. In case it is found the same shall be removed/cleaned immediately. He
shall also be responsible for cleaning/sweeping the buildings inside and outside, roads,
foot path, etc.
During preventive/ breakdown maintenance, the Contractor has to visit the unit/units as
and when needed. The pumping units or other machineries required, if any, shall have to
be arranged by the contractor at his own costs for completing the work. In case of battery
operated auto system panels and also system alarm etc., batteries are required to be
maintained and replaced as and when needed by the Contractor.
The Contractor has to make sure that proper fire extinguishers are used to cover any kind
of fire during any mishap within the total boundary area including machineries. The
expiry period of refills of various fire extinguishers shall be watched and maintained
during the period of contract.
The Contractor has to maintain all the toilets for proper use of the staff, etc. In no case
unhygienic conditions shall be allowed to develop. The Contractor has to maintain minor
repair in civil structures, including replacement of sanitary items, glass panes, etc. as and
when needed.
The Contractor shall maintain the PLC system in working condition for the 3 year O&M
period including defects liability period.
The Contractor shall not remove/shift any equipments/machinery even temporarily

without written permission of the Employer or authorized representative.
Though the Contractor has to operate and maintain all the equipments/machinery' s,
lighting (pumping station area, boundary walls, gate lighting etc.) but the machine of the
equipment under warranty shall not be dismantled without prior permission of the
Employer. The list of such equipments (under warranty), if any, shall be given to the
Employer.
POL (petrol/diesel oil & Lubricants) has to be arranged by the Contractor as and when
needed as per manufacturer’s recommendations for periodical maintenance of entire
system. The Employer shall not provide such items.
The Contractor shall have to carry out periodical testing of the installations/equipments as
manufacturer’s specifications, CPHEEO manual and Electricity Rules as amended up to
date and shall have to maintain complete record in the maintenance register. The
Contractor has to provide necessary protection systems wherever necessary including
alarms and fire extinguishers.
Page 218 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
The Employer shall be at liberty to post its staff for surveillance/ inspection at the
pumping station, rising main and appurtenances along with access to control room and
records, log books, MIS (Management Information system), data etc. round the clock as
required. The logbooks and other records shall be properly maintained and any cutting
shall be attested by the authorized staff of the Contractor and this record shall be open for
further inspection/checking by the Employer and all other Government Agencies
CPCB/SPCB etc. for further action/improvements/rectifications. The staff in each shift
shall mark their attendance on the log sheet individually. The machinery, electro-
mechanical equipments and other works covered under the above contract shall be totally
attended by the Contractor including any ' Trouble Shooting'to ensure smooth and trouble
free operation.
In case of major repair due to normal wear and tear/break down, the Contractor shall
bring the same to the notice of the Employer immediately and necessary measures for its
repair shall be taken simultaneously. Breakdown, all repairs of any kind are to be attended
by the Contractor. Any unit/equipment being irreparable in the opinion of the Employer
shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Employer. During 3 years O&M
period, the machinery has to be replaced from time to time as per manufacturer' s
recommendations / CPHEEO manual.
All relays and HT equipments shall be calibrated and tested at least once a year and the
report shall be submitted to the Employer.
The Employer reserves the right to carry out any work including capital works in the
Pumping Station / Rising Main for improvement of the performance of the system. The
Contractor shall not obstruct/ create hindrance to any such work/works by the Employer
or its authorized agencies.
The contractor shall give his telephone no., contact addresses, etc. to the Engineer as well
as shift duty staff to contact him during emergency/odd hours etc.
The Contractor shall be responsible to carry day to day as well as periodic maintenance,
necessary to ensure smooth and efficient performance/running of all equipments and
instruments installed at the premises.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance/replacement of street light poles and
lights, etc. Also all the equipment, building land, etc. shall remain the property of the
Employer.
20.8 Release of Hazardous Substances or Hazardous Waste
The Contractor, after first notifying the Employer, shall be responsible for fulfilling all
requirements associated with any release of any substance into the environment (from the
facility or the site) as required by Applicable law or by any Legal Entitlement including
but not limit to the notification or reporting of releases / Hazardous substances or
Hazardous Waste.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible to comply with all requirements of Laws
including hazardous substances, emission standards for air, discharge standards for
effluent oil, sub-soil pollution. The Contractor shall not release any hazardous/toxic
materials inside the premises.
Page 219 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
20.9 Technical Audit
The Employer has the right to conduct a technical audit of the Facility and to perform any
analysis or inspection if deemed necessary. Before any such inspection the Employer
shall give a prior written notice to the Contractor. The Contractor shall at the Contractor'
s
sole cost and expenses provide all assistance the Employer requires to complete these
inspections. Such audits may cover all or any of the obligations of the Contractors,
including without limitation.
a) Verification of the system / capacity for normal wear and tear during the O&M
period.
b) Verification of the performance standards and useful life of the individual assets of
the facility, for normal wear and tear during O&M period.
c) Verification of the capacity of the facility to meet functional guarantees.
20.10 Facility Visits
a) At any time or at the end of each twelve month period, or at the initiative of the
Employer, a visit shall be organized so that both parties can check the condition of the
installations at the facility.
b) A report shall be drawn up to record the opinions of the both parties. The Employer
reserves the right to call the equipment manufacturers or specialized technicians for
these visits. All expenses are to be borne by the contractor for the purpose.
20.11 Operation and Maintenance Manual
a) The Contractor shall provide six copies of draft O&M Manual to the Employer, at the
time of the commissioning of the project and on approval of draft, 10 (ten) copies of
operation & maintenance manual shall be supplied by the Contractor.
b) The O&M Manual shall include in elaborate detail, all operating and maintenance
procedures and policies which are required, advisable and / or necessary for the
facility to achieve full compliance with the operational guarantees and to achieve
maintenance and repair standard for the facility which will ensure compliance with
the maintenance specifications.
c) Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the O&M Manual shall include
descriptions, procedures, and shall comply with the requirements, set forth in the
provisions of the Bid Documents.
d) The draft of the O&M Manual shall be subject to the review and approval of the
Employer, which shall have the right to make any changes and revisions to the O&M
Manual as it may deem appropriate. The Contractor shall revise such draft O&M
Manual prior to the commencement of the O&M period.
e) During the Defect Liability Period, the contractor shall revise the draft O&M Manual
to reflect any updates, changes or revisions it deems appropriate based inter alia on its
experience and as necessary to reflect any modifications or adjustments. Without
limiting the above, the contractor shall annually fully review, revise, update and
modify the draft O&M Manual as may be necessary or appropriate. Any revision to
the draft O&M Manual shall be subject to the review and approval of the Employer.
The Employer shall have the right to require revisions to the draft O&M Manual as he
may deem appropriate. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Employer, for
his review and approval, 30 days prior to the proposed Date of Taking Over a revised
Page 220 of 238

BID DOCUMENT
draft O&M Manual which reflects all changes, revisions and modifications. The
Contractor shall prepare the O&M Manual, as approved by the Employer, prior to the
Date of Taking Over.
f) During the term of this Agreement, the Contractor shall promptly notify the
Employer of any revisions, additions or modifications which he, in his professional
opinion, believes should be made to the O&M Manual, whether as a result of
additional experience in operating and maintaining the facility, changes in sewage
volume, changes or modifications to any equipment, part, component or structure
incorporated in the facility. Such notification shall set forth the reason for the
proposed revision. Any proposed revision shall be subject to the approval of the
Employer. In addition, during the term of this Agreement, the Employer shall have
the right to require relevant changes, revisions, or additions to the O&M Manual as it
shall deem appropriate to ensure full compliance with the O&M Standards.
g) The Contractor shall submit 10 copies of the final O&M manual.
*****
Page 221 of 238

222
BID DOCUMENT
VOLUME – II Specifications, Forms of Bid and Schedules
Chapter – 5 : APPENDIX TO BID
CHAPTER-5
APPENDIX TO BID
Page 222 of 238

223
BID DOCUMENT
Chapter – 5 : APPENDIX TO BID
CHAPTER 5 – APPENDIX TO BID
Sub-Clause
10.1 of : Total 5% of the Contract Price in the form of an irrevocable and Unconditional
Chapter 2 Bank Guarantee from the contractor / Firms issued by any Nationalised Bank.
The Contractor/Firm shall request the bank to forward the Bank Guarantee by
Registered post to the Commissioner, Bilaspur Municipal Corporation, Bilaspur.
The Bank guarantee shall be provided within 14 days of receipt of the Letter of
Acceptance to be valid until completion of the Project and defects liability
period. No interest will be payable on the performance security.
41.1 of : Within 14 days of issue of the Letter of Acceptance

Chapter 2
43.1 of : Within 24 months including monsoon of the date specified in the Notice to
Chapter 2 Commence
47.1 of : 0.5% of amount the contract value for delay of every week, subject to a
Chapter 2 maximum of 5% (five percent) of the total contract value.
49.1 of : 365 days from the date of handing over of works to the Employer.
Chapter 2
:
60.1 of As per the prevailing Tax Rules of the Government of India and the Government
Chapter 2 of State of Chhattisgarh.
:
28.2 and 60.1 As per prevailing rates under the Chhattisgarh Minor Minerals Concession Rules.
of Chapter 2
:
60.2 of 1% (One percent) of the Contract Price.
Chapter 2
:
60.7 of Total 10% of the contract value shall be paid as advance in four installments of
Chapter 2 2.5% each against the Contractor submitting Bank Guarantees of like amount.
*****
Page 223 of 238

224
BID DOCUMENT
Chapter – 6 : SAMPLE FORM OF ACCEPTANCE & AGREEMENT
CHAPTER-6
SAMPLE FORM OF ACCEPTANCE

AND
AGREEMENT
Page 224 of 238

225
BID DOCUMENT
Sample Form of Acceptance
Letter of Acceptance
(Letterhead paper of Employer)
To:
(Name and Address of the Contractor)
Dear Sirs,
This is to notify you that your bid dated for the tender work of ______
____________________ ______ ___________ _____________ __________of
(name of the Project and specific Works, as given in the Instructions to Bidders) for the Contract Price
of Rs………………………………….(Rupees ……………………………………………………….)
is hereby accepted by our Agency.
We request that, within 14 days of the date of issue of this Letter of Acceptance, you:
(a) provide the requisite Performance Security in accordance with the provisions of Sub-Clause
10.1 of the General Conditions of Contract in the amount of 5% of the above Contract Price;
(a) prepare the Form of Agreement, in duplicate, on non-judicial Stamp Paper and meet the
Commissioner / Superintending Engineer, Bilaspur Municipal Corporation, Bilaspur, with the
undersigned at the address provided during normal office hours on any working day to sign
said Agreement.
(b) Provide additional bid security in the form of Demand Draft for the difference of award
amount and estimated amount put to Tender.
One copy of the signed Agreement will be provided to you for your files, while the other copy will
remain with us.
Yours faithfully,
Page 225 of 238

226
BID DOCUMENT
Sample Form of Agreement

AGREEMENT
This Agreement made this day of _____ 2008 between the Commissioner / Executive
Engineer, Bilaspur Municipal Corporation, Bilaspur, (hereinafter called as “Employer”) of the first
part and of_____ _________ ___ ____ ____ ___ _ ______ (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) of the
second part.
Whereas the Employer is desirous that certain works should be executed by the Contractor, viz
______________________ _________ ______ ____ and has accepted a Bid by the Contractor for the
execution and completion of such Works and the remedying of any defects therein.
Now this Agreement witnesseth as follows:
1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meaning as are respectively
assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to.
2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this
Agreement, viz.:
(a) The Letter of Acceptance dated
(b) The Said Bid;
(c) The General Conditions of Contract
(d) The Special Conditions of Contract
(e) The Special Specifications
(f) The Drawings;
(g) The Priced Bill of Quantities.
(h) The Standard Specifications; and
(i) The Schedules of Supplementary Information.
3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as hereinafter

mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to design, execute and
complete the Works and remedy any defects therein in conformity in all respects with the
provisions of the Contract.
4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the design,
execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein the Contract
Price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the
times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.
In Witness whereof the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed this day and year
first before written.
The Common Seal of ____ ______ _____ _____ ____ ______ ______ ____ ___ __
____________ was hereunto affixed in the presence of;
Signed, Sealed and delivered by the said _______________in the presence of:
Binding Signature of Engineer __________ _____ ________ ________ _______ ______ __
Binding Signature of Contractor _________ ______ ______ ________ _______ __ ____ __
Page 226 of 238

227
BID DOCUMENT
Chapter – 7 : SAMPLE FORM OF SECURITY
CHAPTER-7
SAMPLE FORM OF SECURITY
Page 227 of 238

228
BID DOCUMENT
Chapter – 7 : SAMPLE FORM OF SECURITY
SAMPLE FORM
PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE (UNCONDITIONAL)
To:
The Commissioner / Superintending Engineer
Bilaspur Municipal Corporation
Town Hall,
Bilaspur, Chhattisgarh State
WHEREAS [name and address of Contractor]

(hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has undertaken, in pursuance of Contract for the Work of _____
_________ ____________ ______________ ________ [name of Contract and brief description of
Works] (hereinafter called “the Contract”); on item rate basis.
AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor shall
furnish you with a Bank Guarantee by a Nationalised bank /from Banking Companies Registered
under Company,s Act 1956 located in India for the sum specified therein as security for compliance
with his obligation in accordance with the Contract;
AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee;
NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you, on
behalf of the Contractor, up to a total of Rs._____ ______ ___[amount of Guarantee, in words], such
sum being payable in Rupees in which the contract price is payable, and we undertake to pay you,
upon your first written demand and without cavil or argument any sum or sums within the limits of
_____ _____ _________ [amount of Guarantee] as aforesaid without your needing to prove or to
show grounds or reasons for your demand for the sum specified therein.
We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor before
presenting us with the demand.
We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract or of
the Works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract documents which may be made
between you and the Contractor shall in any way release us from any liability under this guarantee,
and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification.
The guarantee shall be valid until the date of issue of the Defects Liability Certificate.
SIGNATURE AND SEAL OF THE GUARANTOR

NAME OF BANK
DATE
Page 228 of 238

229
BID DOCUMENT
Chapter – 8 : STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER- 8
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Page 229 of 238

230
BID DOCUMENT
CHAPTER-8
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
1.0 SEWERAGE NETWORK………………………….. 232

1.1 Zone – I & II………………………………………... 232
1.2 Zone – III & IV…………………………………….. 232
1.3 Concrete Encasement………………………………. 233
1.4 Railway Crossing…………………………………… 233
1.5 Highway Crossing…………………………………... 233
2.0 SEWER APPURTENANCES……………………… 233
2.1 Manholes…………………………………………… 234
2.2 Zone – I & II………………………………………... 235
2.3 Zone – III & IV……………………………………... 235
3.0 SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS………………… 235
3.1 Sizing of Pumping Stations and Rising Main………. 236
3.2 Mechanical and Electrical Aspects…………………. 236
3.3 Other Features………………………………………. 236
3.4 Rising Main Discharge Tank……………………….. 237
3.5 Zone – I & II………………………………………... 237
3.6 Zone – III & IV……………………………………... 237
4.0 ROAD RESTORATION WORKS………………… 238
5.0 HOUSE CONNECTIONS…………………………. 238
6.0 EXECUTION OF PROJECT CONTRACT……… 238
Page 230 of 238

231
BID DOCUMENT
CHAPTER 8 - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
1.0 SEWERAGE NETWORK

1.1 Zone – I & II
This portion of the city lies to the south of Arpa River. It comprises of two sewerage
zones, namely Zone – I and Zone-II. However, for the convenience of execution and
maintenance of connectivity of the sewer network, a combined Network Design and Bill
of Quantities have been prepared for these two zones. This area covers almost 80% of the
total project area. The total length of sewers here is about 206 km with sizes of sewer
varying from 150 mm to 1600 mm. The details of pipe sizes and respective lengths are
mentioned below:
A) RCC NP2 PIPES

PIPE DIA in mm PIPE LENGTH in m
150 152410
200 13393
250 7572
300 5855
350 2216
400 1202
450 1819
500 3711
B) RCC NP3 PIPES

600 2703
700 2868
800 1481
900 490
1000 2261
1100 975
1200 493
1400 1264
1600 4513
1.2 Zone – III & IV
This portion of the city lies to the north of Arpa River. It comprises of two zones, namely
Zone - III and Zone – IV. Here again, the network design and bill of quantities for these
two zones have been clubbed together for the convenience of network connectivity and
execution works. This portion covers almost 20% of the total project area. The total
length of sewers here is about 60 km with sizes of sewer varying from 150 mm to 1200
mm. The details of pipe sizes and respective lengths are mentioned below:
A) RCC NP2 PIPES

150 37369
200 5644
250 2866
Page 231 of 238

232
BID DOCUMENT

300 2252
350 1846
400 1576
450 16
500 518
B) RCC NP3 PIPES
600 415
700 353
800 1039
900 805
1000 1361
1100 -
1200 3032
1.3 Concrete Encasement
Concrete encasements are used to prevent floatation, when crossing streams, nalla or
rivers and where crossing over utilities with less than 500 mm of clearance, or in areas
where the sewer has less than the required cover.
1.4 Railway Crossing
The railway line ‘Katni-Bilaspur’ and ‘Raipur-Bilaspur-Kolkata’ form the south boundary
of city limits. For carrying the sewage flow of ward number 37 and 39 (i.e. Shankar
Nagar and Ganesh Nagar), the railway line is required to be crossed near flyover bridge.
The distance from centre line of L-Xing at km 717.716 (717/26-28) is about 150 m. The
diameter of proposed pipe is 350 mm with 75 mm thickness, NP3 type.
1.5 Highway Crossing
The sewer pipe alignments under City maintained roads, which are designated by their
governing agencies, would meet the following requirements (more stringent criteria may
be required on a case specific basis):
Sewers would cross the roads at an angle as close to 90° as practical, but preferably
never less than 45°. Sewers shall not be placed under roadway bridges where there is a
likelihood of restricting the required area of the bridge or where there is a possibility
of endangering the foundations.
Sewer lines laid in a longitudinal direction on highway right-of-way shall be located at

sufficient distance from the edge of pavement to allow adequate working room and to
provide maximum safety to the motorist when the roadway is to remain open to
traffic. The sewer lines within the road right-of-way, but not located under paved
areas, shall have minimum 1.5 m of cover.
2.0 SEWER APPURTENANCES

Sewer appurtenances include manholes, junction chambers, etc.
Page 232 of 238

233
BID DOCUMENT
2.1 Manholes
The spacing of manholes and construction material followed is as under:
Manholes are built at every change of alignment, gradient or diameter, at the head of
all sewers and branches and at every junction of two or more sewers.
Drop manholes are provided where difference in two connecting sewer lines is more
than 600 mm.
At locations (narrow lanes/roads 2m width) where the ROW for construction of

manholes is restricted, customized small chambers would be constructed to act as
manholes.
Up to 900 mm diameter sewer, the spacing of manholes is 30 m. For 900 to 1500 mm

diameter sewers, the spacing of manholes is kept between 100 to 150 m.
All sewers above 450 mm diameter are provided with service manhole at intervals of
110 m to 120 m, with clear opening of 1200x900 mm at top to facilitate lowering of
bucket.
All manholes are circular type with internal diameter varying from 0.90 m to 1.80 m.
A minimum clear opening of 0.56 m is provided on all manholes to facilitate entry for
cleaning.
For entry, all manholes are provided with MS steps encapsulated with PVC material at
300 mm distance.
Pre-fabricated manholes are proposed for the entire sewerage system. The prefab RCC
manhole shall have four components, (i) precast monolithic base section, (ii) modular
riser section, (iii) top cone section and (iv) adjusting rings.
Manholes prefabricated from reinforced concrete shall be manufactured at work sites

in accordance with the specifications and drawings.
Manhole diameters shall range from 0.91 m to 1.80 m at the base.
Concrete used in the construction of the manholes shall be of grade M-30 using
sulphate resistant cement.
The contactor shall submit the structural design of all components of manhole for
approval from the Engineer before manufacturing.
Manhole modules shall be provided coatings on the interior of the manhole such as
coal-tar epoxy to negate the effect of H2S concentration.
The “O” ring joint shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C443, Standard
Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber
Gaskets or latest revision. The gasket joint shall conform to ASTM C990, Standard
Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using
Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants (or AASHTO M-199) or latest revision. Rubber boot
and stainless steel clamps, meeting the requirements of ASTM C923, Standard
Specification for Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures,
Page 233 of 238

234
BID DOCUMENT
Pipes and Laterals shall be supplied with the manhole bases to tie the pipe to the base
section of the manhole.
Placement of Manhole Sections: Pre-cast manhole sections shall be placed and aligned to
provide vertical sides. The completed manhole shall be rigid, true to dimensions, and
watertight. The joints between manhole sections shall be properly sealed utilizing an
approved rubber gasket and butyl rubber rope.
Placement of Adjusting Rings: Where one (1) solid riser or barrel section cannot be used,
final adjustments in elevation of the casting frame and cover shall be accomplished by the
use of pre-cast concrete adjusting rings of a minimum thickness of 100 mm. The total
number of adjusting rings shall be varying in depth from 100 mm to 300 mm. The use of
brick or block in lieu of adjustment rings is not allowed.
Connections to Manholes: Sanitary sewer connections to existing manholes shall be core-

drilled and made using a flexible rubber connector. Saw cutting and hammer taps are
prohibited. All connections shall provide for a watertight seal between the pipe and the
manhole. The connector shall be the sole element relied upon to assure a flexible water
tight seal of the pipe to the manhole.
The construction / manufacturing procedures to be followed for prefabricated manholes

shall be as per DIN 4034 Part-1 and DIN 4034 Part-2 (1990 edition) together with DIN
EN 1917:2003 (or BS EN 1917:2002). The rubber gaskets to be used in prefab manholes
shall be as per the specifications of IS 5382:1985.
2.2 Zone – I & II
MANHOLE SPECIFICATIONS NO. OF MANHOLES

0.91 m diameter and 0.91 m depth, extended up 3801
to 1.67 m depth
to 2.29 m depth
1.52 m diameter and depth beyond 2.30 m 3842
2.3 Zone – III & IV
MANHOLE SPECIFICATIONS NO. OF MANHOLES

to 1.67 m depth
to 2.29 m depth
1.80 m diameter and depth beyond 2.30 m -
3.0 SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS

The proposed sewerage network encounters many valley points within the city area,
where gravity flow of sewerage would lead to very deep sewers in the range of 10 m
depth. To avoid continuous lengths of deep sewers, proposals for sewage pumping station
are formulated.
Page 234 of 238

235
BID DOCUMENT
3.1 Sizing of Pumping Stations and Rising Main
The sewage pumping stations would be sized wet well volume equal to inflow of 15
minutes average sewage flow.
Pumps: The sewage pumping stations shall be of single well (wet well only) type with
submersible pumps with one working for average flow, one for peak flow and one for half
of average flow.
Geometry: The geometry of the pumping stations is kept rectangular.
Rising Main: DI pipe (Class K-9) shall be provided for rising main. These pipes shall
conform to IS 8329:2000 and the fittings should conform to IS 9523:2000. These pipes
shall be laid as per IS 12288:1987.
3.2 Mechanical and Electrical Aspects
Screens shall be provided at the entry point of sewage in the wet well for removal of
floating material. Screens shall be two in series and of electric hoist type. Inlet channel to
the wet well shall have sluice gate. Instruments provided shall be compatible with
SCADA, if implemented in future. Level switches and indicators shall be provided for
automatic start and stop operation of pumps. Alarms shall be provided for safe operation
of station. Overhead crane of suitable capacity shall be provided (either electrically or
manually operated).
HT panel with adequate capacities of VCB’S with protective relays shall be provided. LT
panel distribution board both for normal and emergency load shall be provided with
adequate capacity of ACB’S, MCCB’S. The control circuit shall be DC operated 12
Volts. Motors up to rating of 7.5 KW shall be operated with DOL starters whereas all
other motors shall be provided and operated with star delta starters. To ensure availability
of the power supply in the event of mains failure the power supply shall be given through
DG sets. It is proposed to install DG sets of 50% capacity of total load. Adequate internal
and external electrification work in and around the building shall be provided. All HT /LT
cables shall be of suitable grade with Aluminum conductor XLPE extruded as per IS:
7098. The wiring in the building shall be done with FRLS copper wires.
3.3 Other Features
Non-Return Valve: shall be provided in the rising main to prevent the back flow of
sewage.
Gate valve: shall be provided on the rising main on the discharge side to close the flow of
sewage during maintenance, inspection and repair of the pump.
Air valve: shall be provided at all high points along the rising main.
Pressure gauge: shall be installed at the appropriate position to record delivery pressure.
Sewage level indicator: shall also be fitted in wet well to record the level of the sewage.
Washouts: For cleaning and maintenance purpose, the low points (in vertical alignment)
shall be provided with wash outs in the form of openings.
Page 235 of 238

236
BID DOCUMENT
Pipeline protection: The rising main shall be having outside coating to protect from
weathering action / soil related corrosion.
Thrust Blocks: Rising main shall be securely anchored wherever, there is change in
direction. The design of thrust blocks shall be based on the safe bearing capacity of soil.
The rising main shall be checked for surge pressure as well.
3.4 Rising Main Discharge Tank
The force main from pumping station shall be discharging in to a special manhole before
the flow starts under gravity influence. These manholes shall be RCC structure with
special protective coating from inside for prevention of manhole degradation caused by
the long-term corrosive effects of exposure to concentrated streams of wastewater.
3.5 Zone – I & II
A total of 5 sewage pumping stations are to be provided in these two zones. Their details
are tabulated below:
SPS ADW Flow SPS Location Length of Dia of DI

No. m3/s Pumping force main,
main (m) mm
• Ward no.3 on trunk 10 on 35 450
A 0.090
south of Arpa River
• Ward no.1 on trunk 8 on 15 150
B 0.006
south of Arpa River
• Near Mangla village on trunk 15 250
C 0.023
8 on south of Arpa River
• Ward no. 22 on trunk 6 on 400 800
D 0.500
south of Arpa River
E 0.780
south of Arpa River
SPS-A shall be provided with pumps of capacity of 7 HP to 33 HP according to the

inflow of sewage.
SPS-B shall be provided with pumps of capacity of 0.4 HP to 2 HP according to the

inflow of sewage.
SPS-C shall be provided with pumps of capacity of 1.5 HP to 7 HP according to the

inflow of sewage.
SPS-D shall be provided with pumps of capacity of 60 HP to 300 HP according to the

inflow of sewage.
SPS-E shall be provided with pumps of capacity of 90 HP to 430 HP according to the

inflow of sewage.
3.6 Zone - III & IV

In these zones, two sewage pumping stations are to be provided whose details are enlisted
henceforth:
Page 236 of 238

237
BID DOCUMENT
SPS ADW Flow SPS Location Length of Dia of DI

No. m3/s Pumping force main,
main (m) mm
A 0.200
north of Arpa River
• Near Mopka Chowk on trunk 1000 700
B 0.280
3 on north of Arpa River
SPS-A shall be provided with pumps of capacity of 20 HP to 120 HP according to the

inflow of sewage.
SPS-B shall be provided with pumps of capacity of 30 HP to 165 HP according to the

inflow of sewage.
4.0 Road Restoration Works

Under this project about 267 km of sewerage network is to be laid in the municipal area.
Out of this length, approximately 80 km of road forms the major roads in the city area,
where sewer pipes from 300 mm to 1400 mm in diameter are to be installed. These roads
are of commercial importance and carry city traffic. Hence it is very pertinent to consider
the restoration of these roads up on installation of sewer lines. Typically the road to be
restored would be varying from 3 m to 8 m in width. The roads where sewer network is
laid shall be considered for restoration. The length of road having BT surface is about 100
km and 167 km is of CC surface type. The specifications for restoration works shall be as
per MoRTH standards.
5.0 House Connections

The provision for house or property connections to the proposed sewerage network is
contemplated under this project. A total of 24,675 property connections are estimated
under this project in all the four sewerage zones.
Brick masonry manholes (or collection chambers) of 0.90 m x 0.80 m of 45 to 60 m depth

and 0.9 m x 1.2 m x 0.9 m depth shall be constructed near the property line for house
connections. Salt glazed stone ware (SW) pipes, socket and spigot type of 150 mm
diameter shall be used for connecting these brick manholes to the main sewerage network
manholes (prefabricated, as described in 2.1 above). Refer the typical drawing of house
connection enclosed in Volume III : Drawings.
6.0 Execution of Project Contract

The execution of this project contract shall be carried out in compliance with the
following:
Unified Schedule of Rates for the work of Water Supply & Sewerage Pipelines in
force, issued by Engineer-in-Chief, Public Health Engineering Department, Madhya
Pradesh, Bhopal with update amendments.
Schedule of Rates for Building Works in force, issued by Engineer-in-chief, PWD,

Madhya Pradesh, Bhopal with update amendments.
Schedule of Rates for Road Works in force, issued by Engineer-in-chief, PWD (B/R),
Raipur, Chhattisgarh with update amendments.
Specifications shall refer to the CPHEEO Manual published by the Ministry of Urban
Development, Government of India.
Page 237 of 238

238
BID DOCUMENT
Specifications should refer to the Central Public Works Department (CPWD)

specifications as applicable on 1st November, 1999.
Specification shall refer to the specifications for road & bridge works (4th revision)
published by Indian Road Congress, August 2001 on behalf of Ministry of Road
Transport & Highway (Road Wing), Government of India.
BIS refers to Bureau of Indian Standards. Works shall conform to all the relevant IS
Code of Practice.
Quality control test to be performed for each work as per contract document.
UIDSSMT & Central government guidelines to be referred to the work from time-to-
time.
State government guidelines and directions to be referred to the work from time-to-
time.
*****
Page 238 of 238

Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bilaspur Municipal Corporation,

TENDER NO. 23/BMC/PC/2008-09 BILASPUR, DATED 25/07/2008

2. Construction of Sewage Pumping Stations (Submersible

3. Road restoration works where sewers are laid in Bilaspur

4. The estimated cost of work is Rs.118.47 Crores

Volume – II: Special Specifications Forms &

Date of issue of Blank Tender Documents : From 25-07-2008 on BMC’s website

Last date of Tender Submission : 19-08-2008 Upto 03.00 p.m.

1. Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Sewerage Pipelines including

1.0 VOLUME - 1 : Invitation for Bids, Instructions to Bidder &

2.0 VOLUME - II : SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS, FORMS

3.0 VOLUME - III : Drawings

SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

10. Pipe work………………………………………….. 75 – 90

11. Brick Masonry……...………………………………. 91 – 93

12. Paving, Flooring & Skirting………………………. 94 – 97

13. Cement Plastering and Pointing………………… 98 – 101

14. Wood Work………………………………………… 102 – 106

15. Roof, Doors and Windows, Rolling Shutter…...…… 107 – 112

16. Painting and Protective Coating………………… 113 – 118

17. Miscellaneous Works…………………………….. 119 – 122

18. Mechanical Works……………………………….. 123 – 155

19. Electrical Works………………………………….. 156 – 212

Specifications for Operation and Maintenance of

CHAPTER -4 : SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS

The following IS codes shall be applicable for the works:

1. Earthwork excavation - IS 3764 (1992)

SECTION-1 : SPECIAL CONDITIONS

As detailed in the bill of quantities, specifications and special specifications given

Contractors shall completely acquaint themselves with the requirements of the

Works under Contracts

A mutually agreed Primavera / MS Project work schedule shall be made before

A list of drawings as part of bid document is given in Volume-III, Chapter-9.

1.4 Data for Setting out the Works

1.5 Geological Data

1.6 Access to the Site

1.7 Claims for Damage to Persons or Property

1.9 Protection of Property and Utilities

b. Protection of Utilities and Sub-structures

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, before commencing any excavation, to

1.10 Superintendence and Labour Competency

1.11 Engineer to Approve

iv. The quality of materials.

1.12 Manufacturer's Supervision & Instruction

1.13 Work Site Maintenance

a. Access to Property Adjacent to the Works

c. Water Hydrants and Utility Valves

1.14 Protection from Rain and Winds

1.15 Use of Explosives

1.16 Amenities to be provided

1.17 Works to be kept Clear of Water

1.18 Discharge of Water into Existing Streams, etc.

1.19 Temporary Fencing

1.20 Temporary Works

1.21 Construction Facilities

d. Temporary Storage Structures: The temporary structures provided by the Contractor

e. Transportation Facilities: The Contractor shall investigate the availability of

h. Safety Measures: The Contractor shall conduct his operations in a manner so as to

k. Contractor's Offices, etc.

c. Specified make or equivalent make conforming to BIS specification shall be supplied

e. Materials shall be transported, handled and stored in such a manner as to prevent

1.23 Equipment Performance

1.25 Testing and Rejecting